Professional Documents
Culture Documents
B-65162E FANUC AC SERVO AMPLIFIER Description Manual PDF
B-65162E FANUC AC SERVO AMPLIFIER Description Manual PDF
/
om
Computer Numerical Control Products
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
Descriptions Manual
/
om
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
s.c
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
re
pa
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
cs
.cn
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
w
w
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
w
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
ht
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
/
om
s.c
This ”Safety Precautions” section describes the precautions which must be observed to ensure safety when using
FANUC servo amplifiers. Users of any control motor amplifier model are requested to read the ”Safety
Precautions” carefully before first using the amplifier. Users should also read the relevant description in this
re
manual to become fully familiar with the functions of the servo amplifier.
pa
Contents
cs
.cn
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2
s–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–65162E/03
/
om
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
s.c
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
re
WARNING
pa
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
cs
.cn
CAUTION
w
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
w
w
NOTE
://
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
tp
s–2
B–65162E/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
/
om
WARNING
s.c
F Check the specification code of the amplifier.
Check that the delivered amplifier is as originally ordered.
re
F Mount a ground fault interrupter.
pa
To guard against fire and electric shock, fit the factory power supply or machine with a ground
fault interrupter (designed for use with an inverter).
cs
F Securely ground the amplifier.
Securely connect the ground terminal and metal frame of the amplifier and motor to a common
.cn
ground plate of the power magnetics cabinet.
Amplifiers and AC reactors are heavy. When transporting them or mounting them in the cabinet,
therefore, be careful not to injured yourself or damage the equipment. Be particularly carefull
w
F Never ground or short–circuit either the power supply lines or power lines.
Protect the lines from any stress such as bending. Handle the ends appropriately.
://
F Ensure that the power supply lines, power lines, and signal lines are
tp
securely connected.
A loose screw, loose connection, or the like will cause a motor malfunction or overheating, or
ht
a ground fault.
s–3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–65162E/03
CAUTION
/
Also, do not stack unpacked amplifiers on top of each other.
om
F Use the amplifier in an appropriate environment.
See the allowable ambient temperatures and other requirements, given in the corresponding
s.c
descriptions.
re
Do not place anything on the amplifier.
pa
F Do not disassemble the amplifier.
cs
F Connect the power supply lines and power lines to the appropriate
terminals.
.cn
F Ensure that the cables used for the power supply lines and power lines are
w
If a plastic section breaks, it may cause internal damage, thus interfering with normal operation.
The edge of a broken section is likely to be sharp and, therefore, presents a risk of injury.
tp
F Before connecting the power supply wiring, check the supply voltage.
Check that the supply voltage is within the range specified in this manual, then connect the power
ht
supply lines.
s–4
B–65162E/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
/
om
F Ensure that valid parameters are specified.
Specifying an invalid parameter for the combination of motor and amplifier may not only
prevent normal operation of the motor but also result in damage to the amplifier.
s.c
F Ensure that the amplifier and peripheral equipment are securely
connected.
re
Check that the magnetic contactor, circuit breaker, and other devices mounted outside the
amplifier are securely connected to each other and that those devices are securely connected to
pa
the amplifier.
amplifier is mounted, dust entering the gap may build up and prevent the normal operation of
the amplifier.
w
amplifier. For example, signal lines must be routed away from power supply lines and power
lines.
w
://
tp
ht
s–5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–65162E/03
NOTE
/
om
F After unpacking the amplifier, carefully check for any damage.
s.c
F Mount the amplifier in a location where it can be easily accessed to allow
periodic inspection and daily maintenance.
re
F Leave sufficient space around the machine to enable maintenance to be
pa
performed easily.
Do not place any heavy objects such that they would interfere with the opening of the doors.
cs
F Keep the parameter table and spare parts at hand.
.cn
Also, keep the specifications at hand. These items must be stored in a location where they can
be retrieved immediately.
A cable to be shielded must be securely connected to the ground plate, using a cable clamp or
w
the like.
w
://
tp
ht
s–6
B–65162E/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
/
om
WARNING
F Before turning on the power, check that the cables connected to the power
s.c
magnetics cabinet and amplifier, as well as the power lines and power
supply lines, are securely connected. Also, check that no lines are slack.
re
F Before turning on the power, ensure that the power magnetics cabinet is
pa
securely grounded.
F Before turning on the power, check that the door of the power magnetics
cs
cabinet and all other doors are closed.
Ensure that the door of the power magnetics cabinet containing the amplifier, and all other doors,
.cn
are securely closed. During operation, all doors must be closed and locked.
Only a person trained in the maintenance of the corresponding machine or equipment should
w
open the door, and only after shutting off the power supply to the power magnetics cabinet (by
opening both the input circuit breaker of the power magnetics cabinet and the factory switch used
to supply power to the cabinet). If the machine must be operated with the door open to enable
w
adjustment or for some other purpose, the operator must keep his or her hands and tools well
away from any dangerous voltages. Such work must be done only by a person trained in the
://
F When operating the machine for the first time, check that the machine
tp
operates as instructed.
ht
To check whether the machine operates as instructed, first specify a small value for the motor,
then increase the value gradually. If the motor operates abnormally, perform an emergency stop
immediately.
F After turning on the power, check the operation of the emergency stop
circuit.
Press the emergency stop button to check that the motor stops immediately, and that the power
being supplied to the amplifier is shut off by the magnetic contactor.
s–7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–65162E/03
CAUTION
/
om
If an alarm is displayed, take appropriate action as explained in the maintenance manual. If the
work to be done requires that the door of the power magnetics cabinet be left open, the work must
be carried out by a person trained in the maintenance of the machine or equipment. Note that
if some alarms are forcibly reset to enable operation to continue, the amplifier may be damaged.
s.c
Take appropriate action according to the contents of the alarm.
F Before operating the motor for the first time, mount and adjust the position
re
and speed detectors.
Following the instructions given in the maintenance manual, adjust the position and speed
pa
detectors for the spindle so that an appropriate waveform is obtained. If the detectors are not
properly adjusted, the motor may not rotate normally or the spindle may fail to stop as desired.
cs
F If the motor makes any abnormal noise or vibration while operating, stop
it immediately.
.cn
Note that if operation is continued in spite of there being some abnormal noise or vibration, the
amplifier may be damaged. Take appropriate corrective action, then resume operation.
w
ambient temperature increases. If the amplifier is used continuously with an excessive load
applied, the amplifier may be damaged.
w
://
tp
ht
s–8
B–65162E/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
/
om
WARNING
F Read the maintenance manual carefully and ensure that you are totally
s.c
familiar with its contents.
The maintenance manual describes daily maintenance and the procedures to be followed in the
event of an alarm being issued. The operator must be familiar with these descriptions.
re
F Notes on replacing a fuse or PC board
pa
1) Before starting the replacement work, ensure that the circuit breaker protecting the power
magnetics cabinet is open.
cs
2) Check that the red LED that indicates that charging is in progress is not lit. The position
of the charging LED on each model of amplifier is given in this manual. While the LED
is lit, hazardous voltages are present inside the unit, and thus there is a danger of electric
.cn
shock.
3) Some PC board components become extremely hot. Be careful not to touch these
components.
w
is indicated, contact FANUC before replacing the PC board. Also, before and after replacing
a PC board, check its pin settings.
w
6) After replacing the fuse, ensure that the screws are firmly tightened. For a socket–type fuse,
ensure that the fuse is inserted correctly.
://
When removing the case or PC board, take care not to lose any screws. If a screw is lost inside
the nit and the power is turned on, the machine may be damaged.
s–9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–65162E/03
WARNING
/
If the machine stops upon an alarm being issued, check the alarm number. Some alarms indicate
om
that a component must be replaced. If the power is reconnected without first replacing the failed
component, another component may be damaged, making it difficult to locate the original cause
of the alarm.
s.c
F Before resetting an alarm, ensure that the original cause of the alarm has
been removed.
re
F Contact FANUC whenever a question relating to maintenance arises.
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
s–10
B–65162E/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
/
When replacing a component or PC board, check that all components, including the snubber
om
capacitor, are correctly mounted. If the snubber capacitor is not mounted, for example, the IPM
will be damaged.
s.c
F Check the specification code of the fuse, PC board, and other
re
components.
When replacing a fuse or PC board, first check the specification code of the fuse or PC board,
pa
then mount it in the correct position. The machine will not operate normally if a fuse or PC board
having other than the correct specification code is mounted, or if a fuse or PC board is mounted
in the wrong position.
cs
F Mount the correct cover.
.cn
The cover on the front of the amplifier carries a label indicating a specification code. When
mounting a previously removed front cover, take care to mount it on the unit from which it was
removed.
w
1) A dirty heat sink or fan results in reduced semiconductor cooling efficiency, which degrades
reliability. Periodic cleaning is necessary.
w
2) Using compressed air for cleaning scatters the dust. A deposit of conductive dust on the
://
has cooled to room temperature. The heat sink becomes extremely hot, such that touching
it during operation or immediately after power–off is likely to cause a burn. Be extremely
careful when touching the heat sink.
ht
s–11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–65162E/03
NOTE
/
om
F Store the manuals in a safe place.
The manuals should be stored in a location where they can be accessed immediately it so required
during maintenance work.
s.c
F Notes on contacting FANUC
re
Inform FANUC of the details of an alarm and the specification code of the amplifier so that any
components required for maintenance can be quickly secured, and any other necessary action
can be taken without delay.
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
s–12
B–65162E/03 Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 POWER SUPPLY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
/
1.3 SPINDLE AMPLIFIER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
om
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.1 200–V Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
s.c
2.1.2 400–V Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.1 200–V Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.2 400–V Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
re
2.2.3 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
pa
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.1 HOW TO SELECT THE SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.1.1 200–V Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.1.2
cs
400–V Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.2 SELECTING A SPINDLE AMPLIFIER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3 HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE (PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
.cn
3.6.3 Number of Connected Servo Amplifier Modules and Spindle Amplifier Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.6.4 Example of Selecting a Power Supply Module (PSM–HV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.7 LIST OF MOTOR OUTPUT CAPACITIES FOR POWER SUPPLY SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.7.1 Servo Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.7.2 Spindle Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.1 200–V INPUT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.1.1 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.1.2 Servo Amplifier Module (SVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1.3 Spindle Amplifier Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.2 400–V INPUT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.2.1 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
c–1
Table of Contents B–65162E/03
/
5. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
om
5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.2 INPUT POWER AND GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.2.1 Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
s.c
5.2.2 Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.2.3 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.3 NOISE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.3.1 Separation of Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
re
5.3.2 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.3.3 Protecting External Electronic Devices from Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.3.4 CE Marking Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
pa
5.3.5 Selecting a Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.4 NOTES ON AMPLIFIER INSTALLATION RELATED TO SAFETY STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
cs
5.4.2 Standard Class of Insulation Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.4.3 Protection Against Electric Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.4.4 Protective Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
.cn
7. COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
c–2
B–65162E/03
9. CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9.1 COMPLETE CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9.2 CABLE CONNECTION DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
9.2.1 Power Supply Module Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
/
9.2.2 Servo Amplifier Module Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
om
9.2.3 Spindle Amplifier Module Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
9.3 CONNECTOR LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
9.3.1 Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
9.3.2 Servo Amplifier Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
s.c
9.3.3 Spindle Amplifier Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
9.4 CABLE LEAD–IN DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9.4.1 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9.4.2 Servo Amplifier Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
re
9.4.3 Spindle Amplifier Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
pa
10.INTERFACE SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
10.1 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL (*ESP)– CONTACT INPUT SIGNAL – . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
10.1.1 Emergency Stop Signal (*ESP) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
cs
10.1.2 Sequence for Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
10.1.3 Sequence for Releasing Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
10.2 SPINDLE CONTROL SIGNALS (A SERIES SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
.cn
10.2.16 Spindle Override Command (Function) With Analog Input Voltage (OVRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
10.2.17 Motor Power Off Signal (MPOFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
ht
c–3
Table of Contents B–65162E/03
/
10.5 SPINDLE AMPLIFIER OUTPUT SIGNALS (αC SERIES SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
om
10.5.1 Output Frequency Display Signal (SM)
(Usable as Load Meter Voltage Signal According to Parameter Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
10.5.2 Load Meter Voltage (LM)
(Either Speedometer Data or Load Meter Data is Selected According to Parameter Setting) . . . . . . . 410
s.c
11.OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
11.1 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
11.1.1 Position Coder Methed Spindle Orientation (αC Series Spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
re
11.1.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
11.1.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
pa
11.1.1.3 Configuration and Order Drawing Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
11.1.1.4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
11.1.1.5 Signal Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
cs
11.1.1.6 Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
11.1.1.7 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
.cn
11.1.1.8 High–speed Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
11.1.2 Spindle Orientation of Position Coder Type (αC Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
11.1.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
11.1.2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
w
c–4
B–65162E/03
/
11.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
om
11.2.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
11.2.3 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
11.2.4 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
11.2.5 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
s.c
11.3 CS CONTOURING CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
11.3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
11.3.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
11.3.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
re
11.3.4 DI and DO Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
11.3.5 Sample Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
11.3.6 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
pa
11.4 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
11.4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
11.4.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
cs
11.4.3 Explanation of Spindle Synchronization Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
11.4.4 DI/DO Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
11.4.5 Sample Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
.cn
c–5
Table of Contents B–65162E/03
/
om
12.1 POSITION CODERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
12.1.1 a Position Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
12.1.2 High–resolution Position Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
12.1.3 Mounting Conditions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
12.2 BZ SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
s.c
12.3 OTHER DETECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
12.3.1 High–resolution Magnetic Pulse Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
12.3.2 Magnetic Sensor (for Orientation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
re
APPENDIX
pa
A. FITTING A LIGHTNING SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
A.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
A.1.1
cs
200V Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
A.1.2 400V Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
A.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
.cn
C. CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
E.1 SPINDLE CABLE LENGTH (WHEN RECOMMENDED CABLES ARE USED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
://
E.2 SERVO CABLE LENGTH (WHEN RECOMMENDED CABLES ARE USED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
c–6
B–65162E/03 1. GENERAL
1
/
om
This specification describes the configuration, dimensions, combination,
and connection of the servo amplifier α series. The servo amplifier α
series consists of the modules explained in this chapter.
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
1
1. GENERAL B–65162E/03
1.1 The power supply module provides the main power supply and control
power supply. Select a power supply module according to the capacities
POWER SUPPLY of the servo motors and spindle motors being used. A single power supply
MODULE module can be used to drive both the servo and spindle motors provided
the capacity of the power supply module is not exceeded.
There are four types of power supply module, as follows:
/
om
(1) Power supply module (PSM)
s.c
to the power supply during motor deceleration (regeneration).
re
This power supply module is designed to provide a main power supply
of 200V/230V. The module uses resistance regeneration that allows
pa
energy to be consumed by resistance during motor deceleration
(regeneration).
cs
Regenerative discharge unit
AC reactor unit
2
B–65162E/03 1. GENERAL
Naming convention
PSM j–j j
(1) (2) (3) (4)
/
om
(2) Type
None = power regeneration, R = resistance regeneration,
V = voltage conversion type, power regeneration,
C = capacitor module
s.c
(3) Motor output
(4) Input voltage
None = 200V, HV = 400V
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
3
1. GENERAL B–65162E/03
1.2 The servo amplifier module drives a servo motor. Select a servo amplifier
module according to the servo motor being used.
SERVO AMPLIFIER There are two types of servo amplifier module, as follows:
MODULE
(1) Servo amplifier module (SVM)
This module drives a servo motor of the 200–V input series. Modules for
/
one axis, two axes, and three axes are available. As the interface with the
om
CNC, three types of interface are used: Type A, type B, and FSSB.
(2) Servo amplifier module (SVM–HV)
This module drives a servo motor of the 400–V input series. Modules for
s.c
one axis and two axes are available. As the interface with the CNC, three
types of interface are used: Type A, type B, and FSSB.
re
Check the interface of the CNC being used, and select an appropriate
servo amplifier module.
pa
Naming convention
SVM j–j / j / j j
cs
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
.cn
(1) Servo amplifier module
(2) Number of axes
1 = 1–axis amplifier, 2 = 2–axis amplifier, 3 = 3–axis amplifier
w
4
B–65162E/03 1. GENERAL
1.3 The spindle amplifier module drives a spindle motor. Select a spindle
amplifier module according to the spindle motor being used.
SPINDLE AMPLIFIER There are three types of spindle amplifier module, as follows:
MODULE
(1) Spindle amplifier module (SPM)
This module drives a spindle motor of the 200–V input series.
/
om
(2) Spindle amplifier module (SPMC)
This module drives the αC series spindle motor.
(3) Spindle amplifier module (SPM–HV)
s.c
This module drives a spindle motor of the 400V input series.
Naming convention
re
SPM j–j j
(1) (2) (3) (4)
pa
(1) Spindle amplifier module
(2) Motor type
cs
None = α series, C = αC series
(3) Rated motor output
.cn
5
1. GENERAL B–65162E/03
Related manuals The following six kinds of manuals are available for FANUC SERVO
AMPLIFIER α series. In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk
(*).
Document
Document name Major contents Major usage
number
/
Specification
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series D Characteristics
om
B–65142E
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions
D Connections
D Selection of motor
D Specification D Connection of motor
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series D Characteristics
s.c
B–65152E
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions
D Connections
D Specifications and
re
functions D Selection of
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series D Installation amplifier
B–65162E *
DESCRIPTIONS D External dimensions and mainte- D Connection of
pa
nance area amplifier
D Connections
D Initial setting
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
B–65150E D Setting parameters
PARAMETER MANUAL D Start up the system
D Description of parameters
((Software))
w
6
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
7
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
2.1 The FANUC series consists of the following units and parts:
CONFIGURATION
2.1.1
200–V Input Series
(1) Power supply module (PSM) (Basic)
/
om
(2) Power supply module (register discharge type) (PSMR) (Basic)
(3) Servo amplifier module (SVM) (Basic)
(4) Spindle amplifier module (SPM) (Basic)
(5) Spindle amplifier module (SPMC) (Basic)
s.c
(6) AC reactor (Basic)
(7) Connectors (for connection cables) (Basic)
(8) Fuses (Basic)
(9) Power transformer (Optional)
re
(10) Fan adaptor (Optional)
(11) AC line filter (Basic)
pa
(12) Regenerative discharge unit (Basic)
(13) Dynamic brake module (DBM) (Basic)
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
8
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ
/
ÃÃ
Power supply Spindle amplifier Servo amplifier Servo amplifier
om
module module module (2–axes) module (2–axes)
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
L+
L–
ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
DC link (300VDC)
s.c
AC input
for control PSM SPM SVM SVM
power
ÃÃ
supply SPMC
200R,
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
200S
re
ÃÃ ÃÃ Ã
ÃÃ ÃÃ
Circuit 1φ
UL VL WL UL VL WL
breaker 2 L1 L2 L3 UVW UM VM WM UM VM WM
pa
Fan
motor
Lightening surge
absorbers
w
: Basic
://
: Optional
: Units prepared by the machine tool builder
tp
NOTE
ht
1 See Chapter 3 for details of how to combine the power supply module, servo amplifier modules,
and spindle amplifier modules.
2 A magnetic contactor, AC reactor, and circuit breakers are always required.
3 To protect the unit from surge currents caused by lightning, connect surge absorbers between
lines, and between the lines and ground, at the power inlet of the power magnetics cabinet.
See APPENDIX A for details.
9
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ
/
Power supply Spindle amplifier Servo amplifier
module module module (2–axes)
om
ÃÃ
L+
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
L–
ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ DC link (300VDC)
s.c
AC input
ÃÃ
for control PSMR SPM SVM
power SPMC
supply 200R,
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ
200S,
re
1φ RE1 RE2
ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ Ã
TH1 TH2 UL VL WL
RST UVW UM VM WM
pa
Power Circuit
cs
Magnetic AC line Servo
transformer 200VAC breaker 1 contactor filter motor
220VAC Regenerative
230VAC discharge unit
.cn
Fan
ÃÃÃ
(400VAC) 3φ
motor
(460VAC)
ÃÃÃ 1φ
ÃÃÃ
w
Servo
ÃÃÃ
motor
3φ 3φ
w
: Basic
://
: Optional
: Units prepared by the machine tool builder
tp
ht
NOTE
1 See Chapter 3 for details of how to combine the power supply module, servo amplifier modules,
and spindle amplifier modules.
2 A magnetic contactor, AC line filter, regenerative discharge unit, and circuit breakers are always
required.
3 To protect the unit from surge currents caused by lightning, connect surge absorbers between
lines, and between the lines and ground, at the power inlet of the power magnetics cabinet.
See APPENDIX A for details.
4 When an insulating transformer is installed, high–frequency noise to the power supply is
reduced, so the AC line filter is not required. If the insulating transformer is installed outside
the power magnetics cabinet, and the cable connecting the amplifier is exposed, the cable must
be covered with a grounded metal duct, or an AC line filter must be installed.
10
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
2.1.2
400–V Input Series
/
om
(2) Capacitor module (PSMC–HV) (Basic)
(3) Servo amplifier module (SVM–HV) (Basic)
(4) Spindle amplifier module (SPM–HV) (Basic)
(5) AC reactor (Basic)
s.c
(6) Connectors (for cables) (Basic)
(7) Fuses (Basic)
(8) Fan adaptor (Optional)
(The following example uses one 2–axis servo amplifier module and one
re
spindle amplifier module.)
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
11
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
module module module module (2–axes)
ÃÃ
L+
ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
L–
DC link
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
Control power supply (DC600V)
(AC200V)
/
AC input
(AC230V) PSM–HV
om
PSMC–HV SPM–HV SVM–HV
1φ
ÃÃ
200R
ÃÃ
Circuit 200S,
ÃÃ Ã
ÃÃ
breaker 2
ÃÃ ÃÃ
Lightning surge UL VL WL
s.c
L1 L2 L3 UVW UM VM WM
protector
Circuit Magnetic AC
(AC400V) breaker 1 contactor reactor
(AC460V) Fan
re
motor Servo
3φ motor
Circuit
pa 3φ
Spindle motor
breaker 3
cs Servo
Lightening surge motor
protector
.cn
: Basic configuration
: Equipment to be prepared by the user
w
NOTE
1 For the control power supply, single–phase 200VAC is required.
w
between the lines and between a line and ground to protect the equipment from surge voltages
caused by lightning. For details, see Appendix A.
4 Note that when PSM–75HV is used, the position of the PSMC–HV differs from the above
://
diagram. For the position of the PSMC–HV, see (5) in Section 5.1.
5 Measures must be taken to detect the operation (trip) of circuit breaker 3.
tp
ht
12
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
(6) Connectors (for cables) (Basic)
om
(7) Fuses (Basic)
(8) Fan adaptor (Optional)
(9) Dynamic brake module (DBM) (Basic)
(The following example uses two 2–axis servo amplifier modules and one
s.c
spindle amplifier module.)
re
Power supply Spindle amplifier Servo amplifier Servo amplifier
ÃÃ ÃÃ Ã ÃÃ
module module module (2–axes) module (2–axes)
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
pa
L+
(AC200V)
ÃÃ
L–
DC link ÃÃ
(DC300V) ÃÃ
cs
(AC230V) PSMV–HV PMS SVM SVM
1φ 1φ
ÃÃ SPMC
ÃÃ
200R
.cn
Circuit 200S,
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ
breaker 2
400R,400S
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
Lightning surge 400T UL VL WL UL VL WL
protector L1 L2 L3 UVW UM VM WM UM VM WM
Magnetic
w
(AC400V) contactor
(AC460V)
Fan
w
AC reactor unit
://
: Basic configuration
ht
NOTE
1 For the control power supply, single–phase 200VAC is required.
2 Install a magnetic contactor and AC reactor. Always connect the magnetic contactor closer to
the input power supply than the AC reactor unit.
3 At the power supply inlet of the power magnetics cabinet, install lightning surge protectors
between the lines and between a line and ground to protect the equipment from surge voltages
caused by lightning. For details, see Appendix A.
4 Measures must be taken to detect the operation (trip) of circuit breaker 3.
13
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
2.2
ORDERING
INFORMATION
2.2.1
/
200–V Input Series
om
(1) Power Supply Module (PSM)
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
s.c
(H x W x D mm)
re
PSM–15 A06B–6087–H115
pa
Standard PSM–26 A06B–6087–H126
38090307
PSM–30 A06B–6087–H130
PSM–37
cs
A06B–6087–H137
See Chapter 3 for details of how to select the power supply module.
NOTE
w
PSM–11 and PSM–45 require forced air cooling from the outside. See (7) in Section 2.2.3 and
Chapter 7.
w
w
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
Standard
PSMR–5.5 A06B–6081–H106 38060307
ht
NOTE
For the PSMR, a regenerative discharge unit is required. See (8) in Section 2.2.3, Section
3.4.5, and Section 8.1.7.
14
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
(a) TYPE A and TYPE B interface
om
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SVM1–12 A06B–6079–H101
s.c
38060172
SVM1–20 A06B–6079–H102
SVM1–40S A06B–6079–H103
re
SVM1–40L A06B–6079–H104 38060307
pa
SVM1–130 A06B–6079–H106 38090307 (Note 1)
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
w
SVM1–12 A06B–6096–H101
38060172
SVM1–20 A06B–6096–H102
w
SVM1–40S A06B–6096–H103
://
380150307
SVM1–360 A06B–6096–H108 (note 2)
NOTE
1 For the SVM1–130, forced air cooling may be required depending on the motor used. See (7)
in Section 2.2.3 and Chapter 7.
2 A dynamic brake module (DBM) is required whenever the SVM1–240 or SVM1–360 is used.
In the event of an emergency stop, for example, the dynamic brake module stops the motor
immediately by short–circuiting the power line of the motor without PWM control. SVMs other
than SVM1–240 and SVM1–360 have the dynamic brake function built in.
15
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SVM2–12/12 A06B–6079–H201
/
om
SVM2–12/20 A06B–6079–H202 38060172
SVM2–20/20 A06B–6079–H203
SVM2–12/40 A06B–6079–H204
s.c
Standard SVM2–20/40 A06B–6079–H205 38060307
SVM2–40/40 A06B–6079–H206
re
SVM2–40/80 A06B–6079–H207
pa
SVM2–40L/40L A06B–6079–H209
cs
(b) FSSB interface
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
.cn
(H x W x D mm)
SVM2–12/12 A06B–6096–H201
SVM2–20/20 A06B–6096–H203
w
SVM2–12/40 A06B–6096–H204
SVM2–40/40 A06B–6096–H206
://
SVM2–40/80 A06B–6096–H207
SVM2–40L/40L A06B–6096–H209
ht
16
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SVM3–12/12/12 A06B–6079–H301
/
om
SVM3–12/12/20 A06B–6079–H302
38060172
SVM3–12/20/20 A06B–6079–H303
s.c
SVM3–12/12/40 A06B–6079–H305
re
SVM3–20/20/40 A06B–6079–H307
pa
(b) TYPE B interface
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
cs
SVM3–12/12/12 A06B–6080–H301
.cn
SVM3–12/12/20 A06B–6080–H302
38090172
SVM3–12/20/20 A06B–6080–H303
SVM3–12/12/40 A06B–6080–H305
w
SVM3–20/20/40 A06B–6080–H307
w
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
tp
SVM3–12/12/12 A06B–6096–H301
SVM3–12/12/20 A06B–6096–H302
ht
38090172
SVM3–12/20/20 A06B–6096–H303
SVM3–12/12/40 A06B–6096–H305
SVM3–20/20/40 A06B–6096–H307
17
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
/
2. MZ sensor, BZ sensor (built–in motor)
om
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
s.c
SPM–5.5 A06B–6078–H206#H500 38090307
re
SPM–15 A06B–6088–H215#H500
Standard
pa
SPM–22 A06B–6088–H222#H500
380150307
SPM–26 A06B–6088–H226#H500
SPM–30
cs
A06B–6088–H230#H500
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
://
(H x W x D mm)
SPM–15 A06B–6088–H315#H500
Standard
SPM–22 A06B–6088–H322#H500
380150307
SPM–26 A06B–6088–H326#H500
SPM–30 A06B–6088–H330#H500
18
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
(c) Type 3 (specifications for spindle switching control or differential speed control)
Applicable detectors :
1. Spindle switching control
(switching the speed only, or switching both the speed and position)
2. Differential speed control (input circuit for position coder signals)
/
om
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SPM–11 A06B–6078–H411#H500
SPM–15 A06B–6078–H415#H500
s.c
SPM–22 A06B–6078–H422#H500 380150307
Standard
SPM–26 A06B–6078–H426#H500
re
SPM–30 A06B–6078–H430#H500
pa
SPM–45 A06B–6088–H445#H500 380300307 (Note)
SPM–5.5 A06B–6078–H106#H500
38090307
SPM–11 A06B–6078–H111#H500 (Note)
w
SPM–15 A06B–6088–H115#H500
Standard
w
SPM–22 A06B–6088–H122#H500
380150307
SPM–26 A06B–6088–H126#H500
://
SPM–30 A06B–6088–H130#H500
tp
NOTE
SPM–11 (except type 3) and SPM–45 require forced air cooling from the outside. See (7) in
Section 2.2.3 and Chapter 7.
19
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SPMC–5.5 A06B–6082–H206#H512
/
38090307
om
SPMC–11 A06B–6082–H211#H512 (Note)
Standard
SPMC–15 A06B–6082–H215#H512
s.c
SPMC–26 A06B–6082–H226#H512
re
NOTE
SPMC–11 requires forced air cooling from the outside. See (7) in Section 2.2.3 and Chapter
7.
pa
cs
2.2.2
.cn
400–V Input Series
(1) Power supply module (PSM–HV)
External dimensions
w
NOTE
1 The PSM–HV requires a capacitor module (PSMC–HV). Specify an appropriate capacitor
ht
module for the PSM–HV being used, according to (2) in Section 2.2.2.
2 The PSM–75HV requires forced air cooling from the outside. See (7) in Section 2.2.3 and
Chapter 7.
20
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
/
38090172
om
PSMC–30HV A06B–6083–H230 For PSM–30HV
Standard
For PSM–45HV and
PSMC–45HV A06B–6083–H245 380150222
PSM–75HV
s.c
(3) Power supply module (PSMV–HV)
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
re
Standard PSMV–11HV A06B–6098–H111 380150307
pa
NOTE
No capacitor module (PSMC–HV) is required.
cs
(4) Servo amplifier module (SVM–HV)
.cn
The ordering drawing number differs depending on the interface with the CNC.
Specify an appropriate SVM–HV for the interface between the CNC and SVM–HV.
w
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
w
SVM1–20HV A06B–6085–H102
://
SVM1–60HV A06B–6085–H104
tp
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SVM1–20HV A06B–6097–H102
SVM1–60HV A06B–6097–H104
21
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SVM2–20/20HV A06B–6085–H201
/
om
SVM2–20/40HV A06B–6085–H202
SVM2–20/60HV A06B–6085–H203
Standard 38090307
SVM2–40/40HV A06B–6085–H204
s.c
SVM2–40/60HV A06B–6085–H205
SVM2–60/60HV A06B–6085–H206
re
(b) FSSB interface
pa
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
SVM2–20/20HV A06B–6097–H201
cs
SVM2–20/40HV A06B–6097–H202
.cn
SVM2–20/60HV A06B–6097–H203
Standard 38090307
SVM2–40/40HV A06B–6097–H204
SVM2–40/60HV A06B–6097–H205
w
SVM2–60/60HV A06B–6097–H206
w
Detectors used
1 M sensor, position coder, magnetic sensor (for orientation)
2 MZ sensor, BZ sensor (built–in motor)
tp
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
ht
SPM–15HV A06B–6092–H215#H500
SPM–45HV A06B–6092–H245#H500
22
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
om
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
s.c
SPM–15HV A06B–6092–H315#H500
re
SPM–45HV A06B–6092–H345#H500
pa
(c) Type 3 (spindle switch control/differential speed control specification)
Functions used
cs
1. Spindle switch control (switches between speeds only or between speeds and positions)
2. Differential speed control (position coder signal input circuit)
.cn
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
External dimensions
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
(H x W x D mm)
://
SPM–15HV A06B–6092–H115#H500
tp
SPM–45HV A06B–6092–H145#H500
ht
NOTE
SPM–11HV and SPM–75HV require forced air cooling from the outside. See (7) in Section
2.2.3 and Chapter 7.
23
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
2.2.3
Others
(1) AC reactor
/
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
om
For PSM–5.5 or
A81L–0001–0122
PSM–11
s.c
For PSM–26 A81L–0001–0120
Standard
For PSM–30 A81L–0001–0124
re
PSM–45, 75HV A81L–0001–0133
PSM–18HV,
A81L–0001–0127
pa
30HV, 45HV
Standard
For PSMR–5.5 A81L–0001–0101#C
://
The ordering drawing number of the connectors required for connection of input/output signals of each
module, and the configuration of each connector, are shown below. For the connector dimensions, see
ht
Appendix D.
24
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
om
Between PSM–SVM, A06B–6078–K210 Crimp type
SVM–SVM (for SVM1–240
and SVM1–360) A06B–6078–K211 Solder type
Standard Connectors
A06B–6073–K212 Solder type
Between NC to SVM
s.c
A06B–6073–K213 Crimp type
re
Between SVM–DBM (for
A06B–6073–K216
SVM1–240 and SVM1–360)
pa
cs
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
Standard Connectors
Between NC and SPM A06B–6078–K213 Crimp type
For load meter or speed
s eed
w
25
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
NOTE
1 Connectors are classified into either the press–mount type or solder type, depending on the
method used for attaching a cable to a connector. When a connector is specified, therefore,
care is necessary.
2 When attaching a cable to a press–mount type connector, use the special tools prepared by
the manufacturer of the connector. For the tool specifications, see ”Connection tools”
/
described later.
om
– Connector configuration
s.c
Configuration of A06B–6071–K203
re
1–178128–3 (housing) 1 D (1)
For control, single–phase
g
CX1A AMP Ja
Japan
an, Ltd.
Ltd
200VAC input
1–175218–2 (contact) 3 D (5)
pa
1–178128–3 (housing) 1 D (1)
g y stop sig-
For emergency g
CX4 AMP Ja an, Ltd.
Japan Ltd
nal
1–175218–2 (contact) 2 D (5)
cs
2–178128–3 (housing) 1 D (2)
For ON/OFF control for
CX3 AMP Ja
Japan
an, Ltd.
Ltd
external MCC
1–175218–2 (contact) 2 D (5)
.cn
AMP Ja
Japan
an, Ltd.
Ltd For control
control, 24VDC input
in ut
CX2B 1–175218–2 (contact) 6 D (5)
w
26
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
om
Configuration of A06B–6073–K214 (solder type)
s.c
Hirose Electric
JFjB ((*2)
2) For pulse
ulse coder
Co., Ltd.
FI–20–CV (case) 1 D (11)
re
NOTE
1 Type A interface
2 Type B interface
pa
Configuration of A06B–6073–K215
cs
Connector name Manufacturer Part number Quantity Use Dimensions
.cn
27
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
/
CX2A 1–178288–3 (housing) 2 D (3)
om
AMP Ja an, Ltd.
Japan Ltd For control
control, 24VDC input
in ut
CX2B 1–175218–2 (contact) 6 D (5)
s.c
Kogyo Co., Ltd.
JX1B PCR–V20LA (case) 2 tion D (10)
re
Connector name Manufacturer Part number Quantity Use Dimensions
pa
JY2, JY4 FI40B–20S (connector) 1 D (9)
JY5, JY6 Hirose Electric
See below.
below
αC series Co., Ltd.
JY1 FI–20–CV5 (case) 1 D (12)
cs
Use: For the M sensor, MZ sensor, BZ sensor, high–resolution position coder, or high–resolution magnetic pulse coder
α C series: For the speed meter, analog override, or motor overheat
.cn
Honda Tsushin
See below.
below
Kogyo Co., Ltd.
JY1 PCR–V20LA (case) 1 D (10)
ht
28
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
Configuration of A06B–6098–K200
/
1–178128–3 (housing) 1 D (1)
om
For emergency
g y stop sig-
g
CX4 AMP Ja
Japan
an, Ltd.
Ltd
nal
1–175218–2 (contact) 2 D (5)
s.c
external MCC
1–175218–2 (contact) 2 D (5)
re
pa
– Connection tools
Manufacturers of press–mount type connectors provide special tools for attaching the connectors to cables.
cs
(a) Connectors manufactured by AMP Japan, Ltd.
.cn
Name Manufacturer part number
(b) Connectors manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd. (press–mount type connectors only)
w
(5) Fuses
Fuses are specified as spare parts of the fuses used in modules. The ordering drawing number of the fuses
required for each module and the fuse configuration are shown below.
29
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
/
om
– Fuse configuration
Configuration of A06B–6073–K250
s.c
For short–circuit protection of
Daito Communication Apparatus Co., Ltd. LM32C 3.2A/48V
24–VDC control power supply
Configuration of A06B–6073–K252
re
Manufacturer Part number Specification Use
pa
For short–circuit protection of
Daito Communication Apparatus Co., Ltd. LM32C 3.2A/48V
24–VDC control power supply
cs For short–circuit protection of
Daito Communication Apparatus Co., Ltd. HM05 0.5A/250V
200VAC for cooling fan
.cn
Configuration of A06B–6077–K250
Configuration of A06B–6081–K250
Configuration of A06B–6098–K250
ht
NOTE
For the AC reactor unit
30
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
om
– Ordering drawing numbers of power transformers manufactured by FANUC
For PSMR–3
s.c
A80L–0024–0006
(at 2kw output)
For PSMR–3
A80L–0026–0003
(at 3kw output)
re
For PSM–5.5
For PSMR–5.5 A06B–6052–J001
Power Primary 380/415/460VAC
pa
(at 5.5kw output)
transformer Secondary 200VAC
Optional
O tional
Power Primary 380/415/460VAC
For PSM–11
transformer Secondary 200VAC
For PSMR–5.5 A06B–6044–J006
cs
(at 7.5kw output)
31
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
/
FANUC drawing number A80L–0001–0496 A80L–0001–0313 A80L–0001–0314 A80L–0001–0352 A80L–0001–0452
om
Rated capacity 10kVA 20kVA 30kVA 45kVA 64kVA
380/415/460VAC
Rated primary voltage 230VAC (The secondary is used as an autotransformer.)
+10% –15%, 50/60"1Hz, 3Φ
s.c
15A (at 380V) 30A (at 380V) 46A (at 380V) 68A (at 380V) 97A (at 380V)
Rated primary current 14A (at 415V) 28A (at 415V) 42A (at 415V) 63A (at 415V) 89A (at 415V)
13A (at 460V) 25A (at 460V) 38A (at 460V) 56A (at 460V) 80A (at 460V)
re
Rated secondary current 29A 58A 87A 130A 185A
pa
Voltage deviation at the secondary "3%
Insulation
cs Class H (maximum allowable temperature: 180°C)
Weight Max. 61kg Max. 115kg Max. 165kg Max. 260kg Max. 375kg
Outline drawing Fig. 8.1.5 (a) Fig. 8.1.5 (b) Fig. 8.1.5 (c) Fig. 8.1.5 (d) Fig. 8.1.5 (f)
w
R2 200V
380V SHIELD U
R1
(Newtral point)
://
PRI. SEC. O
T1
T2 V
T3 S4
tp
S1
S2 W
S3 T4
(Primary) (Secondary)
ht
G G
32
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
Rated capacity 3.5kVA 5kVA 10kVA 20kVA
om
380/415/460VAC
200/220/230/240VAC, ∆ connection
230VAC (The secondary is used as an auto-
Rated primary voltage 380/415/460/480/550VAC, Y connection
transformer.)
"15%, 50/60Hz"2Hz; 3Φ
+10% –15%, 50/60"1Hz, 3Φ
s.c
Rated primary current 5.3A (at 380V) 7.6A (at 380V) 14A (at 415V) 28A (at 415V)
13A (at 460V) 25A (at 460V)
re
Rated secondary current 9.6A 13.7A 29A 58A
"3%
pa
Voltage deviation at the secondary
Class B Class H
Insulation
cs
(maximum allowable temperature: 130°C) (maximum allowable temperature: 180°C)
Outline drawing Fig. 8.1.5 (e) Fig. 8.1.5 (a) Fig. 8.1.5 (b) Connection diagram
w
://
200V
(Neutral point)
tp
Connection diagram
ht
(Primary) (Secondary)
33
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
/
AC380V R – 6, S – 14, T – 22
om
AC400V R – 4, S – 12, T – 20
AC415V R – 4, S – 12, T – 20
Make 8–16 and 16–24 connections by
y using
g supplied
cables.
s.c
AC440V R – 3, S – 11, T – 19
AC460V R – 3, S – 11, T – 19
AC480V R – 2, S – 10, T – 18
re
Transformer (A80L–0024–0006 and A80L–0026–0003) accessories
pa
Part name Drawing number Quantity
Cable A660–8001–T532 2
cs
Cable A660–8004–T926 2
.cn
Bolt A30L–0001–0021 4
(b) Connection points of power transformers for PSMR–5.5, PSM–5.5, PSM–11, PSM–15, PSM–26,
PSM–30, PSM–37, and PSM–45
w
34
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
om
200VAC +10%
–15%
380VAC
400VAC
415VAC
440VAC
460VAC
s.c 480VAC
AC input voltage (V)
re
pa
NOTE
1 When installing a transformer in a cabinet, be careful to
ensure that the transformer does not thermally affect other
cs
equipment. For example, separate the transformer from the
other equipment.
2 When installing a transformer outside the cabinet, make
.cn
sure that the transformer is not directly exposed to cutting
chips or coolant.
3 If there is a possibility of the transformer falling, secure the
transformer with bolts or similar.
w
w
When the following modules are used, forced air cooling is required:
PSM–11, SPM–11, SPM–11HV, SVM1–130(*), SPMC–11, PSM–45, SPM–45, PSM–75HV, SPM–75HV
://
PSM–45, SPM–45,
A06B–6078–K003 (Note)
PSM–75HV, SPM–75HV
NOTE
SVM1–130 requires forced air cooling only when it is being used to drive the α22/3000,
α30/3000, α40/2000 (with a fan), αL25/3000, αL50/2000, or αM40/3000.
35
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
/
om
A06B–6066–H500 16Ω/200W (at natural cooling)
For PSMR–3, 5.5 16Ω/800W (Forced cooling fan
A06B–6066–H713
Regenerative motor is included)
Standard
discharge unit
8Ω/800W (Forced cooling fan mo-
s.c
A06B–6066–H711
tor is included)
For PSMR–5
PSMR–5.5
5
16Ω/1200W (Forced cooling fan
A06B–6066–H712
motor is included)
re
See Section 8.1.7, ”SELECTING A REGENERATIVE DISCHARGE UNIT” for details of selection.
pa
(9) Cables
NOTE
K823 to K830 are used for 300–mm–wide modules.
36
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
A06B–6078–K809 150mm
/
A06B–6078–K810 100mm
om
Cable for connection
Optional
O tional
of modules (Note 2)
A06B–6082–K808 200mm
A06B–6082–K809 150mm
s.c
A06B–6082–K810 100mm
NOTE
re
1 The following three cables are supplied together. The ordering drawing number differs
depending on the cable length.
K4: For 200–VAC power supply for cooling fan (between CX1B and CX1A)
pa
K5: For 24–VDC control power supply (between CX2B and CX2A)
K8: For interface between modules (between JX1B and JX1A)
2 The following two cables are supplied together. The ordering drawing number differs
cs
depending on the cable length.
K5: For 24–VDC control power supply (between CX2B and CX2A)
.cn
K8: For interface between modules (between JX1B and JX1A)
For position
osition coder
Optional A06B–6078–K815 Canon : Elbow
tp
NOTE
Each cable is 7 m long.
37
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
A66L–6001–0023#L150R0 15cm
Internal optical cables
(Note 1)
A66L–6001–0023#L300R0 30cm
/
A66L–6001–0026#L1R003 1m
om
A66L–6001–0026#L5R003 5m
FSSB inter-
Optional A66L–6001–0026#L7R003 7m
face cables
External optical cables
s.c
A66L–6001–0026#L10R03 10m
(Note 2)
A66L–6001–0026#L20R03 20m
A66L–6001–0026#L30R03 30m
re
A66L–6001–0026#L50R03 50m
pa
NOTE
1 Optical cables for connecting SVMs.
cs
SVM (COP10A) – SVM(COP10B)
2 Optical cables for connecting the CNC and SVM.
CNC (COP10A) – SVM (COP10B)
.cn
The circuit breaker and magnetic contactor capacities are determined by the power supply module specifications.
The ordering drawing numbers and specifications of the circuit breakers and magnetic contactors are shown below.
w
38
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
PSM–11 55A 55A
om
PSM–15 70A 70A
s.c
5A
PSM–37 175A 175A
re
PSMR–3 20A 20A
pa
30A 30A (Note 4)
PSMR–5 5
PSMR–5.5
50A 50A (Note 5)
cs
NOTE
1 For the installation positions of the circuit breakers and magnetic contactor, see Section 2.1.
.cn
PSM name Circuit breaker 1 Circuit breaker 2 Circuit breaker 2 Magnetic contactor Remarks
PSMV–11HV – 5A 5A 60A
NOTE
1 For the installation positions of the circuit breakers and magnetic contactor, see Section 2.1.
2 Circuit breakers 1 and 3 must have a rated voltage of 400VAC or higher.
3 Circuit breaker 2 must have a rated voltage of 200VAC or higher.
4 The current and voltage of the operation coil of the magnetic contactor must be within the
ratings of the internal contact [CX3 (MCC)] of the PSM. For details, see (6) in Section 9.2.1.
39
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
/
PSMR–5.5,
om
PSM–5.5 A06B–6077–K102 8–1–9–(b) Fuji Electric EA103B/50 Fuji Electric BZ–TB20B–3
PSM–18HV
PSM–15,
s.c
A06B–6077–K104 8–1–9–(d) Fuji Electric EA103B/75 Fuji Electric BZ–TB20B–3
PSM–30HV
re
PSM–26,
A06B–6077–K105 8–1–9–(f) Fuji Electric EA203B/150 Fuji Electric BZ–TB40B
PSM–30
pa
PSM–37 A06B–6077–K110 8–1–9–(g) Fuji Electric EA203B/175 Fuji Electric BZ–TB40B
PSM–45 A06B–6077–K107
cs 8–1–9–(i) Fuji Electric EA203B/225 Fuji Electric BZ–TB40B
For control
A06B–6077–K106 8–1–9–(j) Fuji Electric EA33/5 Fuji Electric BZ–TB10B–503
power supply
.cn
PSMR–5.5,
PSM–5.5 A06B–6077–K122 8–1–10–(b) Fuji Electric SC–1N Fuji Electric SZ–1N/T
PSM–18HV
://
PSM–11,
PSM–30HV A06B–6077–K123 8–1–10–(b) Fuji Electric SC–2N Fuji Electric SZ–1N/T
tp
PSMV–11HV
Optional PSM–15 A06B–6077–K124 8–1–10–(c) Fuji Electric SC–2SN Fuji Electric SZ–2SN/T
ht
PSM–26,
A06B–6077–K125 8–1–10–(d) Fuji Electric SC–4N Fuji Electric SZ–4N/T
PSM–45HV
PSM–37,
A06B–6077–K128 8–1–10–(g) Fuji Electric SC–7N Fuji Electric SZ–5N/T
PSM–75HV
NOTE
The coil voltage specification of the magnetic contactor is 200VAC.
40
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
– Recommended parts
Parts manufactured by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
PSM name Circuit breaker 1 Circuit breaker 2 Circuit breaker 2 Magnetic contactor Remarks
/
PSM–11 EA103B/60 SC–2N
om
PSM–15 EA103B/75 SC–2SN
s.c
PSM–30 EA203B/150 EA33/5 – SC–5N
re
PSMR–3 EA53B/30 SC–5–1
pa
PSMR–5.5 EA103B/50 SC–1N
PSM–30HV EA103B/75
cs SC–2SN
EA33/3 EA33/3
PSM–45HV EA203B/125 SC–4N
.cn
PSM–75HV EA203B/200 SC–7N
NOTE
w
For details, see the brochures available from Fujitsu Electric Co., Ltd. Note that the
specification of the coil voltage of a magnetic contactor may differ depending on the supply
w
To protect equipment from surge voltages caused by lightning, install a lightning surge protector between lines and
ht
between a line and ground. For how to install protectors, see Appendix A. For the outline drawings of lightning surge
protectors, see Section 8.1.11.
41
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
NOTE
1 For the 200–V input series main power supply and control power supply, and the 400–V input
series control power supply
2 For the 400–V input series main power supply
3 Tûv approved products
/
om
– Recommended products
s.c
Line–to–line Line–to–ground Remarks
re
RAV–152BYZ–2A manufactured by RAV–801BYZ–4 manufactured by
For 400–VAC line
Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.
pa
cs
A noise filter must be installed in the PSM input section to satisfy the requirements of the EMC Directives which
are now being enforced in the EU countries. For how to select the current capacity and noise filter installation, see
.cn
Section 5.3.
Recommended noise filters are listed below.
HF3005C–TMA 5A
w
HF3010C–TMA 10A
HF3015C–TMA 15A
://
HF3020C–TMA 20A
HF3030C–TMA 30A
tp
HF3040C–TMA 40A
Leakage current:
ht
HF3080C–TMA 80A
HF3100C–TMA 100A
HF3150C–TMA 150A
HF3200C–TMA 200A
HF3250C–TMA 250A
For details, refer to the brochures supplied by SOSHIN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
42
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
3SUP–AH series and 3SUP–DH series manufactured by Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.
Part number (Okaya Electric Industries) Rated current Rated voltage Remarks
3SUP–D75H–ER–4 75A
Leakage current:
/
3SUP–D100H–ER–4 100A 4 mA max
om
AC500V at 500VAC
500VAC, 60 Hz
3SUP–D150H–ER–4 150A
3SUP–D200H–ER–4 200A
s.c
For details, refer to the brochures supplied by Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.
re
Part number (SOSHIN ELECTRIC) Rated current Rated voltage Remarks
pa
NF3020C–TX 20A
NF3030C–TX 30A
cs
NF3050C–TX 50A
Leakage
g current:
250 mA max
NF3080C–TX 80A AC460V
.cn
at 460VAC,, 60 Hz
NF3100C–TX 100A (Note)
NF3150C–TX 150A
w
NF3200C–TX 200A
w
For details, refer to the brochures supplied by SOSHIN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
w
FN258–7 7A
tp
FN258–16 16A
FN258–30 30A
ht
FN258–42 42A
Leakage
g current:
150 mA max
FN258–55 55A AC480V
at 250VAC,, 50 Hz
FN258–75 75A (Note)
FN258–100 100A
FN258–130 130A
FN258–180 180A
43
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
NOTE
The NF3000C–TX series manufactured by SOSHIN ELECTRIC CO., LTD. and the FN258
series manufactured by SCHAFFNER have a large line–to–ground capacitor capacitance,
allowing a very high leakage current. Therefore, they can be used only for neutral grounding
type power supplies.
/
om
(13) Detectors
α position coder
s.c
α position coder A860–0309–T302 j68, 10,000min–1
Optional
O tional
Connector kit A06B–6088–K211 Straight type
re
High–resolution position coder
pa
Category Name Ordering number Remarks
44
B–65162E/03 2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION
/
Type II, 12,000min–1
om
Magnetic sensor NIP A57L–0001–0037#NIP
Water–proof connector specification
s.c
Water–proof connector specification
re
Magnetic sensor QIP A57L–0001–0037#QIP
Water–proof connector specification
pa
Type V, 20,000min–1
Magnetic sensor RIP A57L–0001–0037#RIP
Water–proof connector specification
cs
Magnetic sensor S A57L–0001–0037#S Type VI, 15,000min–1
Optional
Type VI, 15,000min–1
Magnetic sensor SIP A57L–0001–0037#SIP
.cn
Water–proof connector specification
Type X, 15,000min–1
Magnetic sensor U2IP A57L–0001–0037#U2IP
Water–proof connector specification
ht
45
2. CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION B–65162E/03
(14) Others
/
Battery case A06B–6050–K060 For SVM (Note)
om
Optional Cable for battery connection A06B–6093–K810 For SVM (Note)
s.c
Check pin board A06B–6071–K290 For SVM
re
NOTE
These parts are required when the interface with the CNC is type B or FSSB, and
pa
absolute–position detection is performed. The battery for the absolute pulse coder can be
connected using one of following two methods:
Connection method 1: A special lithium battery is installed in the α amplifier.
– Use A06B–6073–K001.
cs
Connection method 2: A battery case (A06B–6050–K060) is used.
– Use A06B–6050–K061 or a commercially available size–D battery.
.cn
– A cable (A06B–6093–K810) is required.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
46
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
47
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
3.1 First, select a servo motor, based on the machine specifications. Then,
select an appropriate servo amplifier module for the selected servo motor.
HOW TO SELECT THE
For combinations of servo motors and servo amplifier modules, see
SERVO AMPLIFIER Sections 3.1.1 and 3.1.2.
MODULE Table 3.1 (1)
Table.3.1 (a) Specifications
/
om
Number of Input Interface with
No. Specification
connected axes voltage CNC (Note)
1 A06B–6079–H1jj 1 200V TYPE A & B
2 A06B–6079–H2jj 2 200V TYPE A & B
s.c
3 A06B–6079–H3jj 3 200V TYPE A
4 A06B–6080–H3jj 3 200V TYPE B
5 A06B–6096–H1jj 1 200V FSSB
re
6 A06B–6096–H2jj 2 200V FSSB
7 A06B–6096–H3jj 3 200V FSSB
pa
8 A06B–6085–H1jj 1 400V TYPE A & B
9 A06B–6085–H2jj 2 400V TYPE A & B
10
cs
A06B–6097–H1jj 1 400V FSSB
11 A06B–6097–H2jj 2 400V FSSB
.cn
NOTE
There are three interfaces with the CNC: Type A, Type B,
and FSSB. Check the interface with the CNC being used,
w
48
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
200–V input series 200–V input series 200–V input series 400–V input series 400–V input series
for 1 axes for 2 axes for 3 axes for 1 axes for 2 axes
SVM1–12 SVM2–12/12 SVM3–12/12/12 SVM1–20HV SVM2–20/20HV
SVM1–20 SVM2–12/20 SVM3–12/12/20 SVM1–40HV SVM2–20/40HV
/
SVM1–40S SVM2–20/20 SVM3–12/20/20 SVM1–60HV SVM2–20/60HV
om
SVM1–40L SVM2–12/40 SVM3–20/20/20 SVM2–40/40HV
SVM1–80 SVM2–20/40 SVM3–12/12/40 SVM2–40/60HV
SVM1–130 SVM2–40/40 SVM3–12/20/40 SVM2–60/60HV
s.c
SVM1–240 SVM2–40/80 SVM3–20/20/40
SVM1–360 SVM2–80/80
SVM2–40L/40L
re
Naming convention
SVM j–j / j / j j
pa
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
cs
(1) Servo amplifier module
(2) Number of axes
.cn
49
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
3.1.1
200–V Input Series
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
50
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
51
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
52
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
3.1.2
400–V Input Series
/
One–axis amplifier (400–V input series)
om
3 6 12 22 30
αHV
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Specifi-
p
Prod ct name
Product
s.c
cation
6 9 22 30
αM
HV
3000 3000 3000 3000
f f
re
SVM1–20HV H102
SVM1–40HV H103 f f
SVM1–60HV H104 f f
pa
Two–axis amplifier (400–V input series)
cs
3 6 12 22 30
αHV
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Specifi-
p
.cn
Prod ct name
Product
cation
6 9 22 30
αM
HV
3000 3000 3000 3000
w
L f f
SVM2–20/20HV H201
M f f
w
L f f
SVM2–20/40HV H202
M f f
w
L f f
SVM2–20/60HV H203
M f f
://
L f f
SVM2–40/40HV H204
M f f
L f f
tp
SVM2–40/60HV H205
M f f
L f f
ht
SVM2–60/60HV H206
M f f
53
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
3.2 First, select a spindle motor, based on the machine specification. Then,
select an appropriate spindle amplifier module for the selected spindle
SELECTING A motor.
SPINDLE AMPLIFIER Spindle amplifier modules and standard motors that can be used together
MODULE are shown below. When using a built–in motor or a motor with special
specifications, refer to relevant specifications, and select a spindle
/
amplifier module accordingly.
om
Table.3.2 (a) 200–V Input Series
s.c
SPM–5.5 α1.5, α2, α3
SPM–11 α6, α8, αP8, αP12
SPM–15 α12, αP15, αP18
re
SPM–22 α15, α18, αP22, αP30
SPM–26 α22, αP40, αP50
pa
SPM–30 αP60
SPM–45 α30, α40
cs
SPMC–2.2 αC1
SPMC–5.5 αC1.5, αC2, αC3
.cn
SPMC–26 αC22
w
SPM–15HV α12HV
SPM–26HV α15HV, α18HV, α22HV
tp
54
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
3.3 Select a power supply module that satisfies the rated output capacity and
maximum output capacity, calculated as follows:
HOW TO SELECT THE
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE (PSM)
/
3.3.1 Select a power supply module with a rated output not less than the sum
om
Rated Output Capacity of the total continuous rated output of the spindle motors times 1.15, plus
the total continuous rated output of the servo motors times 0.6.
s.c
power supply module of spindle motor
Continuous rated output
+Σ ×0.6
of servo motor
re
When only one spindle amplifier module is to be connected to a power
supply module, select the power supply module so that the 30–minute
pa
rated output of the spindle motor does not exceed the rated output capacity
of the power supply module.
cs
Rated output capacity of a power supply module y 30– minute rated out-
put of a spindle motor
.cn
Table 4.1.1 (1) lists the rated output capacities of the power supply
modules. Table 3.7.1 lists the continuous rated outputs of the servo
motors. Table 3.7.2 list the continuous rated outputs of the spindle
motors.
w
w
3.3.2 Select a power supply module with a maximum output not less than the
Maximum Output sum of the total accelerating maximum output of the spindle motors and
the total accelerating maximum output of those servo motors that
w
output capacity according to 3.3.2 (a), below. When the rated output
capacity is 12 kW or more, calculate according to 3.3.2 (b).
tp
55
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
Table 4.1.1 (a) lists the maximum output capacities of the power supply
modules. Table 3.7.1 lists the accelerating maximum outputs of the servo
motors. Table 3.7.2 lists the accelerating maximum outputs of the spindle
motors.
/
3.3.3 Multiple servo amplifier modules and spindle amplifier modules can be
om
Number of Connected connected to a single power supply module, provided the above output
capacity conditions are satisfied.
Servo Amplifier The table below lists the maximum number of modules which can be
Modules and Spindle connected.
s.c
Amplifier Modules
Maximum number of modules that can be connected
re
SPM SVM
SPMC SVM1 SVM2 SVM3
pa
6
2 4
cs
3
.cn
NOTE
1 When different types of servo amplifier modules are
w
56
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
3.3.5
Example of Selecting a
Power Supply Module
(PSM)
/
om
(1) When two α22/2000 servo motors and one αP50 spindle motor are
used
s.c
Continuous rated output : 3.8 kW
Maximum output at acceleration : 7.5 kW
Spindle motor αP50
Continuous rated output : 22 kW
re
Maximum output at acceleration : 36 kW
Rated output capacity of power supply module y Σ spindle motor
pa
continuous rated output 1.15 + Σ servo motor continuous rated
output 0.6
= 22 1.15 + 3.8 2 0.6
cs
= 29.86 Condition 1
Maximum output capacity of the power supply module y Σ
maximum output of the spindle motor at acceleration + Σ maximum
.cn
= 51.0 Condition 2
According to conditions 1 and 2, PSM–30 is selected as the power
w
supply module.
w
(2) When two α6/3000 servo motors and one α22/2000 servo motor, and
one α3 spindle motor are used
://
57
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
/
According to conditions 3 and 4, PSM–11 is selected as the power
om
supply module.
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
58
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
3.4 Select a power supply module that satisfies the rated output capacity and
maximum output capacity, calculated as follows :
HOW TO SELECT THE
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE (PSMR)
/
3.4.1 Select a power supply module (PSMR) with a rated output not less than
om
Rated Output Capacity the sum of the total continuous rated output of the spindle motors times
1.15, plus the total continuous rated output of the servo motors times 0.6.
(PSMR)
Rated output capacity of Continuous rated output
yΣ of spindle motor ×1.15
s.c
power supply module
(PSMR)
re
When only one spindle amplifier module is connected to a power supply
pa
module, the power supply module must be selected so that the 30–minute
rated output of the spindle motor does not exceed the rated output capacity
of the power supply module.
cs
Rated output capacity of a power supply module y 30– minute rated out-
put of a spindle motor
.cn
Table 4.1.1 (b) lists the rated output capacities of the power supply
modules (PSMR). Table 3.7.1 lists the continuous rated outputs of the
servo motors. Table 3.7.2 list the continuous rated outputs of the spindle
w
motors.
w
3.4.2 Select a power supply module (PSMR) with a maximum output not less
Maximum Output than the sum of the total accelerating maximum output of the spindle
w
motors and the total accelerating maximum output of those servo motors
Capacity of Power that accelerate/decelerate at the same time.
Supply Module (PSMR)
://
(PSMR)
Table 4.1.1 (b) lists the maximum output capacities of the power supply
modules. Table 3.7.1 lists the accelerating maximum outputs of the servo
motors. Table 3.7.2 list the accelerating maximum outputs of the spindle
motors.
3.4.3 Multiple servo amplifier modules and spindle amplifier modules can be
Number of Connected connected to a single power supply module, provided the above output
capacity conditions are satisfied.
Servo Amplifier The table below lists the maximum number of modules which can be
Modules and Spindle connected.
Amplifier Modules
59
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
SPM SVM
SPMC SVM1 SVM2 SVM3
/
om
0 1 2
2 1
s.c
1 1
re
1 1 1
pa
cs 1
.cn
3.4.4
Example of Selecting a (1) When two α1/3000 servo motors and one α2 spindle motor are used
Power Supply Module Servo motor α1/3000
w
Spindle motor α2
Continuous rated output : 2.2 kW
w
output 0.6
= 2.2 1.15 + 0.3 2 0.6
tp
= 2.89 Condition 1
Maximum output capacity of the power supply module y Σ
maximum output of the spindle motor at acceleration + Σ maximum
ht
60
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
/
Rated output capacity of power supply module y Σ spindle
om
motor continuous rated output 1.15 + Σ servo motor continuous
rated output 0.6
= 3.7 1.15 + (0.4 2 + 1.0) 0.6
= 5.335 Condition 3
s.c
Maximum output capacity of the power supply module y Σ
maximum output of the spindle motor at acceleration + Σ
maximum output of the servo motors at acceleration
re
(simultaneous acceleration/deceleration)
= 6.6 + (1.1 2 + 3.8)
= 12.6 Condition 4
pa
According to conditions 3 and 4, PSMR–5.5 is selected as the power
supply module.
cs
3.4.5 In the power supply module (PSMR), the regenerative discharge unit
.cn
Discharge Unit
Select a regenerative discharge unit having a capacity greater than or equal
://
to the total rotation energy of all the servo motors and the spindle motor.
How to calculate the rotation energy is described in below.
tp
Capacity of regenerative
yΣ Rotation energy of motor
discharge unit
ht
See Table 3.4.5 for details of the capacity of the regenerative discharge
unit.
1. Servo motor (for horizontal movement)
Amount of regenerative discharge (power [W]) when rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration is performed once every F sec
(a) SI unit system
61
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
/
JL : Motor–shaft–converted inertia of the load [kg⋅m2]
om
Vm : Motor speed at rapid traverse [min–1]
ta : Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time [sec]
TL : Machine frictional torque (motor–converted value) [N⋅m]
(b) CGS unit system
s.c
W+1 (5.37 10 –4 @ (Jm ) JL) @ Vm 2–5.13 10 –3
F
@ ta @ Vm @ TL)[W]
re
F : Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration cycle [s/number of
times]
pa
Note) About once every five seconds unless otherwise
specified
Jm : Rotor inertia of motor [kg⋅cm⋅s2]
cs
JL : Load inertia (value for motor shaft) [kg⋅cm⋅s2]
Vm : Motor rotation speed for rapid traverse [rpm]
.cn
ta : Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time [s]
TL : Friction torque of machine (value for motor) [kg⋅cm]
2. Servo motor (for vertical movement)
The amount of regenerative discharge (power [W]) when the
w
W + 1.047 10 –1 @ Th @ Vm D [W]
100
w
W + 1.026 10 –2 @ Th @ Vm D [W]
100
Th : Upward torque of motor during lowering by rapid traverse
[kg⋅cm]
Vm : Motor rotation speed for rapid traverse [rpm]
D : Downward operation duty during lowering by rapid traverse
[%]
Note) D is a maximum of 50% and usually less.
3. Spindle motor
(a) SI unit system
62
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
/
W + 5.37 10 –2 @ (Jm ) JL) @ N 2
Dt
om
Jm : Rotor inertia of motor [kg⋅cm⋅s2]
JL : Load inertia (value for motor shaft) [kg⋅cm⋅s2]
N : Motor rotation speed [rpm]
Dt : Duty cycle [s]
s.c
Table.3.4.5 Required capacity for the Regenerative
Discharge unit
re
Capacity
Regenerative
Wind speed Remarks
g unit
discharge
pa
0m/sec 2m/sec 4m/sec
A06B–6081–H050 100W 250W – Registance : 16Ω
cs
A06B–6066–H500 200W 400W 600W Registance : 16Ω
Forced cooling fan
A06B–6066–H713 – – 800W motor is included
.cn
Registance : 16Ω
Forced cooling fan
A06B–6066–H711 – – 800W motor is included
Registance : 8Ω
w
NOTE
w
63
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
3.5 For how to select a power supply module (PSMV–HV), see Section 3.3,
and for the rated output capacity, see Table 4.2.1 (3).
SELECTING A
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE (PSMV–HV)
/
3.5.1 When two α6/3000 servo motors, one α22/2000 servo motor and one α3
om
Example of Selecting a spindle motor are used
Power Supply Module α6/3000 servo motor
(PSMV–HV) Continuous rated output : 1.4 kW
Accelerating maximum output : 6.2 kW
s.c
α22/2000 servo motor
Continuous rated output : 3.8 kW
Accelerating maximum output : 7.5 kW
re
α3 spindle motor
Continuous rated output : 3.7 kW
pa
Accelerating maximum output : 6.6 kW
= 18.54 (2)
Based on (1) and (2), the PSM–11HV is selected.
://
tp
ht
64
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
3.6 When selecting a power supply module (PSM–HV), calculate the rated
output capacity and maximum output capacity as explained below, then
SELECTING A select an appropriate PSM–HV that satisfies these calculated values.
POWER SUPPLY
MODULE (PSM–HV)
/
3.6.1 Multiply the total continuous rated output of the spindle motors by a
om
Obtaining the Rated coefficient (1.15), and also multiply the total continuous rated output of
the servo motors by a coefficient (0.6). Then, select a power supply
Output Capacity of a module so that the sum of the multiplication results does not exceed the
Power Supply Module rated output capacity of the power supply module.
s.c
Rated output capacity of Spindle motor continuous
yΣ rated output ×1.15
power supply module
re
Servo motor continuous
+Σ ×0.6
rated output
pa
When only one spindle amplifier module is connected to a power supply
module, the power supply module must be selected so that the 30–minute
rated output of the spindle motor does not exceed the rated output capacity
cs
of the power supply module.
Rated output capacity of a power supply module y 30– minute rated out-
.cn
put of a spindle motor
For the rated output capacities of the power supply modules, see Table
4.2.1 (a). For the continuous rated outputs of the servo motors, see Table
w
3.7.1. For the continuous rated outputs of spindle motors, see Table 3.7.2.
w
3.6.2 Select a power supply module so that the sum of the total maximum
output of the spindle motors at acceleration and the total maximum output
w
Obtaining the
of simultaneously accelerated/decelerated servo motors at acceleration
Maximum Output does not exceed the maximum output capacity of the power supply
://
yΣ motors at acceleration
power supply module
+Σ
(simultaneously accelerated/decelerated axes)
For the maximum output capacities of the power supply modules, see
Table 4.2.1 (a). For the maximum outputs of the servo motors at
acceleration, see Table 3.7.1. For the maximum outputs of the spindle
motors at acceleration, see Table 3.7.2.
65
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
3.6.3 Multiple servo amplifier modules and spindle amplifier modules can be
Number of Connected connected to a single power supply module (PSM–HV) provided the
capacity of the power supply module is not exceeded.
Servo Amplifier
For the number of units that can be connected, see the following table:
Modules and Spindle
Table.3.6.3 Maximum Number of Modules That Can be
Amplifier Modules
/
Connected
om
SVM–HV
SPM–HV
SVM1–HV SVM2–HV
s.c
6
2
4
re
NOTE
When the two types of servo amplifier module are used
together, the result of the following expression must not
pa
exceed 6:
Total number of connected modules (6) Number of SVM1s
x 1 + number of SVM2s x 1.5
cs
Even when no spindle amplifier module is used, the number
of servo amplifier modules that can be connected remains
unchanged.
.cn
w
3.6.4
w
Example of Selecting a (1) When two α12/3000HV servo motors and one α22HV spindle motor
Power Supply Module are used
w
(PSM–HV)
Servo motor α12/3000HV
Continuous rated output : 2.8 kW
://
66
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
3.7
LIST OF MOTOR
OUTPUT CAPACITIES
FOR POWER SUPPLY
SELECTION
/
om
3.7.1 This section gives the maximum output data at servo motor acceleration.
Servo Motor This data is used for selecting a power supply module of the α series servo
amplifier. The maximum output data at acceleration is classified into case
s.c
1 and case 2.
Case 1 is used for selection for normal (ordinary) operation.
Case 2 is used in the following cases:
re
(1) When the time constant is set to a value as short as the limit of motor
capability
(2) When the motor is operated at the maximum allowable speed defined
pa
in the specifications
If the conventional time constant is used even when HRV control is used,
cs
case 1 is used.
Table.3.7.1 Servo Motor Continuous Rated Outputs and Maximum
Outputs at Acceleration (kW) (1/2)
.cn
NOTE
The maximum output at acceleration is provided as data for selecting a power supply module;
it is not a guaranteed value.
67
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
/
α150/2000 12.5kW 26.8kW 38.0kW
om
α300/1200 30kW 54kW 61kW
α400/1200 35kW 59kW 67kW
αM2/3000 0.7kW 1.9kW 2.2kW
αM2.5/3000 0.8kW 2.3kW 2.7kW
s.c
αM6/3000 1.4kW 4.8kW 5.6kW
αM9/3000 1.8kW 7.4kW 8.5kW
αM22/3000
re
3.8kW 11.1kW 12.6kW
αM30/3000 3.8kW 17.6kW 19.9kW
αM40/3000 (130A) 7.0KW 18.4Kw 20.7kW
pa
αM40/3000 (with fan)
10KW 30.2kW 34kW
(240A, 360A)
αC3/2000 0.3kW
cs 1.7kW 2.0kW
αC6/2000 0.6kW 2.4kW 2.8kW
αC12/2000 1.0kW 2.0kW 2.3kW
.cn
NOTE
The maximum output at acceleration is provided as data for selecting a power supply module;
it is not a guaranteed value.
68
B–65162E/03 3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE
3.7.2 This section gives the maximum output data at spindle motor
Spindle Motor acceleration/deceleration. This data is used for selecting a power supply
module of the α series servo amplifier. For built–in motors and motors
with special specifications, refer to the relevant specifications.
Table.3.7.2 Spindle Motor Continuous Rated Outputs and Maximum
/
Outputs at Acceleration (kW) (1/2)
om
Motor model Continuous rated output 30–minute rated output Maximum output at acceleration
α0.5 0.55kW 1.1kW (15–minute rating) 1.32kW
α1 1.5kW 2.2kW (15–minute rating) 2.64kW
s.c
α1.5 1.1kW 3.7kW (10–minute rating) 4.44kW
α2 2.2kW 3.7kW (15–minute rating) 4.44kW
α3 3.7kW 5.5kW 6.6kW
re
α6 5.5kW 7.5kW 9.0kW
α8 7.5kW 11.0kW 13.2kW
pa
α12 11.0kW 15.0kW 18.0kW
α15 15.0kW 18.5kW 22.2kW
α18 18.5kW
cs 22.0kW 26.4kW
α22 22.0kW 26.0kW 31.2kW
α30 30.0kW 37.0kW 44.4kW
.cn
NOTE
The maximum output at acceleration is provided as data for selecting a power supply module;
it is not a guaranteed value.
69
3. HOW TO SELECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE B–65162E/03
Motor model Continuous rated output 30–minute rated output Maximum output at acceleration
αC22 22.0kW 26.0kW 31.2kW
α6HV 5.5kW 7.5kW 9.0kW
/
α8HV 7.5kW 11.0kW 13.2kW
om
α12HV 11.0kW 15.0kW 18.0kW
α15HV 15.0kW 18.5kW 22.2kW
α18HV 18.5kW 22.0kW 26.4kW
s.c
α22HV 22.0kW 26.0kW 31.2kW
α30HV 30.0kW 37.0kW 44.4kW
α40HV 37.0kW 45.0kW 54.0kW
re
α60HV 60.0kW 75.0kW 90.0kW
pa
NOTE
The maximum output at acceleration is provided as data for selecting a power supply module;
it is not a guaranteed value.
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
70
B–65162E/03 4. SPECIFICATIONS
4 SPECIFICATIONS
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
71
4. SPECIFICATIONS B–65162E/03
4.1
200–V INPUT SERIES
/
4.1.1
om
Power Supply Module
Table.4.1.1 (a) Power Supply Module (PSM)
Model PSM–11 PSM–45
PSM–5.5 PSM–15 PSM–26 PSM–30 PSM–37
s.c
Item (Note1) (Note1)
re
Main circuit 9kVA 17kVA 22kVA 37kVA 44kVA 54kVA 64kVA
Power equipment
q
capacity
pa
Control power 0.7kVA
Rated output capacity 5.5kW 11kW 15kW 26kW 30kW 37kW 45kW
NOTE
1 The PSM–11 or PSM–45 requires forced air cooling (see 2.2.3 (7) and sec.7).
w
2 A power transformer is necessary for voltages other than those listed in Table 4.1.1 (a).
w
w
Item
Main circuit AC200V/220V/230V +10%, –15%, 3φ 50/60Hz, "1Hz
Power supplyy
tp
(Note 2)
Control power AC200V/220V/230V +10%, –15%, 1φ 50/60Hz, "1Hz
capacity
Control power 0.5kVA
NOTE
1 The PSMR–3 and PSMR–5.5 require regenerative discharge unit.
2 A power transformer is necessary for voltages other than those listed in Table 4.1.1 (b).
72
B–65162E/03 4. SPECIFICATIONS
/
(See Table 4.1.1 (a), (b))
om
NOTE
Select a power supply for which, when the motor is
accelerated, the input voltage variation does not exceed 7%
s.c
(see Subsection 5.2.1 for details).
re
[How to calculate the input current of the PSM (PSMR)]
Calculate the input current of the PSM (PSMR) by using the formula
below. Refer to the result when selecting the MCC, power cable, and
pa
circuit breaker 1, to be connected to the PSM input section.
Power equipment capacity (kVA)
PSM input
× 1.2 (margin)
current (Arms) = Ǹȯ
3 Nominal supply voltage (Vrms)
cs
NOTE
.cn
Normally, assume the nominal supply voltage (Vrms) to be
200Vrms.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
73
4. SPECIFICATIONS B–65162E/03
4.1.2
Servo Amplifier Module Table.4.1.2 (a) Specifications (common)
(SVM)
Item Specifications
/
Main circuit control method
bridge
om
Table.4.1.2 (b) Specifications (individual) (1/2)
s.c
Connec- motor current current limit
Model name model [Arms] [Ap]
tion axis
SVM1–12
re
SVM2–12/12 L, M
α1/3000
SVM2–12/20 L
α2/2000
SVM2–12/40 L
α2/3000
pa
SVM3–12/12/12 L, M, N 3.0 12
β0.5/3000
SVM3–12/12/20 L, M
β1/3000
SVM3–12/20/20 L
β2/3000
SVM3–12/12/40 L, M
cs
SVM3–12/20/40 L
SVM1–20
αM2/3000
.cn
SVM2–12/20 M
SVM2–20/20 L, M αM2.5/3000
SVM2–20/40 L αC3/2000
SVM3–12/12/20 N αC6/2000 5.9 20
SVM3–12/20/20 M, N αC12/2000
β3/3000
w
SVM3–20/20/20 L, M, N
SVM3–12/20/40 M β6/2000
SVM3–20/20/40 L, M
w
α3/3000
SVM1-40S 5.9 40
α6/2000
w
SVM2-12/40 M
SVM2-20/40 M α3/3000
α6/2000
://
SVM2-40/40 L, M
12.5 40
SVM3-12/12/40 N α12/2000
SVM3-12/20/40 N αC22/1500
SVM3-20/20/40 N
tp
SVM1-40L α3/3000
SVM2-40/80 L α6/2000
ht
74
B–65162E/03 4. SPECIFICATIONS
/
SVM1-80 α6/3000
om
SVM2-40/80 M α12/3000
SVM2-80/80 L, M α22/2000
α30/1200
18.7 80
αM6/3000
αM9/3000
s.c
αL6/3000
αL9/3000
α30/2000
α40/2000
re
27.9
αM22/3000
αM30/3000
pa
α22/3000
SVM1-130 α30/3000 130
α40/2000
(with FAN)
cs 52.2
αL25/3000
αL50/2000
αM40/3000
.cn
(Note 3)
α65/2000
SVM1–240 αM40/3000 98.0 240
(Note 3)
w
SVM1–240 α300/1200
98.0 240
(2 units used) α400/1200
w
α100/2000
α150/2000
w
NOTE
1 The current limit (peak value) is a standard value. It varies
tp
75
4. SPECIFICATIONS B–65162E/03
4.1.3
Spindle Amplifier
Module
Table.4.1.3 (a) Spindle amplifier module
/
Model SPM–11 SPM–45
SPM–2.2 SPM–5.5 SPM–15 SPM–22 SPM–26 SPM–30
om
Item (Note) (Note)
Rated output 13A 27A 48A 63A 95A 111A 133A 198A
Main circuit control method Sine–wave PWM control with transistor (IGBT) bridge
s.c
Feedback method Velocity feedback with pulse generator
re
Speed variation rate 0.1% or less of maximum speed (load variation: 10% to 100%)
α15
α6 α12 α22
pa
Applicable motors α0.5 α1.5 to α18 α30
α8 αP15 αP40 αP60
(typical examples) α1 α3 αP22 α40
αP12 αP18 αP50
αP30
cs
NOTE
The SPM–11 or SPM–45 requires forced air cooling (See 2.2.3 (7) and sec. 7.1).
.cn
Model SPMC–11
SPMC–2.2 SPMC–5.5 SPMC–15 SPMC–22 SPMC–26
Item (Note)
w
Main circuit control method Sine–wave PWM control with transistor (IGBT) bridge
w
Speed variation rate 1% or less of maximum speed (load variation: 10% to 100%)
αC1.5
Applicable motors αC6 αC15
tp
NOTE
When SPMC–11 is used, forced air cooling from the outside is required. See Chapter 7.
76
B–65162E/03 4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.2
400–V INPUT SERIES
4.2.1
Power Supply Module
/
om
Table.4.2.1 (a) Power Supply Module (PSM–HV)
Model PSM–75HV
PSM–18HV PSM–30HV PSM–45HV
Item (Note1)
s.c
Power supplyy
(Note 2)
Control power AC200V/220V/230V +10%, –15%, 1φ 50/60Hz,"1Hz
re
capacity
Control power 0.7kVA
pa
Rated output capacity 18kW 30kW 45kW 75kW
Control method
cs Regenerative control (power supply regeneration)
NOTE
.cn
1 When the PSM–75HV is being used, forced air cooling from the outside is required. See (7)
in Section 2.2.3 and Chapter 7.
2 If the power supply voltage is beyond the indicated range, a power transformer is required.
3 The PSM–HV models always require a capacitor module (PSMC–HV) listed below.
w
w
Model
PSMC–18HV PSMC–30HV PSMC–45HV
Item
://
PSM–45HV
Applicable PSM PSM–18HV PSM–30HV
PSM–75HV
tp
ht
77
4. SPECIFICATIONS B–65162E/03
/
om
Main circuit 31kVA
Power equipment
q
capacity
Control power 0.7kVA
s.c
Maximum output capacity 20kW
re
NOTE
1 If the power supply voltage is beyond the indicated range, a power transformer is required.
pa
2 PSMV–HV always requires an AC reactor unit. cs
[How to calculate the power equipment capacity]
.cn
Calculate the power equipment capacity using the formula below.
Power supply Rated capacity calculated in Section 3.5 or 3.6 (kW)
capacity (kVA) = Rated capacity of power supply module (kW)
Power supply capacity of power supply
w
NOTE
w
NOTE
Normally, assume the nominal supply voltage (Vrms) to be
400Vrms.
78
B–65162E/03 4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.2.2
Servo Amplifier Module Table.4.2.2 (a) Specifications (common)
(SVM–HV)
Item Specifications
/
Main circuit control method
bridge
om
Table.4.2.2 (b) Specifications (individual)
s.c
output
o tp t
motor current
Connection current
Model name model limit [Ap]
axis [Arms]
re
SVM2–20/20HV L–and M–axes α6/3000HV
SVM2–20/40HV L–axes
SVM2–20/60HV L–axes
pa
SVM1–40HV α12/3000HV 12.6 40
SVM2–20/40HV M–axes αM6/3000HV
SVM2–40/40HV L–and M–axes αM9/3000HV
cs
SVM2–40/60HV L–axes
NOTE
The current limit (peak value) is the standard setting. The
w
79
4. SPECIFICATIONS B–65162E/03
4.2.3
Spindle Amplifier
Module
Table.4.2.3 Spindle amplifier module
/
Model SPM–11HV SPM–75HV
SPM–15HV SPM–26HV SPM–45HV
om
Item (Note) (Note)
Main circuit control method Sine–wave PWM control with transistor (IGBT) bridge
s.c
Feedback method Velocity feedback with pulse generator
re
Speed variation rate 0.1% or less of maximum speed (load variation: 10% to 100%)
α15HV
α6HV α30HV
pa
Applicable motors α12HV α18HV α60HV
α8HV α40HV
cs α22HV
NOTE
When SPM–11HV or SPM–75HV is used, forced air cooling from the outside is required. See
(7) in Section 2.2.3 and Chapter 7.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
80
B–65162E/03 4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.3
WEIGHT
4.3.1
/
Power Supply Modules
om
Table.4.3.1 (a) Power Supply Modules
Model Weight
PSM–5.5 6.3kg
s.c
PSM–11 5.4kg
PSM–15,26,30,37 10.7kg
PSM–45 22.0kg
re
PSMR–3 2.6kg
PSMR–5.5 4.3kg
pa
PSM–18HV,30HV,45HV 11.0kg
PSM–75HV 22.0kg
cs
PSMV–11HV 10.5kg
.cn
Model Weight
w
PSMC–18HV,30HV 4.0kg
PSMC–45HV 6.5kg
w
Model Weight
://
Model Weight
81
4. SPECIFICATIONS B–65162E/03
4.3.2
Servo Amplifier Table.4.3.2 Servo Amplifier Modules
Modules
Model Weight
SVM1–12,20 2.2Kg
/
om
SVM1–40S,40L,80 4.8Kg
SVM1–130 6.5Kg
SVM1–240,360 10.7Kg
s.c
Dynamic brake module (DBM) for SVM1–240, 360 5.4Kg
SVM2–12/12,12/20,20/20 2.8Kg
SVM2–12/40,20/40,40/40 5.5Kg
re
SVM2–40/80,80/80,40L/40L 7.0Kg
SVM3–12/12/12,12/12/20,12/20/20,20/20/20 4.1Kg
pa
SVM3–12/12/40,12/20/40,20/20/40 6.5Kg
SVM1–20HV,40HV,60HV 6.0Kg
cs
SVM2–20/20HV,20/40HV
7.5Kg
SVM2–20/60HV,40/40HV,40/60HV,60/60HV
.cn
4.3.3
Spindle Amplifier Table.4.3.3 Spindle Amplifier Modules
w
Modules
Model Weight
w
10.7Kg
SPMC–15, 22, 26
SPM–45 (TYPE1, 2, 3, 4) 22Kg
tp
82
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
5 INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
83
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
5.1 The servo amplifier α series must be installed in a sealed type cabinet to
satisfy the following environmental requirements:
ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS
(1) Ambient Temperature
Ambient temperature of the unit : 0 to 55_C (at operation)
/
–20 to 60_C
om
(at keeping and transportation)
Ambient temperature of the storage cabinet : 0 to 45_C
(2) Humidity
s.c
Normally 90% RH or below, and condensation–free
(3) Vibration
In operation : Below 0.5G
re
(4) Atmosphere
pa
No corrosive or conductive mists or drops should deposit directly on
the electronic circuits. (Note)
(5) Notes on Installation
cs
The αseries servo amplifier is designed to be installed in the power
magnetics cabinet, with its heat sink projecting through the back of
.cn
the cabinet. This carries away the heat generated by the semi–
conductors, thus preventing heat from building up in the cabinet as
much as possible. Therefore, note the following when installing the
amplifier.
w
(a) The heat sink must not be subjected to cutting fluid, oil mist, or
cutting chips. Otherwise, the cooling efficiency will be reduced
w
NOTE
tp
(b) No dust or cutting fluid must be able to enter through the exhaust
port. The flow of cooling air must not be obstructed.
(c) The amplifier must be installed where it can be easily inspected,
removed, and remounted for maintenance.
(d) Current lines and signal lines must be separated and noise must
be suppressed. See the section 5.3 and the connection manual for
each CNC for details.
84
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
(e) The length of the DC link cable must not exceed 1.5 m (see the
figure below).
à à à Ã
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
/
om
Twist PSM SPM SVM SVM
1.5 m
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
s.c
MAX.
re
pa
(f) Each amplifier must be installed vertically.
(g) When a PSM–HV is used, the following module layout
restrictions are imposed:
cs
D When PSM–18HV, PSM–30HV, or PSM–45HV is used
ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
.cn
PSM
ÃÃ
PSMC SPM SVM SVM
w
Install modules in the order of the PSM, PSMC, SPM, then SVM.
w
Do not install the modules for apart from each other; install them
side–by–side.
w
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
://
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
tp
Install modules in the order of the PSM, SPM, PSMC, then SVM.
Do not install the modules far apart from each other; install them
in series.
85
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
5.2
INPUT POWER AND
GROUNDING
5.2.1
/
Input Power
om
(1) 200–V power supply
S Nominal voltage rating : 200/220/230 VAC
S Allowable voltage deviation : –15% to +10% (including Voltage
deviation due to load)
s.c
S Power frequency : 50/60 Hz
S Allowable frequency deviation : +1 Hz
S Power supply unbalance : "5% of the rated voltage or less
re
S Power supply inpedance : Voltage deviation due to load
(at maximum output) shall be 5% or
pa
less.
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃ
[Method to check power impedance]
cs
R L+ L+ U
AC
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃ
S L– L– V
power supply Motor
T W
.cn
G G
Power supply Spindle amplifier
AC module module or servo
voltmeter amplifier module
w
E0–E1 100(%)<7(%)
where, E0
w
D Turn on the control power supply (CX1A power supply input) of the
power supply module (PSM or PSMR) at the same time or earlier than
://
the CNC.
D It is recommended that a capacitor unit for power–factor improvement
tp
If the input voltage changes, the rated output may not appear even
when the input voltage change is within the allowable range.
D When the power supply is used in an area where the input voltage is
not within the range of 200 to 230 VAC, a power transformer is
required. When a power transformer is to be provided by the user, the
power must satisfy the specifications listed below. For transformers
manufactured by FANUC, see (6) in Section 2.2.3.
86
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
PSM–5.5 PSM–11
PSMR–3 PSMR–3
PSMR–5.5 PSMR–5.5 PSM–37
(2 kW (3 kW PSM–15 PSM–26 PSM–30
(5.5 kW (7.5 kW PSM–45
output) output)
output) output)
/
om
Secondary current A 10 14 26 48 62 105 130 185
s.c
Secondary voltage deviation "3%
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
87
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
S
s.c
G
Main circuit input power supply
400/460 VAC
re
Y–connection (neutral grounding)
pa
S Allowable voltage change width : –15% to +10%
(including voltage change
due to the load)
cs
S Power supply frequency : 50/60 Hz
S Allowable change width : "1 Hz
.cn
S Power supply unbalance : "5% of the rated voltage or less
S Power supply impedance : Voltage change due to the load
(at maximum output) is 7%
or less.
w
à Ãà Ã
[Method to check power impedance]
w
AC ÃÃ R
S
L+
L–ÃÃÃÃ L+
L–
U
V ÃÃ
w
à Ãà Ã
T W
G G
://
E0–E1 100(%)<7(%)
where, E0
E0 : Voltage at motor stop
ht
88
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
5.2.2 The servo amplifier α series drives the motor by using the transistor
Leakage Current PWM inverter method. This causes a high–frequency leakage current to
flow via the ground drift capacitance in the motor winding, power cable,
and amplifier. This may cause a device installed on the power supply side,
such as a ground fault interrupter or leakage–protection relay, to
/
malfunction.
om
When a circuit breaker with a ground fault interrupter is used, it must be
selected so that the sum of the values calculated according to (a) and (b)
described below is not greater than the non–operating current value.
(a) Selection criterion per amplifier
s.c
Model : SVM and SPM (both except the HV series)
(NOTE 1), SPMC
Criterion for selection : 2 mA per amplifier (NOTE 2)
re
(b) Selection criterion per motor
Criterion for selection : 1 mA per motor (NOTE 2)
pa
The following example shows how to use selection criteria (a) and (b):
Example : When the system consists of SMV11,
SVM31 (three motors), and SPM1
cs
2 mA3 (for the amplifiers) + 1 mA5 (for the motors)
= 11 mA
.cn
→ Select a circuit breaker (NOTE 3) with a non–operating
current of 11 mA or higher. (A general ground fault
interrupter that can be used for the above example is the one
with a rated sensitivity current of 30 mA and a non–operating
w
current of 15 mA.)
w
NOTE
1 In the 400–V input series, the power supply is grounded by
w
leakage currents.
3 A circuit breaker may malfunction depending on the
frequency characteristic of the ground fault interrupter.
ht
89
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
5.2.3 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground D Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0 V) of the
electrical signal system.
D Frame ground system (FG)
/
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
om
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames,
cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between
the units are connected.
D System ground system
s.c
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.
re
Signal ground system
Frame ground sysytem
Power Servo CNC System ground system
magnet- amplifier control
pa
ics unit
unit Operator’s
panel
Machine
tool
cs
Power
.cn
magnetics
cabinet
w
Distribution board
w
w
90
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
(c) PSMC–HV, regenerative discharge unit, and DBM
Connect the ground terminal of the metal frame to the frame
ground.
s.c
NOTE
1 Securing the ground terminal and a cable together is not
permitted.
re
2 When using an SVM–HV, always attach the motor flange to
the cabinet (machine) connected to the system ground. In
cases where it is difficult to attach the motor flange to the
pa
cabinet (machine) connected to the system ground,
connect the motor flange and frame ground (the ground
plate of the cabinet) with a 1.25–mm2 or larger cable which
cs
should be separated from the power cable as far as
possible. (The dotted line in the figure below)
.cn
w
Not used
://
tp
ht
Frame ground
(ground plate of the cabinet)
(Note 2)
Spindle Servo
motor motor
System ground
91
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
(b) Cable between the metal frame of the module and the frame
ground of the cabinet: As indicated in the table below.
Table.5.2.3 (a) Diameter of PSM ground cable (between the metal
frame of the module and the frame ground)
s.c
Cross–sectional area of
Cross–sectional area of ground cable
power line
Sx5.5 5.5 or more
re
5.5<Sx16 S or more
16<Sx35 16 or more
pa
S>35 S/2 or more
(c) Cables connecting the terminal blocks and metal frames of the
cs
servo amplifier and spindle amplifier modules to the cabinet
frame ground.
.cn
Determine the cross–sectional area of the cables according to
Table 5.2.3 (b).
Table.5.2.3 (b) Cross–Sectional Areas of SPM and SVM Ground
Cables
w
16<Sx35 16 or more
://
(d) Cable connecting the metal frame of the dynamic brake module
tp
NOTE
The following M5 crimp terminal can be used for thick
cables:
CB22–5S manufactured by NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
Applicable cable thickness: 16.78 to 22.66 mm2
92
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
PSM–5.5, PSM–11
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
.cn
Ground
ÃÃÃÃ
cable
1.25mm2
w
ÃÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃ M5 screw
w
://
Cable Cable
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
= ground plate of the cabinet
= ground plate of the cabinet
System ground
93
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
Ground
.cn
cable
1.25mm2
w
w
w
M5 screw
://
Cable Cable
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG)
ht
Fig.5.2.3 (b) Ground Cable Connection (PSM–15 to 37, 18HV to 45HV, and PSMV–11HV)
94
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Ground cable M5 screw
M6
w
1.25mm2
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) Frame ground (FG)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
= ground plate of the cabinet = ground plate of the cabinet
w
System ground
://
tp
ht
95
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
PSMR–3, PSMR–5.5
/
om
s.c
re
ÃÃÃÃ pa
cs
ÃÃÃÃ
Ground
ÃÃÃÃ
cable
.cn
1.25mm2
w
w
w
://
M4 screw (PSMR–3)
M5 screw (PSMR–5.5)
Cable Cable
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
= ground plate of the cabinet = ground plate of the cabinet
System ground
NOTE
For the PSMR–3, the heat sink is not exposed.
96
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Supplied ground
w
bar
ÃÃÃÃ M4 screw
w
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
://
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
From motor M4 screw (with fin)
power cable M5 screw (with no fin)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
(Note 1) (Note 2)
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
= cabinet ground plate
System ground
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
= cabinet ground plate
Fig.5.2.3 (e) Ground Cable Connection (SVM1–12, 20, 40S, 40L, 80)
NOTE
1 A motor has one or two ground cables.
2 Type with no external fin: SVM1–12, 20
Type with external fin: SVM1–40S, 40L, 80
97
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
M4 screw
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
://
ÃÃÃÃ
M5 screw
From motor
power cable
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet Frame ground (FG) = cabinet ground plate
ground plate
98
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
://
M5 screw
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
M6 M5 screw
screw
From
tp
motor
power
cable
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ground plate ground plate
System ground
99
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Supplied ground
w
bar
ÃÃÃÃ M4 screw
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
From L–axis motor M4 screw (with no fin)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
power cable M5 screw (with ins)
://
(Note 1)
From M–axis motor
(Note 2)
power cable
(Note 1)
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
Fig.5.2.3 (h) Servo amplifier module (SVM2–12/12, 12/20, 20/20, 12/40, 20/40, 40/40)
NOTE
1 A motor has one or two ground cables.
2 Type with no external fin: SVM2–12/12, 12/20, 20/20
Type with external fin: SVM2–12/40, 20/40, 40/40
100
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
ÃÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃM4 screw
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
M5 screw
://
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
Fig.5.2.3 (i) Ground Cable Connection (SVM2–40/80, 80/80, 40L/40L, 20/20HV, 20/40HV, 20/60HV,
40/40HV, 40/60HV, 60/60HV)
101
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Supplied
w
ÃÃÃÃ
ground bar
M4 screw
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
From L–axis motor
power cable (Note 1) M5 screw
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
From M–axis motor
://
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
From N–axis motor
power cable (Note 1)
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
NOTE
1 A motor has one or two ground wires.
2 The heatsink of SVM3–12/12/12, 12/12/20, 12/20/20, and
20/20/20 is not exposed externally.
102
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Supplied
w
ground bar
ÃÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃ
://
M5 screw
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ground plate ground plate
System ground
103
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
M4 screw
w
w
ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
://
ÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
From motor
power cable
M5 screw
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ground plate
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ground plate
System ground
Fig.5.2.3 (l) Ground Cable Connection (SPM–5.5, 11, 11HV, SPMC–5.5, 11)
104
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ
w
power lines
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG)
Frame ground (FG) = ground plate of the cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
Fig.5.2.3 (m) Ground Cable Connection (SPM–15 to 30, 15HV to 45HV, SPMC–15 to 26)
105
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃ
From motor M6 screw
power cable
://
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) Frame ground (FG)
= cabinet ground plate = cabinet ground plate
106
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ
://
ÃÃÃÃ
M5 screw
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ground plate ground plate
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
System ground
107
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
ÃÃÃ
M5 screw
://
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ground plate
System ground
108
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
://
M5 screw
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Frame ground (FG) = cabinet Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ground plate ground plate
System ground
109
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
A06B–6089–H510 A06B–6089–H500 A06B–6089–H711 to 713
s.c
re
pa ÃÃÃ
cs
ÃÃÃ
M4
screw
.cn
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
M4
w
screw
w
w
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
://
M5 screw
tp
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Frame ground (FG) = cabinet
ÃÃÃÃÃ
ground plate
System ground
110
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
5.3
NOISE PREVENTION
5.3.1 Signal lines must be separated from amplifier input power lines and motor
Separation of Signal power lines. The table below lists the signal types.
Lines Group Signal type Action
/
om
Amplifier input power line
Separate binding (Note 1) or electro-
Motor power line
A magnetic shielding (Note 2) is neces-
sary for group B cables.
Magnetic contactor driving
s.c
coil (Note 3)
re
Cable between CNC and
SPM
pa
Separate binding or electromagnetic
Cable for position feedback
B shielding is necessary for group A
or velocity feedback
cables. All cables must be shielded.
Cable for position coder
cs
Cable for magnetic sensor
.cn
Other cable related to sensor
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
w
Cabinet
tp
ht
Duct
To operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.
Group A Group B
Cover
111
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
5.3.2 Perform terminal processing of the shield sheaths of the signal wires
Cable Clamp and according to the description in Section 9.2.
Shield Processing The cables that run into the amplifier and which require shield processing,
with the exception of K14, K15, K17, K18, K19, K31, and K33, must be
clamped as indicated in Fig. 5.3.2 (1). Clamping secures a cable and also
/
provides shielding. Clamping must always be performed since it is very
om
important for stable system operation.
Strip part of the cable jacket to expose the shield sheath, as shown in the
figure below. Secure that part of the cable to the ground plate by using
a clamp.
s.c
The ground plate must be created and installed by the user as shown in
Figs 5.3.2 (2) to (5).
re
Ground plate
pa
cs
Cable
.cn
Metal fittings
for clamp
w
w
w
://
40mm∼80mm
tp
ht
112
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
""
Machine side
installation
"" board
""
Control unit
""
""
/
""
om
""
""
""
""
s.c
""
Ground plate
""
""
re
""
""
pa
Metal fittings
""
for clamp
Shield cover
cs
Fig.5.3.2 (b) Cable clamp (2)
.cn
w
Ground terminal
(grounded)
w
w
://
113
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
NOTE
Connect each shield cable to the ground plate installed near
the cabinet inlet by using a ground clamp. This prevents
noise generated in the panel from being emitted to external
devices.
/
om
Ground
8mm plate
s.c
12mm
re
pa
20mm
cs
Fig.5.3.2 (d) Ground plate holes
.cn
Max. 55mm
w
w
28mm
w
://
6mm
tp
ht
17mm
114
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
5.3.3 Driving a servo motor or spindle motor may generate noise that could
Protecting External affect external general electronic devices (such as AM radios and
telephones).
Electronic Devices
Preventive measures against noise, including those for external electronic
from Noise
devices affected by noise, must be taken from the viewpoint of an entire
/
system. See Appendix G, which describes the principle of noise
om
generation and which provides examples of preventive measures.
s.c
CE Marking products have all been granted a certificate of conformity to the EMC
Directive (EC Directive 89/336/EEC) by a third–party certification
Requirements organization.
re
For CE marking, special considerations are required to satisfy the
installation requirements described in the following guideline:
pa
A–72937E: To satisfy the requirement of the EMC Directive
For details of the above guideline, contact your local FANUC office.
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
115
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
5.3.5 To satisfy the EMC Directive, the installation of a noise filter is required
Selecting a Noise Filter in the input section of the power magnetics cabinet.
The rated current of the noise filter being used is determined according
to the type of the CNC that is connected, the type and number of motors,
and the power consumption of the other peripheral devices. Using the
/
expression given below, calculate the noise filter load current, and select
om
a noise filter so that the load current does not exceed the rated current of
the filter. Recommended noise filters are given in (12) of Section 2.2.3.
Obtaining the load current of a noise filter
s.c
The load current of a noise filter is the sum of the CNC input current, PSM
input current, and current consumption under the other loads.
re
Current con-
CNC input PSM input
Load current sumption under
= current + Σ current +
(Arms) other loads
(Arms) (Arms)
pa
(Arms)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
cs
NOTE
.cn
1 The CNC input current is determined by the number of
PSUs (power supply units). Calculate the CNC input current
from the following expression:
CNC input current (Arms) = 5 (Arms) x number of PSUs
w
116
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
5.4
NOTES ON
AMPLIFIER
INSTALLATION
RELATED TO SAFETY
/
STANDARDS
om
5.4.1 The servo amplifier α series is designed to conform to the following
Overview European safety standard:
s.c
DIN VDE 0160 1988/1:1989
(Electronic devices used in a power facility and their incorporation into
the facility)
re
To certify conformity to the standard, FANUC has obtained certification
pa
from Tûv Rheinland, a third–party certification organization for
European standards.
In power magnetics cabinet design when the machine is to be CE–marked,
cs
the installation conditions described in the following sections should be
considered carefully, based on the EC Machine Directives (directives
based on 89/392/EEC).
.cn
[Remarks]
CE marking requires compliance with a related EN standard [EN
w
5.4.2
Standard Class of (1) Insulation of circuits and protective ground
Insulation Design
According to DIN VDE 0160, the insulation design of this amplifier
series conforms to DIN VDE 0110 Part 1 and other related standards.
D The primary (power supply and main circuit) and the
secondary (control circuit) are separated from each other by
reinforced insulation.
D Basic insulation is used on the protective ground side.
117
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
Basic insulation is also used between the power supply main circuit
and aluminum flange (integrated with a heatsink). Connect the
protective ground wire to the ground terminal of the lower aluminum
flange as described in Section 5.2.3.
(2) Installation category (overvoltage category)
/
DIN VDE 0110 [Insulation coordination of electric apparatuses]
om
classifies power supply facilities by the impulse voltage (relative to
ground) in the power supply to which the amplifier is connected.
This amplifier series is designed as a device of installation category
(overvoltage category) II.
s.c
The layout of this amplifier series has been designed on the
assumption that the rated impulse withstand voltage (impulse voltage
relative to ground) in the power supply to which the amplifier is
re
connected is 2.5 kV or lower.
If an impulse greater than 2.5 kV, relative to ground, appears in the
power supply, it must be suppressed.
pa
Generally, this requirement is considered to be satisfied if an
insulated transformer is used in the power supply input section of a
machine.
cs
If an insulated transformer is not used, install a surge protector
(lightning surge absorber) between the facility and ground to suppress
.cn
any impulse higher than 2.5 kV, relative to ground.
(3) Contamination class of the installation environment and power
magnetics cabinet protection level
w
general plant level, the protection level against dust, coolant, chips,
and so forth be IP54 or higher.
w
118
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
5.4.3
Protection Against
(1) Protection against direct contact to a charged part
Electric Shock
The protection level against electric shock after the installation of this
amplifier series is equivalent to IP1X (hand protection). Thus, no live
/
part can be touched unconsciously or carelessly.
om
This amplifier series must always be installed in a power magnetics
cabinet. According to Item 6.2.1 of EN 60204–1 ”Electric Shock
Protection by Using a Cabinet,” lock the power magnetics cabinet so
that, while the amplifier is on, the cabinet cannot be opened by
s.c
persons except special maintenance personnel or a person qualified
for maintenance who has been trained in protective measures against
electric shock.
re
When a machine operator needs to open the power magnetics cabinet
to perform a certain operation, the operator must have received
pa
sufficient safety education, or a protection cover must be installed to
prevent the operator from touching the amplifier.
cs
(2) Checking discharge of an electrolytic capacitor
This amplifier series contains a large–capacitance electrolytic
capacitor for the power supply smoothing circuit. Even after the
.cn
of several kilohertz.
Ground drift capacitance mainly between the motor armature
winding and case and between the power line of the motor power
cable and protective ground wire causes a leakage current to flow into
the protective ground wire of the motor power cable and the machine
ground. Part of the leakage current also flows into the protective
ground wire of the machine.
The resultant leakage current is about 1 to 2 mA per motor shaft at the
commercial power supply frequency (50/60 Hz). With the
measurement circuit defined by EN 60950, the leakage current is
allowed to be much higher than 3.5 mA; this is because the
high–frequency component sensitivity cannot be fully reduced.
119
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
om
disconnected immediately if a ground fault occurs.
(c) Add a protective grounding terminal to the cabinet to make a
double ground wire connection.
When using a ground fault interrupter, select an electromagnetic
s.c
ground fault interrupter with a low high–frequency component
sensitivity, or an electronic ground fault interrupter that can be used
with inverters.
re
5.4.4 Amplifiers have multiple protective grounding terminals (marked as
pa
Protective Installation defined by 417–IEC–5019). These terminals are used to prevent electric
shock in case of dielectric breakdown, and are also used for functional
grounding to prevent noise.
cs
All protective ground terminals must be connected to the protective
ground (PE) connection terminals in the power magnetics cabinet.
.cn
For how to connect the protective ground wires and the cross–sectional
areas of these wires, see Section 5.2.3.
Note that cables from cable terminals cannot be secured together with
protective ground terminals.
w
w
5.4.5 The amplifier uses IGBT (transistors) as an internal means of turning off
Notes on the the power system; it does not use an electromechanical means.
Therefore, when an emergency stop circuit is configured, a line contactor
w
Emergency Stop
enabling electromechanical disconnection must be installed on the power
Circuit Configuration
input line for feeding power to the power supply module so that a voltage
://
is applied to the control coil of the contactor via the contactor control
output of the power supply module.
tp
Some amplifier failures may prevent the output relay of the power supply
module from being turned off even when the amplifier emergency stop
command input (*ESP) is driven low, thus disabling disconnection by the
ht
line contactor.
The emergency stop circuit must disconnect power without fail. It must
have a redundant circuit configuration having a route through which the
line contactor is disconnected directly by the command generated by the
emergency stop operation switch, independent of the disconnection
function provided by the amplifier.
If the power line is disconnected during spindle rotation when a spindle
amplifier module is used, the spindle may not be able to be stopped
immediately by the power regeneration function, and may keep rotating
by the force of inertia. Therefore, on the redundant circuit side, a delay
function must be provided which is based on an off–delay timer
considering a normal stop time.
120
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
For detailed notes on the safety circuits, refer to the following document:
A–71429–S13J : Safety Circuit Requirements and Configuration
Examples
To obtain this document, contact your local FANUC office.
/
om
5.4.6 Some amplifier models are certified as conforming to standards, with the
Decrease in Load load reduction factors shown below being set.
Factor for Given If such an amplifier is used with a load factor exceeded, the allowable
Ambient Temperature temperature range of a component may be exceeded, which may cause an
s.c
overheat alarm or a decrease in the component life. Therefore, use the
amplifier within the decrease characteristic.
(1) Power supply module time rating decrease with temperature
re
See Fig. 5.4.6 (a).
pa
(2) Servo amplifier module time rating decrease with temperature
See Fig. 5.4.6 (b).
cs
(3) Spindle amplifier module time rating decrease with temperature
See Fig. 5.4.6 (c).
.cn
ÃÃ
cont inuous output (m inutes)
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃ
Allowable t ime for
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
://
121
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
/
ÃÃ
om
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
s.c
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
re
Ambient temperature (_C)
ÃÃ
pa
Cont inuous rated current (%)
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
cs
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
.cn
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃ
Cont inuous rated current (%)
ÃÃ
tp
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ht
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ambient temperature (_C)
122
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
/
ÃÃ
om
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
s.c
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
re
Ambient temperature (_C)
ÃÃ
pa
Cont inuous rated current (%)
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
cs
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
.cn
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃ
Cont inuous rated current (%)
ÃÃÃ
tp
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ht
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ Ambient temperature (_C)
123
5. INSTALLATION B–65162E/03
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
/
ÃÃ
om
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
s.c
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
re
Ambient temperature (_C)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
pa
(Applied to the M–axis)
Cont inuous rated current (%)
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
cs
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
.cn
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃ
w
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Ambient temperature (_C)
w
://
124
B–65162E/03 5. INSTALLATION
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
cont inuous output (m inutes) cont inuous output (m inutes) cont inuous output (m inutes)
cont inuous output (m inutes) cont inuous output (m inutes) cont inuous output (m inutes)
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
/
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
om
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
Allowable t ime for
s.c
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Ambient temperature (_C) ÃÃÃ Ambient temperature (_C)
ÃÃ ÃÃ
re
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ paÃÃ
ÃÃ
Allowable t ime for
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Ambient temperature (_C)
ÃÃÃ
Ambient temperature (_C)
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
Allowable t ime for
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
w
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
://
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
Ambient temperature (_C) Ambient temperature (_C)
tp
ht
Fig.5.4.6 (e) Decreasing Curve of Spindle Amplifier Module Time Rating Dependent on Temperature
125
6. HEAT DISSIPATION B–65162E/03
6 HEAT DISSIPATION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
126
B–65162E/03 6. HEAT DISSIPATION
6.1 The heat dissipated by each α series control motor amplifier module is as
follows:
200–V INPUT SERIES
6.1.1
/
Power Supply Module
om
Table.6.1.1 (a) PSM Heat Out Put
Remaining heat in
s.c
cabinet
Rated Total heat
Name Ordering number
output dissipation Forced air
Natural
cooling
ventilation
re
(Note 1)
pa
53W
PSM–11 A06B–6077–H111 11kW 158W
(Note 2)
PSM–15
cs
A06B–6087–H115 15kW 333W 61W
93W
w
NOTE
w
Remaining heat in
cabinet
Rated Total heat
Name Ordering n
number
mber
output dissipation
Natural Forced air
ventilation cooling
127
6. HEAT DISSIPATION B–65162E/03
Name n mber
Ordering number Total heat dissipation Remarks
/
om
For PSM–15 A81L–0001–0123 33W
s.c
For PSM–37 A81L–0001–0147 72W
re
Table.6.1.1 (d) AC Line Filter
pa
Name Ordering n
number
mber Total heat dissipation Remarks
128
B–65162E/03 6. HEAT DISSIPATION
6.1.2 When a motor other than those listed below is used, its heat output should
Servo Amplifier be assumed to be that of a listed motor with a higher rated current.
Module
Table.6.1.2 (a) SVM1 (1–AXIS)
/
Motor used Remaining heat in cabinet
om
Ordering Total heat
Name Forced air
number dissipation Natural
L axis M axis N axis cooling
ventilation
(Note 1)
s.c
A06B–6079–H101
SVM1–12 α2/3000 31W – –
A06B–6096–H101
A06B–6079–H102
SVM1–20 αC6/2000 34W – –
A06B–6096–H102
re
A06B–6079–H103
SVM1–40S α6/2000 47W 32W (30W)
A06B–6096–H103
pa
A06B–6079–H104
SVM1–40L α22/1500 80W 45W (41W)
A06B–6096–H104
cs
α6/3000 70W 39W (36W)
A06B–6079–H105
SVM1–80 α12/3000 91W 47W (42W)
A06B–6096–H105
.cn
A06B–6079–H106
α40/2000 144W 66W (56W)
A06B–6096–H106
w
A06B–6096–H106 α40/2000
198W – 72W (Note 2)
+ (with a fan)
A06B–6078–K002
w
A06B–6079–H107
SVM1–240 α6/3000 553W 134W (56W)
://
A06B–6096–H107
A B
A06B–6096–H108
H
α150/2000 643W 152W (60W)
ht
NOTE
1 A vaule enclosed by parentheses indicates the remaining heat when the module is forcibly
air–cooled with an air flow of 2m/s or more.
2 Requires forced air cooling equivalent to fan adaptor unit A06B–6078–K002.
129
6. HEAT DISSIPATION B–65162E/03
/
A06B–6079–H201
SVM2–12/12 α2/3000 α2/3000 54W – –
om
A06B–6096–H201
A06B–6079–H202
SVM2–12/20 α2/3000 αC12/2000 68W – –
A06B–6096–H202
A06B–6079–H203
SVM2–20/20 αC12/2000 αC12/2000 82W – –
s.c
A06B–6096–H203
re
A06B–6079–H205 αC12/2000 α6/2000 77W 45W (41W)
SVM2–20/40
A06B–6096–H205 αC12/2000 αC22/1500 111W 60W (53W)
pa
α6/2000 α6/2000 73W 43W (39W)
A06B–6079–H206
A06B 6079 H206
SVM2–40/40 α6/2000 αC22/1500 107W 57W (51W)
A06B–6096–H206
06 6096 06
αC22/1500
csαC22/1500 141W 72W (63W)
α6/2000 α6/3000 96W 50W (45W)
.cn
α6/2000 α12/3000 118W 59W (52W)
NOTE
A vaule enclosed by parentheses indicates the remaining heat when the module is forcibly
air–cooled with an air flow of 2m/s or more.
130
B–65162E/03 6. HEAT DISSIPATION
/
om
A06B–6079–H301
SVM3–12/12/12 α2/3000 α2/3000 α2/3000 79W – –
A06B–6096–H301
A06B–6079–H302
SVM3–12/12/20 α2/3000 α2/3000 αC12/2000 93W – –
A06B–6096–H302
s.c
A06B–6079–H303
SVM3–12/20/20 α2/3000 αC12/2000 αC12/2000 106W – –
A06B–6096–H303
A06B–6079–H304
αC12/2000 αC12/2000 αC12/2000
re
SVM3–12/20/20 120W – –
A06B–6096–H304
pa
SVM3–20/20/20
A06B–6096–H305
α2/3000 α2/3000 αC22/1500 122W 71W (65W)
NOTE
A vaule enclosed by parentheses indicates the remaining heat when the module is forcibly
w
131
6. HEAT DISSIPATION B–65162E/03
6.1.3
Spindle Amplifier
Module
Table.6.1.3 (a) SPM
/
om
Remaining heat in cabinet
Continuous rated
Total heat
Name Ordering number output of motor
dissipation Natural Forced air cooling
(Note 4)
ventilation (Note 1)
s.c
SPM–2.2 A06B–6078–H202#H500 1.5kW 75W 37W (32W)
re
3.7kW 120W 46W (36W)
pa
7.5kW 218W 46W (Note 2)
NOTE
1 A vaule enclosed by parentheses indicates the remaining heat when the module is forcibly
air–cooled with an air flow of 2m/s or more.
://
2 Requires forced air cooling equivalent to fan adaptor unit A06B–6078–K001 (with air flow of
2 m/s or greater).
tp
3 Forced air cooling by fan adaptor unit A06B–6078–K003 or equivalent (2 m/s or more) is
required.
4 The rated output is the continuous rated output of the motor.
ht
132
B–65162E/03 6. HEAT DISSIPATION
/
SPMC–2.2 A06B–6082–H202#H510 1.5kW 75W 37W (32W)
om
2.2kW 112W 44W (36W)
SPMC–5 5
SPMC–5.5 A06B–6082–H206#H510
3.7kW 120W 46W (36W)
s.c
SPMC–11 A06B–6082–H211#H510
7.5kW 218W 53W (Note 2)
re
15kW 435W 53W
SPMC–22 A06B–6087–H222#H512
pa
18.5kW 515W 57W
133
6. HEAT DISSIPATION B–65162E/03
6.2
400–V INPUT SERIES
6.2.1
Power Supply Modules
/
om
Table.6.2.1 (a) PSM–HV
s.c
Forced air cooling
ventilation
re
PSM–30HV A06B–6091–H130 30kW 380W 64W
pa
PSM–45HV A06B–6091–H145 37kW 475W 68W
NOTE
Forced air cooling by fan adaptor unit A06B–6078–K003 or equivalent (2 m/s or more) is
w
required.
w
PSMC–45HV A06B–6091–H145 5W 5W
134
B–65162E/03 6. HEAT DISSIPATION
/
PSMV–11HV A06B–6098–H111 3.0kW 60W 60W
om
Table.6.2.1 (d) AC Reactor
Total heat
Name Ordering number Remarks
s.c
dissipation
When PSM–18HV is
12W
used
re
For PSM–18, When PSM–30HV is
A81L–0001–0127 30W
30, 45HV used
pa
When PSM–45HV is
67W
used
Total heat
Name Ordering number Remarks
dissipation
135
6. HEAT DISSIPATION B–65162E/03
6.2.2 When a motor other than those listed below is used, its heat output should
Servo Amplifier be assumed to be that of a listed motor with a higher rated current.
Modules
Table.6.2.2 (a) SVM1–HV (One Axis)
/
om
Ordering number Motor used Remaining heat in cabinet
Total heat
Name
A06B–6085 dissipation Natural Forced air
L–axis M–axis
A06B–6097 ventilation cooling
s.c
SVM1–20HV –H102 α6/3000HV 32W 22W
αM30/3000HV
re
SVM1–60HV –H104 88W 45W
Name
Ordering number
pa
Motor used
Total heat
Remaining heat in cabinet
A06B–6085
cs dissipation Natural Forced air
L–axis M–axis
A06B–6097 ventilation cooling
α6/3000HV α6/3000HV
.cn
SVM2–20/20HV –H201 55W 36W
α12/3000HV αM30/3000HV
w
136
B–65162E/03 6. HEAT DISSIPATION
6.2.3
Spindle Amplifier
Modules
Table.6.2.3 SPM–HV
/
om
Remaining heat in cabinet
Continuous rated
Total heat
Name Ordering number output of motor
dissipation Natural
(Note 3) Forced air cooling
ventilation
s.c
5.5kW 122W 37W (Note 1)
SPM–11HV A06B–6092–H211#H500
7.5kW 156W 41W (Note 1)
re
SPM–15HV A06B–6092–H215#H500 11kW 189W 37W
pa
SPM–26HV A06B–6092–H226#H500 18.5kW 298W 42W
NOTE
1 Forced air cooling by fan adaptor unit A06B–6078–K001 or equivalent (2m/s or more) is
required.
w
2 Forced air cooling by fan adaptor unit A06B–6078–K003 or equivalent (2m/s or more) is
required.
w
137
7.COOLING B–65162E/03
7
/
The use of an amplifier module listed below requires forced air cooling.
om
In this case, provide a fan motor.
When forced air cooling is provided, the power magnetics cabinet should
be designed so that cooling air from the fan motor does not leak out from
the cabinet.
s.c
Because of its operating environment, the fan motor may have to be
maintained or replaced. Therefore, special considerations should be
given to the installation and construction of the fan motor so that
re
maintenance work can be performed easily.
Table.7 AC Reactor
pa
Re-
quired Usable fan Manufacturer part
Model
wind adaptor (Note) number
cs
speed
SVM1–130
(When motor α22/3000,
α30/3000, α40/2000 (with 2 m/sec ROYAL ELECTRIC
w
A06B–6078–K002
fan), αL25/3000, αL50.2000, or more UT857CG (R)
or αM40/3000 is used)
SPMC–11
w
ROYAL ELECTRIC
UTHC457C
w
PSM–45,SPM–45, 2 m/sec
A06B–6078–K003 STYLE ELEC-
PSM–75HV,SPM–75HV or more
TRONICS
US12D23
://
tp
NOTE
Using a fan adaptor enables the desired cooling
performance to be obtained. For details of the fan adaptor,
ht
138
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
139
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
8.1
OUTLINE DRAWINGS
8.1.1
Outline Drawings of (1) Power supply modules
Modules
/
Table.8.1.1 (a) Power Supply Modules
om
Model Outline drawing
PSM–5.5
Outline drawing 4
s.c
PSM–11
PSM–15
re
Outline drawing 5
PSM–30
pa
PSM–37
Power
regeneration type
PSM–45 Outline drawing 6
cs PSMV–11HV
PSM–18HV
Outline drawing 5
.cn
PSM–45HV
regeneration
i type
PSMR–5.5 Outline drawing 2
w
Amplifier model
Model Outline drawing
used
tp
PSM–18HV PSMC–18HV
Outline drawing 3
ht
PSM–30HV PSMC–30HV
400–V in
input
ut series
PSM–45HV
PSMC–45HV Outline drawing 7
PSM–75HV
SVM1–12
200–V in
input
ut series One axis Outline drawing 1
SVM1–20
140
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
SVM1–40S
/
SVM1–80
om
One axis
SVM1–130 Outline drawing 4
SVM1–240
Outline drawing 5
s.c
SVM1–360
SVM2–12/12
re
SVM2–12/20 Outline drawing 1
SVM2–20/20
pa
SVM2–12/40
SVM2–40L/40L
.cn
SVM2–80/80
w
SVM3–12/12/12
SVM3–12/12/20
w
Outline drawing 3
SVM3–12/20/20
w
SVM3–12/12/40
://
SVM3–20/20/40
tp
SVM1–20HV
ht
SVM1–60HV
SVM2–20/20HV
SVM2–40/40HV
Two axes Outline drawing 4
SVM2–20/60HV
SVM2–40/60HV
SVM2–60/60HV
141
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
SPM–5.5(TYPE1,2,4)
om
Outline drawing 4
SPM–11(TYPE1,2,4)
SPM–11(TYPE3)
200–V input
s.c
SPM–15(TYPE1,2,3,4)
series
SPM–22(TYPE1,2,3,4) Outline drawing 5
SPM–26(TYPE1,2,3,4)
re
α series
SPM–30(TYPE1,2,3,4)
pa
SPM–45(TYPE1,2,3,4) Outline drawing 6
SPM–45HV(TYPE1,2,4)
SPMC–5.5
w
Outline drawing 4
200–V input SPMC–11
αC serie
series
i
w
SPMC–15
SPMC–26
tp
ht
142
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
143
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
144
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
8.1.2 (For the panel cut–out drawing, see Section 8.2 (k).)
AC Reactor Unit
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
145
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
8.1.3
AC Reactor
A B C D E M– F G H I J K L Weight
/
For PSM–5.5, 11
(a) 115 127 84 50 65 M5 47 48 135 125 85 5 17 4.5kg
om
A81L–0001–0122
For PSM–15
(b) 135 145 105 50 80 M5 47 48 155 125 85 7.2 17 6.5kg
A81L–0001–0123
For PSM–26
s.c
(c) 9.5kg
A81L–0001–0120
188 160 115 70 95 M5 65 59 195 161 96 72
7.2 20
For PSM–30
(d) 9.2kg
A81L–0001–0124
re
For PSM–18 to 45HV
(e) 218 175 120 80 100 M5 75 70 220 192 106 7.2 13.5 15kg
A81L–0001–0127
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
146
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
A B C D E M– F G H I J K L M Weight
For PSM–37
(f) 218 145 120 80 100 M8 75 112 220 212 150 7.2 43 172 16.5kg
A81L–0001–0147
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
147
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
8.1.4
AC Line Filter
(a) A81L–0001–0083#3C
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
(b) A81L–0001–0101#C
w
w
://
tp
ht
148
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
8.1.5
Power Transformer
/
om
Terminal M4
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
NOTE
The four side panels are all meshed, while the top is a solid plate.
149
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
Terminal M6
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
NOTE
The four side panels are all meshed, while the top is a solid plate.
150
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
Terminal M6
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
NOTE
The four side panels are all meshed, while the top is a solid plate.
151
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
Terminal M8
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
NOTE
The four side panels are all meshed, while the top is a solid plate.
152
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
153
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
Outline Drawing of Power Transformer with no Cover
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
NOTE
The four side panels are all meshed, while the top is a solid plate.
154
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
8.1.6
Fan Adaptor
/
om
s.c
re
pa
Connector
(waterproof type)
cs
Stopper for
positioning
.cn
w
w
w
Fan motor
://
tp
ht
155
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
Cables used: Vinyl heavy–duty power cord (JIS C 3312), two cores
Conductor 1.25 mm2 (50/0.18), sheath PVC 9.6 in diameter
://
NOTE
1 When SVM1–130 is used together with the following
tp
156
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
200VAC IN (Note)
pa
cs
.cn
w
NOTE
To prevent fan motor burn–out, use a 2–A fuse or circuit breaker.
w
w
://
tp
ht
157
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
8.1.7
Regenerative
Discharge Unit
(a) A06B–6089–H510 (For the panel cut–out drawing, see Section 8.2 (g).)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
Label
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
158
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
(b) A06B–6089–H500 (For the panel cut–out drawing, see Section 8.2 (h).)
/
om
s.c
re
Mounting
direction
pa
cs
M4 screw
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
159
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
(c) A06B–6089–H711 to H713 (For the panel cut–out drawing, see Section 8.2 (i).)
/
om
s.c
Mounting
re
direction
Label
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
Pack Packing
w
ing
://
tp
ht
A06B–6089–H711 5Kg
A06B–6089–H712 6Kg
A06B–6089–H713 5Kg
160
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
8.1.8
Dynamic Brake Module
(DBM)
(For the panel cut–out drawing, see Section 8.2 (j).)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
161
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
8.1.9
Circuit Breaker
Ordering draw-
A B C D E M1– F G H I J K L M2– N Mounting
ing number
/
om
2 positions
(a) A06B–6077–K101 75 50 190 115 130 M5 17 80 56 49 φ8 φ5 110 M4 25
(1)
(b) A06B–6077–K102
2 positions
(c) A06B–6077–K103 75 50 190 115 130 M8 17 80 56 49 φ8 φ5 110 M4 25
(1)
s.c
(d) A06B–6077–K104
(e) A06B–6077–K108
re
(f) A06B–6077–K105
(g) A06B–6077–K110 105 70 265 144 165 M8 25.5 84 56 47 φ8.5 φ4.5 126 M4 35 4 positions
pa
(h) A06B–6077–K109
(i) A06B–6077–K107
cs
2 positions
(j) A06B–6077–K106 75 50 156 80 96 M5 12.5 80 41 14 φ8.5 φ4.5 80–84 M4 25
(2)
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
162
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
Two mounting holes (1) Two mounting holes (2) Four mounting holes
The circuit breakers have two or four mounting holes.
163
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
8.1.10
Magnetic Contactors
(a) A06B–6077–K121
/
om
(Dimensions with Coil terminal M3.5
cover for protect-
ing live parts) Main terminal M4
s.c
re
pa Auxiliary terminal M3.5
cs
.cn
w
Auxiliary
y con-
n mber
Ordering drawing number Operation coil voltage Weight
tact structure
Body Cover
ht
200V/50Hz
A06B–6077–K121 SC–5–1 SZ–JC4 1a1b 0.38Kg
200–220V/60Hz
164
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
Auxiliary terminal M3.5
cs
.cn
w
tact structure
Body Cover
200V/50Hz
2a2b
200–220V/60Hz
A06B–6077–K123 SC–2N SZ–1N/T 0.68Kg
165
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
(c) A06B–6077–K124
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs Auxiliary terminal M3.5
.cn
w
w
w
200V/50Hz
A06B–6077–K124 SC–2SN SZ–2SN/T 2a2b 1.3Kg
200–220V/60Hz
166
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
(d) A06B–6077–K125
/
om
s.c
re
pa
Grounding
metal Auxiliary terminal M3.5
cs
.cn
(Dimensions with cover for protecting live parts)
w
w
w
200V/50Hz
A06B–6077–K124 SC–2SN SZ–2SN/T 2a2b 1.5Kg
200–220V/60Hz
167
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
(e) A06B–6077–K126
/
om
s.c
re
pa
Grounding
metal
cs
Auxiliary terminal M3.5
.cn
200V/50Hz
A06B–6077–K126 SC–5N SZ–5N/T 2a2b 2.5Kg
200–220V/60Hz
168
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
(f) A06B–6077–K127
30 min
Coil terminal M4
Main terminal M10
/
om
s.c
re
pa
Auxiliary
terminal M4
cs
Grounding
metal
.cn
200V/50Hz
A06B–6077–K127 SC–8N SZ–8N/T 2a2b 5.2Kg
200–220V/60Hz
169
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
(g) A06B–6077–K128
Coil terminal
(Dimensions with cover for protecting live parts) M3.5
30 min
/
Main terminal
om
M8
s.c
re
pa
cs
Grounding Auxiliary
metal terminal
.cn
M3.5
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
200V/50Hz
A06B–6077–K128 SC–7N SZ–5N/T 2a2b 3.4Kg
200–220V/60Hz
170
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
8.1.11
Lightning Surge
Protector
(a) A06B–6077–K142
/
om
Connection
diagram
s.c
Resin
re
pa
Lead
cs
Case
.cn
w
Connection
diagram
://
tp
Resin
ht
Lead
Case
171
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
Specification Rated voltage Clamp voltage Surge withstand current Surge withstand voltage
Specification Rated voltage Clamp voltage Surge withstand current Surge withstand voltage
/
line–to–line:
om
430VAC,
R⋅A⋅V–781BXZ–4 AC700V"20% (Ua) 2500A (8/20µS) 2.0kV (1.2/50µS)
line–to–ground:
250VAC
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
172
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
(b) A06B–6077–K143
Connection
diagram
/
om
s.c
re
pa
(1) For line–to–line installation: RAV–152BYZ–2A
cs
.cn
Connection
diagram
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
Specification Rated voltage Clamp voltage Surge withstand current Surge withstand voltage
line–to–line:
500VAC,
R⋅A⋅V–801BXZ–4 AC800V"20% (Ua) 2500A (8/20µS) 2.32kV (1.2/50µS)
line–to–ground:
290VAC
173
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
8.2
PANEL CUT–OUT
DIAGRAMS
(a) 60–mm–wide amplifier
/
om
With no external fin With external fin (when two units are installed side by side)
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
NOTE
1 When an external fin is provided, attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft
type]) to the fin to protect it against oil and dust.
ht
2 Reinforce the right and left sides of the panel cut–out in the power magnetics cabinet by using
fittings such as angles to maintain satisfactory contact between the sheet metal of the power
magnetics cabinet and the flange of the amplifier.
174
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
With no external fin With external fin (when two units are installed side by side)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
NOTE
1 When an external fin is provided, attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft
w
175
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
(c) 90–mm–wide amplifier (when fan adaptor A06B–6078–K001 is installed in PSM–11, SPM–11, and
SPM–11HV; two units are installed side–by–side)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
NOTE
1 The above panel cut–out drawing is used when a fan adaptor for forced air cooling is used.
w
When a fan motor for forced air cooling is provided by the user, the same panel cut–out drawing
as (b) is used.
://
2 Attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft type]) for protection against oil and
dust.
3 Reinforce the right and left sides of the panel cut hole in the power magnetics cabinet by using
tp
176
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
Angle for reinforcement
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
177
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
Insert the fan adaptor in Turn the fan adaptor
the amplifier mounting through 90_, and retain
hole. the adaptor on the panel
cut plane of the cabinet
re
by using M5 screws.
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
178
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
Remove the sheet metal from the
amplifier as shown in the figure on
the left, and install the amplifier in
re
the cabinet.
pa
cs
.cn
Completed
179
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
(d) 90–mm–wide amplifier (when fan adaptor A06B–6078–K002 is installed in SVM1–130 and SPMC–11; two
units are installed side–by–side)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
NOTE
1 The above panel cut–out drawing is used when a fan adaptor for forced air cooling is used.
://
When forced air cooling is to be performed without using FANUC’s fan adaptor, the same panel
cut–out drawing as (b) is used.
tp
2 When two fan adaptors (A06B–60780K002) are installed side–by–side (for example, when
SPMC–11 and SVM1–130 are used), separate the modules by at least 100 mm. A short bar
(F) can be used when the modules are separated from each other by 100 mm.
ht
3 Attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft type]) for protection against oil and
dust.
4 Reinforce the right and left sides of the panel cut–out in the power magnetics cabinet by using
fittings such as angles to maintain satisfactory contact with the amplifier.
180
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
Screw 4M4
w
1φ AC200V INPUT
181
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
NOTE
1 Attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft type]) for protection against oil and
w
dust.
2 Reinforce the right and left sides of the panel cut–out in the power magnetics cabinet by using
w
182
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
(f) 300–mm–wide amplifier (when fan adaptor A06B–6078–K003 is installed in PSM–45, SPM–45, PSM–75HV,
and SPM–75HV)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
NOTE
Attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft type]) for protection against oil and
://
dust.
Reinforce the right and left sides of the panel cut hole in the power magnetics cabinet by using
tp
183
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
To allow ventilation, install a duct shown below between the fan adaptor and heatsink. Weld the duct to the
cabinet.
/
om
s.c
Attaching plane
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
184
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
AC200V IN
Applicable wire: 1.25mm2
Applicable crimp terminal: 1.25–4
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
185
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
NOTE
Attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft type]) for protection against oil and
dust.
186
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
NOTE
Attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft type]) for protection against oil and
dust.
187
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
Panel cut
re
pa
cs
Packing (accessory)
Panel cut
.cn
NOTE
w
Attach a packing (acrylonitrile–butadiene rubber, NBR [soft type]) for protection against oil and
dust.
w
w
://
tp
ht
188
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
189
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
MAINTENANCE AREA B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
190
8. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS AND
B–65162E/03 MAINTENANCE AREA
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
172 (Note)
Space for ventilation Space for ventilation Radiator cooling space
w
w
Amplifier Radiator
ht
Mounting
plane
191
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
9 CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
192
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
Terminating
connector
pa
cs
Input
.cn
Servo Servo
Circuit Magnetic AC Regenerative dis- Spindle motor motor
breaker 1 contactor line filter charge unit motor
(required when a
Fan motor
w
PSMR is used)
Servo
motor
Circuit breaker 2
Lightning surge protector
w
w
://
tp
ht
193
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
9.2
CABLE CONNECTION
DETAILS
/
9.2.1
om
Power Supply Module
Connection Diagram
s.c
Power supply module (PSM)
re
pa
Emergency stop contact
cs
Con-
.cn
trol
power
supply
w
Circuit breaker
2
w
Spark
Input killer
w
Coil
://
breaker
1
Cabinet
NOTE
1 Always install the circuit breakers, magnetic contactor, and AC reactor.
2 To protect the equipment from lightning surge voltages, install a lightning surge protector across
each pair of power lines and across each power line and the grounding line at the power inlet
of the power magnetics cabinet. See Appendix A for details.
3 Always connect the control power supply cable to the CX1A. If it is connected to the CX1B,
fuses inside the unit may blow.
4 See Section 5.2.3 for the type of the cable to be used for making a connection to a frame
ground.
5 Using a fan adapter in the SPM–11 requires cable K4 (across the CX1B and CX1A).
194
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
Emergency stop contact
om
s.c
Control
power
supply
re
pa
cs
Spark killer
Input
.cn
Coil
Main pow-
er supply
w
AC reactor
Thermostat Fan motor
Circuit Regenerative
breaker
discharge unit
w
1
Cabinet Circuit
breaker 2 Lightning
surge protector
w
://
NOTE
tp
each pair of power lines and across each power line and the grounding line at the power inlet
of the power magnetics cabinet. See Appendix A for details.
3 Always connect the control power supply cable to the CX1A. If it is connected to the CX1B,
fuses inside the unit may blow.
4 See Section 5.2.3 for the type of the cable to be used for making a connection to a frame
ground.
5 If the PSMR is combined with the SPM–11 (with the fan adapter), the way cables K3 and K4
are connected will vary from that shown in this diagram. See the diagram on the next page.
195
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
Emergency stop contact
om
s.c
Control power supply
re
To load meter/
speedometer
pa
To CNC unit
From
built–in
sensor
Spark killer
cs or
Input pulse
genera-
Coil tor
.cn
Fan
motor
Spindle
Circuit AC line filter Regenerative motor
breaker 1 discharge unit
w
Cabinet Circuit
breaker 2
Lightning surge protector
w
w
://
NOTE
1 Connect cable K3 to the CX1A (LEFT) of the SPM. See 9.2.1–(3).
2 Connect cable K4 across the CX1B (RIGHT) of the SPM and the CX1A of the PSMR. See
tp
9.2.1–(4).
3 Always install the circuit breakers, magnetic contactor, and AC line filter.
4 To protect the equipment from lightning surge voltages, install a lightning surge protector across
ht
each pair of power lines and across each power line and the grounding line at the power inlet
of the power magnetics cabinet. See Appendix A for details.
5 See Section 5.2.3 for the type of the cable to be used for making a connection to a frame
ground.
196
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
Emergency stop contact
Cooling
fan
s.c
Control
power supply
re
Lightning surge protector
pa
cs
Spark killer
Input
.cn
Coil
Main
power
supply
w
Circuit AC reactor
breaker
1
w
Cabinet
Circuit Lightning surge protector
breaker 3
w
://
NOTE
1 Always install the circuit breakers, magnetic contactor, and AC reactor.
2 To protect the equipment from lightning surge voltages, install a lightning surge protector across
tp
each pair of power lines and across each power line and the grounding line at the power inlet
of the power magnetics cabinet. See Appendix A for details.
ht
3 Always connect the control power supply cable to the CX1A. If it is connected to the CX1B,
fuses inside the unit may blow.
4 See Section 5.2.3 for the type of the cable to be used for making a connection to a frame
ground.
5 Using a fan adapter in the SPM–11 requires cable K4 (across the CX1B and CX1A).
6 Provide a means of detecting whether circuit breaker 3 has tripped.
197
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
Emergency stop contact
om
s.c
Control power supply
Circuit breaker 2
re
Lightning surge protector
pa
cs
For test by FANUC
Flange
.cn
Spark killer
Input
w
Coil
w
Main pow-
er supply
w
AC reactor unit
://
Cabinet
Circuit breaker 3
Lightning surge protector
tp
ht
NOTE
1 Always install the magnetic contactor and AC reactor unit.
2 To protect the equipment from lightning surge voltages, install a lightning surge protector across
each pair of power lines and across each power line and the grounding line at the power inlet
of the power magnetics cabinet. See Appendix A for details.
3 Always connect the control power supply cable to the CX1A. If it is connected to the CX1B,
fuses inside the unit may blow.
4 See Section 5.2.3 for the type of the cable to be used for making a connection to a frame
ground.
5 The use of a fan adapter in the SPM–11 requires cable K4 (across the CX1B and CX1A).
6 Provide a means of detecting whether circuit breaker 3 has tripped.
198
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
Control power supply
s.c
Circuit breaker
2–2
Lightning surge protector
Spark killer
re
Coil
Circuit breaker
1–2
pa
AC reactor
cs
Emergency stop contact
.cn
Circuit breaker
w
2–1
Spark killer
w
Coil
Main power supply
://
NOTE
1 Circuit breakers 1 and 2, the magnetic contactors, and the AC reactors cannot be shared. They
must have the rating that matches each power supply module.
2 The lightning surge protector can be shared. Make the wires indicated by the solid line as short
as possible.
199
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(1) Detailed descriptions about the connection of cable K1 (power supply line)
Cable K1 is used to supply main power to the power supply module. Make sure that the cable used between the
power supply and power supply module satisfies the requirements listed in Table 9.2.1.
– Connection with the PSM and PSMR
/
(a) For a power supply voltage of 200 to 230 VAC
om
TB2 PSM
PSMR
L1
Main power R (L1)
s.c
supply L2
AC200V Circuit AC (L2)
S MCC
AC220V breaker 1 reactor
L3
AC230V T (L3)
re
50/60Hz
G
pa
(b) For a power supply voltage that falls outside the range of 200 to
cs230 VAC
.cn
TB2 PSM
PSMR
L1
Main power R (L1)
supply
Power L2
w
50/60Hz
G
w
://
Heavy–duty power
Heat–resistant cable (Note 2)
cable (Note 1)
PSMR–3 3.5 mm2 or larger 3.5 mm2 or larger
ht
M4 (Note 3)
PSMR–5.5 5.5 mm2 or larger 5.5 mm2 or larger
PSM–5.5 5.5 mm2 or larger 5.5 mm2 or larger M4
PSM–11 ––– 8 mm2 or larger M4 (Note 3)
PSM–15 14 mm2 or larger 14 mm2 or larger M6
PSM–26 ––– 22 mm2 or larger M6
PSM–30 ––– 22 mm2 or larger M6
R, S, and T phase lines 38mm2 or larger
PSM–37 ––– M6 (Note 3)
Ground line 22mm2 or larger
R, S, and T phase lines 50mm2 or larger M10
PSM 45
PSM–45 –––
Ground line 22mm2 or larger M6 (Note 3)
200
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
NOTE
1 Four–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312)
2 Fire–retardant polyflex wire (maximum conductor temperature 105°C) or equivalent to LMFC
manufactured by The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.
3 Applicable crimp terminals: 5.5–4S for the PSMR–3 and –5.5
8–4S for the PSM–11
/
38–6S for the PSM–37
om
– Connection with the PSM–HV
s.c
TB2
PSM–HV
re
L1
Main power R (L1)
supply L2
AC400V Circuit AC
pa
S MCC (L2)
AC460V breaker 1 reactor
L3
T (L3)
50/60Hz
cs
G
.cn
NOTE
tp
201
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
TB2 PSMV–
HV
L1
Main power R (L1)
supply
/
AC L2
AC400V reactor (L2)
om
S MCC
AC460V unit
L3
T (L3)
50/60Hz
G
s.c
Table.9.2.1 (c) Cable K1 Specifications
re
Applicable cable
Model Terminal screw
Heavy–duty power cable (Note 1) Heat–resistant cable (Note 2)
pa
PSMV–11HV 14 mm2 or larger 8 mm2 or larger M6
NOTE
cs
1 Four–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312)
2 Fire–retardant polyflex wire (maximum conductor temperature 105_C) or equivalent to LMFC
.cn
manufactured by The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.
Short bar K2 is used to supply the DC link voltage generated in each power supply module to other modules.
w
When designing a short bar for connecting modules placed close to each other, refer to the ”Specifications of short
bars for connecting modules placed close to each other.”
w
To determine the length of a short bar to be used for connecting modules placed separately, refer to ”Location of
terminal board TB1.”
://
Optional short bars are available from FANUC. Refer to the ”FANUC Short Bar Specifications.”
tp
L+ L+
N
L– L–
Terminal screw M6 Terminal screw M6
202
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
– Specifications of short bars for connecting modules placed close to each other
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
/
10 10
om
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Material: Copper
14 8
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Thickness: t
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
s.c
11
MAX15 22
22
Insulating coating
re
Table.9.2.1 (d) Short Bar K2 Specifications
pa
Module location Cross–sec-
Short bar length L Short bar thickness t tion area
Module on the left Module on the right (Note)
cs
Unit of 150mm wide Unit of 150mm wide 124mm 1.5mm 21mm2
Unit of 150mm wide Unit of 90mm wide 85mm 1.5mm 21mm2
.cn
NOTE
Modules need not necessarily be connected with a short bar (copper plate). If you connect
them with a power cable, however, the cable may not be thinner than indicated below and must
tp
203
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
Applicable terminal–to–terminal distance
Module on the left Module on the right Outline drawing
om
(Note)
143 to 151mm 300mm wide PSM 300mm wide SPM Figure 9.2.1 (a)
184.5mm 300mm wide PSM 150mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (b)
141.5 to 145.5mm 300mm wide PSM 90 or 60mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (c)
s.c
307.5mm 300mm wide SPM 150mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (d)
264.5 to 268.5mm 300mm wide SPM 90 or 60mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (e)
re
122.5mm 150mm wide PSM 300mm wide SPM Figure 9.2.1 (f)
pa
NOTE
Place a 300–mm–wide module 20 mm apart from a 150–, 90–, or 60–mm–wide module.
cs
– Cautions on connecting a 150–mm–wide module
.cn
NOTE
The terminal board (TB1) on the 150–mm–wide module has four terminal screws. Tighten all
these screws securely.
w
w
screws securely. curely, even if neither a short as shown below. Design a short
bar nor cable is connected. bar so that four screws can be
://
tightened.
tp
ht
204
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
Short bar 1
/
om
Short bar 2
s.c
300mm wide PSM 300mm wide SPM
re
pa
cs
Short bar 1
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
Short bar 2
Material: C1100 2t
Fig.9.2.1 (a) Short Bar Outline Drawing (for Use Between a 300–mm–Wide PSM and SPM)
Ordering information: A06B–6078–K823
NOTE
If the user prepares a short bar:
– Plate the short bar to protect it against corrosion.
– Insulate the short bar portions indicated by hatching.
– Keep the thickness of the insulation within 1 mm.
205
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Short bar 1
/
Short bar 2
om
s.c
300–mm–wide PSM 150–mm–wide module
re
pa 713
cs
oblong hole
.cn
Short bar 1
w
w
w
713
oblong hole
://
tp
ht
Short bar 2
Material: C1100 2t
Fig.9.2.1 (b) Short Bar Outline Drawing (for Use Between a 300–mm–Wide PSM and 150–mm–Wide
Module) Ordering information: A06B–6078–K826
NOTE
If the user prepares a short bar:
– Plate the short bar to protect it against corrosion.
– Insulate the short bar portions indicated by hatching.
– Keep the thickness of the insulation within 1 mm.
206
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
Short bar 1
/
Short bar 2
om
s.c
300–mm–wide PSM 90– or 60–mm–wide
module
re
pa
717
oblong hole
cs
.cn
Short bar 1
w
w
717
oblong hole
w
://
tp
Short bar 2
ht
Material: C1100 2t
Fig.9.2.1 (c) Short Bar Outline Drawing (for Use Between a 300–mm–Wide PSM and 90– or
60–mm–Wide Module) Ordering information: A06B–6078–K827
NOTE
If the user prepares a short bar:
– Plate the short bar to protect it against corrosion.
– Insulate the short bar portions indicated by hatching.
– Keep the thickness of the insulation within 1 mm.
207
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Short bar 1
/
Short bar 2
om
s.c
300–mm–wide SPM 150–mm–wide module
re
pa 713
cs oblong hole
.cn
Short bar 1
w
w
w
713
oblong hole
://
tp
Short bar 2
ht
Material: C1100 2t
Fig.9.2.1 (d) Short Bar Outline Drawing (for Use Between 300–mm–Wide SPM and 150–mm–Wide
Module) Ordering information: A06B–6078–K828
NOTE
If the user prepares a short bar:
– Plate the short bar to protect it against corrosion.
– Insulate the short bar portions indicated by hatching.
– Keep the thickness of the insulation within 1 mm.
208
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
Short bar 1
/
Short bar 2
om
s.c
300–mm–wide SPM 90– or 60–mm–wide
module
re
pa 717
cs oblong hole
.cn
Short bar 1
w
w
w
717
oblong hole
://
tp
Short bar 2
ht
Material: C1100 2t
Fig.9.2.1 (e) Short Bar Outline Drawing (for Use Between 300–mm–Wide SPM and 90– or 60–mm
Wide Module) Ordering information: A06B–6078–K829
NOTE
If the user prepares a short bar:
– Plate the short bar to protect it against corrosion.
– Insulate the short bar portions indicated by hatching.
– Keep the thickness of the insulation within 1 mm.
209
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Short bar 1
/
Short bar 2
om
s.c
150–mm–wide module 300–mm–wide SPM
re
713
pa
oblong hole
cs
.cn
Short bar 1
w
w
w
713
oblong hole
://
tp
Short bar 2
ht
Material: C1100 2t
Fig.9.2.1 (f) Short Bar Outline Drawing (for Use Between 150–mm–Wide PSM and 300–mm–Wide
SPM) Ordering information: A06B–6078–K830
NOTE
If the user prepares a short bar:
– Plate the short bar to protect it against corrosion.
– Insulate the short bar portions indicated by hatching.
– Keep the thickness of the insulation within 1 mm.
210
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
Fig.9.2.1 (g) Location of Terminal Board TB1 on the 60–, 90–, and 150–mm–Wide Modules
211
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
300–mm–wide PSM Common to 300–mm–wide PSM and SPM
re
pa
cs
.cn
300–mm–wide SPM
w
NOTE
w
4. 300–mm–wide SPM
tp
ht
212
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(1) Specifications of short bars for connecting other than 300mm wide
modules
The short bars listed in Tables 9.2.1 (f) and (i) can be used to install
modules placed 2 mm apart from each another.
/
om
Table.9.2.1 (f) Short Bar Specifications
Symbol Ordering information Dimension of part a Dimension of part b Usable range Thickness
s.c
(B) A06B–6078–K801 90mm 110mm 86 to 94mm
re
(D) A06B–6078–K803 64mm 84mm 60 to 68mm
pa
(F) A06B–6078–K805 102mm 122mm 98 to 106mm
NOTE
cs
Short bars are ordered in pairs.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
Module width
1 150mm
ht
2 90mm
3 60mm
Insulating tube
(heat–shrinkable tube)
INSULATOR
213
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
Symbol Ordering information Module on the left Module on the right Outline drawing
(G) A06B–6078–K823 300mm wide PSM 300mm wide SPM Figure 9.2.1 (a)
(H) A06B–6078–K826 300mm wide PSM 150mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (b)
s.c
(I) A06B–6078–K827 300mm wide PSM 90 or 60 mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (c)
(J) A06B–6078–K828 300mm wide SPM 150mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (d)
re
(K) A06B–6078–K829 300mm wide SPM 90 or 60 mm wide Figure 9.2.1 (e)
(L) A06B–6078–K830 150mm wide PSM 300mm wide SPM Figure 9.2.1 (f)
NOTE
Short bars are ordered in pairs.
pa
cs
.cn
(3) Detailed description of the connection of cable K3
Cable K3 is used to supply control power to the power supply module.
Note that if the PSMR is combined with the SPM–11 (with a fan adapter),
the connection will differ from that explained below.
w
w
CX1A PSM
PSMR
w
(3)
200S
://
350/X
NOTE
Always connect cable K3 to the CX1A. If it is connected to the CX1B, fuses inside the unit may
blow.
214
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
– Cable K3 for combining the PSMR and the SPM–11 (with a fan adapter)
CX1A SPM
–11
(3)
/
200S
om
Control power S (2)
200 VAC, 200R
50/60 Hz single–phase R (1)
350/X
s.c
Cable specification: Two–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312),
conductor size of 1.25 mm2 (50/0.18), PVC sheath 9.6 mm in diameter
Connector specification: AMP connector with receptacle housing 1–178128–3 and
receptacle contact 1–175218–2
re
pa
NOTE
If the PSMR is combined with the SPM–11 (with a fan adapter), the position at which cable K3 is
connected differs from other combinations. See the connection diagram under ”Power supply
cs
module (PSMR); connected with the SPM–11 (with a fan adapter)” in Section 9.2.1 for details.
.cn
(4) Detailed description of the connection of cable K4
Cable K4 is used to supply power to the cooling fan of a module. Use this
cable to connect the power supply module to a spindle amplifier module
w
(3) (3)
200S
(2) (2)
200R
(1) (1)
350/X 350/X
215
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(3) (3)
/
200S
om
(2) (2)
200R
(1) (1)
350/X 350/X
s.c
Cable specification: Two–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable
(JIS C3312), conductor size of 1.25 mm2 (50/0.18),
PVC sheath 9.6 mm in diameter
re
Connector specification: AMP connector with receptacle housing 1–178128–3 and
receptacle contact 1–175218–2
NOTE
pa
If the PSMR is combined with the SPM–11 (with a fan adapter), the position at which to connect
cs
cable K4 differs from the connection for other combinations. See the connection diagram under
”Power supply module (PSMR); connected with the SPM–11 (with a fan adapter)” in Section
9.2.1 for details.
.cn
(3) (3)
0V
(2) (2)
://
+24V
(1) (1)
250/X 250/X
tp
216
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
CX3 PSM
MCC
/
MCCOFF3
(3)
om
Internal
Coil Spark killer (2)
contact
MCCOFF4
~ (1)
s.c
350/Y
External power supply
(must match the coil voltage of the user’s equipment)
Cable specification: Two–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312),
re
conductor size of 1.25 mm2 (50/0.18), PVC sheath 9.6 mm in diameter
Connector specification: AMP connector with receptacle housing 2–178128–3 and
receptacle contact 1–175218–2
pa
Internal–contact specification:
cs
Resistive load Inductive load
Symbol
(cos φ=1) (cosφ=0.4, L/R=7msec)
.cn
Rated load 250VAC, 5A / 30VDC, 5A 250VAC, 2A / 30VDC, 2A
Maximum contact
5A 5A
rating
w
NOTE
w
Coil voltage C R
217
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
+24V
om
(3)
ESP
(2)
s.c
(1)
350/X
re
conductor size of 1.25 mm2 (50/0.18), PVC sheath 9.6 mm in diameter
Connector specification: AMP connector with receptacle housing 1–178128–3 and
receptacle contact 1–175218–2
pa
(8) Detailed description of the connection of cable K8
cs
Cable K8 is used to exchange interface signals between modules.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
218
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
(7) (7)
om
0V
(8) (8)
*CRDY
(9) (9)
0V
s.c
(10) (10)
ALM1
(11) (11)
0V
re
(12) (12)
ALM2
(13) (13)
pa
0V
(14) (14)
ALM4
(15) (15)
cs 0V
(16) (16)
ALM8
.cn
(17) (17)
0V
(18) (18)
CALM
(19) (19)
w
SS
(20) (20)
w
10 0V 20 SS
9 *CRDY 19 CALM
8 0V 18 0V
7 MCCOFF 17 ALM8
6 0V 16 0V
5 IALM 15 ALM4
4 14 0V
3 13 ALM2
2 12 0V
1 11 ALM1
219
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
200S
om
S S0 Fan motor
200T
T T0
s.c
Cable specification: Use a three–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312)
having a conductor size of 2 mm2 or larger.
Fan motor terminal screw: M4
re
Power for cooling fan (for the PSM–45 and PSM–75HV only)
200V, three–phase
pa
200R
R R0
200S
S
cs S0 Fan motor
.cn
220
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(10) Detailed description of the connection of cables K41 (for regenerative discharge resistance),
K42 (for thermostat), and K43 (for fan motor)
/
PSMR Regenerative
om
discharge unit
TB2
K41 RE1 (1)
(RE1) Resistance
(2) of 16Ω
RE2
s.c
(RE2)
Regenerative
discharge resistance
re
K42 TH1 (3)
(TH1)
pa
(4) Thermostat
TH2
(TH2)
cs
b contact
Terminal screw M4 Terminal screw M4
.cn
221
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
PSMR Regenerative
discharge unit
TB2 T3
K41 RE1 (1)
/
(RE1)
om
(2)
RE2
(RE2)
Regenerative
discharge resistance
s.c
K42 TH1 (3)
(TH1)
re
(4) Thermostat
TH2
(TH2)
pa
b–contact
Terminal screw M4
cs
K43 200R (5)
Control power
.cn
200V, single–phase Fan motor
(6)
200S
Terminal screw M4
w
Cable specification K41 : Two–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312),
conductor size of 2.0 mm2 (37/0.26),
w
222
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
PSMV
/
400R (A1)
om
Phase detection signal 400S (A2)
400T (A3)
s.c
350/YY
re
PVC sheath 10.5 mm in diameter
Connector specification: AMP connector with receptacle housing 2–178129–6 and
receptacle contact 1–175218–2
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
223
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
9.2.2 Three different types of interfaces (TYPE A, TYPE B, and FSSB) are
Servo Amplifier Module available for servo amplifier modules. First determine which type of
interface is used in the CNC unit, then select a servo amplifier module that
Connection Diagram matches the interface type.
Model/drawing number TYPE A TYPE B FSSB
/
om
SVM1, SVM2
A06B–6079–H1VV f f
A06B–6079–H2VV
SVM3
f
A06B–6079–H3VV
s.c
SVM3
f
A06B–6080–H3VV
SVM1–HV, SVM2–HV
f f
re
A06B–6085–HVVV
SVM1, SVM2, SVM3
f
A06B–6096–HVVV
pa
SVM1–HV, SVM2–HV
f
A06B–6097–HVVV
cs f : Supported : Not supported
NOTE
.cn
TYPE A interface : S1
TYPE B interface : S2
w
224
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
SVM1–240, SVM1–360
om
(A), (D) (B), (D) –––
A06B–6079–H107, H108
SVM1–240 (two of which are used)
(A), (E) (B), (E)
A06B–6079–H107
SVM2
s.c
(A) (B) –––
A06B–6079–H2VV
SVM3
(A) ––– –––
A06B–6079–H3VV
re
SVM3
––– (B) –––
A06B–6080–H3VV
SVM1–HV
pa
(A) (B) –––
A06B–6085–H1VV
SVM2–HV
(A) (B) –––
A06B–6085–H2VV
cs
SVM1
(excluding the SVM1–240 and –360) ––– ––– (C)
A06B–6096–H1VV
.cn
SVM1–240, SVM1–360
––– ––– (D)
A06B–6096–H107, H108
SVM1–240 (two of which are used)
––– ––– (E)
w
A06B–6096–H107
SVM2
––– ––– (C)
A06B–6096–H2VV
w
SVM3
––– ––– (C)
A06B–6096–H3VV
w
SVM1–HV
––– ––– (C)
A06B–6097–H1VV
://
SVM2–HV
––– ––– (C)
A06B–6097–H2VV
tp
NOTE
Items (A) to (E) are described on the following pages.
ht
225
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
SPM, SVM /
Terminating connector
CNC unit
pa
cs CNC unit
.cn
w
w
CNC unit
w
Cooling fan
://
For the
SVM1–130 only
CNC unit
tp
ht
Circuit
breaker 2
226
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
SPM, SVM /
Terminating connector
re
pa
CNC unit
CNC unit
Battery unit, SVM
cs
.cn
w
w
Cooling fan
w
For the
SVM1–130 only
://
tp
Circuit
breaker 2
ht
227
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
SPM, SVM /
re
Terminating connector
pa
cs
CNC unit, SVM, and
pulse module
.cn
w
Cooling fan
w
For the
w
SVM1–130 only
://
Circuit
tp
breaker 2
ht
228
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
SPM, SVM /
Terminating connector
pa
pulse module
cs
Battery unit, SVM
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
NOTE
Each of the SVM1–240 and SVM1–360 requires one dynamic brake module.
229
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
CNC unit, SVM, and
pulse module
pa
cs
.cn
Pulse coder
Servo
motor
w
w
w
://
Terminating
tp
connector
ht
NOTE
Each SVM may require one PSM depending on the service condition of the motor.
230
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
(3) Detailed description of the connection of cable K8
om
See 9.2.1 (8).
(4) Detailed description of the connection of cable K9
Cable K9 is a terminating connector. Its connection is shown below.
s.c
SVM
SPM
re
JX1B
pa
(5) IALM
(6) 0V
cs Shorted
.cn
10 20
09 19
08 18
w
07 17
06 0V 16
05 IALM 15
w
04 14
03 13
02 12
://
01 11
tp
ht
231
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
SVM SVM
/
SPM SPM
om
PSM
K8 K8
JX1B JX1A JX1B JX1A JX1B K9
s.c
Terminating connector
re
pa
NOTE
1 Alarm signals are sent from the PSM to SVM/SPM units connected in series using cable K8.
Terminating connector K9 must be attached to the K8 cable connector of the SVM/SPM at the
cs
farthest end. If no terminating connector is attached, the magnetic contactor (MCC) outside
these units cannot be turned on, so that the motors can not be driven.
2 Terminating connector K9 is shipped together with the PSM; it does not have to be ordered
.cn
separately. When cabling the units, insert the terminating connector into connector JX1B of
the SVM/SPM at the farthest end.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
232
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
200S
om
S S0 Fan motor
200T
T T0
s.c
Cable specification: Use a three–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312)
having a conductor size of 2 mm2 or larger.
Fan motor terminal screw: M4
re
Power for cooling fan (for the SVM–130 only)
200V, single–phase
pa
200R
R R0
200S
S
cs S0 Fan motor
.cn
Note that the type of the cable K21 connector on the motor side varies with
the motor model.
w
The conductors of cable K21 must be thick enough to carry the rated
current of the corresponding motor. To make the connection waterproof,
://
233
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
SVM Motor
1 U
TB2(UL,UM,UN)
/
2 V
om
TB2(VL,VM,VN)
3 W
TB2(WL,WM,WN)
4
G (Motor body)
s.c
TB2 ( )
(Note)
G (Connector shell)
re
TB2 ( )
pa
Screw M4 Connector used at the cable end:
Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR
α Series Descriptions B–65142E.
Example cable: 0.75 mm2
cs
four–conductor heavy–duty power cable
.cn
NOTE
To satisfy the CE marking requirements, it is necessary to ground the connector shell at the
cable end. In this case, the specification of the connector will be different. Refer to
w
”Requirements for Compliance with the IEC34 Standards” and ”Connectors” in the FANUC AC
SERVO MOTOR α Series Descriptions B–65142E for details.
w
(b) Models α3/3000, α6/2000, α6/3000, αC3/2000, αC6/2000, αM6/3000, αM9/3000, αL6/3000, and αL9/3000
w
://
SVM Motor
A U
TB2(UL,UM,UN)
tp
B V
TB2(VL,VM,VN)
ht
C W
TB2(WL,WM,WN)
D
TB2 ( ) G (Motor body)
TB2 ( )
234
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(c) Models α12/2000, α12/3000, α22/1500, α22/2000, α30/1200, αC12/2000, and αC22/1500
SVM Motor
A U
TB2(UL,UM,UN)
/
B V
om
TB2(VL,VM,VN)
C W
TB2(WL,WM,WN)
D
s.c
TB2 ( ) G (Motor body)
TB2 ( )
re
Screw M4 Connector used at the cable end:
Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR
pa
α Series Descriptions B–65142E.
Example cable: 3.5 mm2
four–conductor heavy–duty power cable
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
235
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(d) Models α22/3000, α30/2000, α30/3000, α40/2000, α40/2000 with fan, αM22/3000, αM30/3000, αM40/3000
(with SVM1–130 used), αM40/3000 with fan (with SVM1–130 in use), αL25/3000, and αL50/2000
SVM Motor
/
A
om
TB2(U)
B U
C
TB2(V)
s.c
D V
E
TB2(W)
re
F W
pa
TB2 ( ) G (Motor body)
TB2 ( )
cs
.cn
Screw M4 Connector used at the cable end:
Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR
α Series Descriptions B–65142E.
NOTE
Applicable crimp terminal: 8–4S
w
://
tp
ht
236
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(e) Models αM40/3000 (with SMV1–240 and –360 used) and αM40/3000 with a fan (with the SVM1–240 and
–360 used)
/
om
M6 A
TB2(U)
U
B
M6 C
s.c
TB2(V)
V
D
re
M6 E
TB2(W)
W
F
TB2 ( )
M5
pa G (Motor body)
cs
TB2 ( ) M5
M5
.cn
Flange ( )
Heat–shrinkable tube
://
Cable A Connector
tp
C
ht
Divide the strands into two groups, and cover each strand group with heat–shrinkable
tube. Also cover the branching portion of the strands with heat–shrinkable tube
237
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Screw
SVM Motor
M6 U
TB2 (U)
/
M6 V
om
TB2 (V)
M6 W
TB2 (W)
M6
s.c
TB2 ( ) G (Motor body)
M5
TB2 ( )
M5
re
Flange ( )
Terminal board:
Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR
pa
α Series Descriptions B–65142E.
238
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
Screw
SVM Motor
M6 U1
TB2(U)
/
om
M6 V1
TB2(V)
M6 W1
TB2(W)
M6
s.c
TB2 ( ) G (Motor body)
M5
TB2 ( )
M5
re
Flange ( )
SVM
Screw
pa
cs
M6 U2
TB2(U)
M6 V2
.cn
TB2(V)
M6 W2
TB2(W)
M6
w
M5
Flange ( ) Terminal board:
w
239
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
SVM Motor
/
U
om
TB2 (U)
V
TB2 (V)
W
TB2 (W)
s.c
TB2 ( ) G (Motor body)
TB2 ( )
re
pa
Screw M4 Connector used at the cable end:
Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR
α Series Descriptions B–65142E.
Example cable: 3.5 mm2
cs
four–conductor heavy–duty power cable
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
240
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
CNC Motor
(12)
om
(16) SD
s.c
(15) *REQ (6)
(1, 2) 0V (1, 2, 3)
re
(3) 0VA (10)
(Note) (Note)
pa
(7) +6VA (14)
cs Shielding (4)
NOTE
w
For the incremental pulse coder, it is not necessary to connect pins 3 and 7 of the connector
on the CNC side to pins 10 and 14 of the connector on the motor side. No problem will result
if they are connected, however. So, a cable for the absolute pulse coder can also be used for
w
241
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
(15) *REQ (6)
om
(4, 5) +5V (8, 15)
(1, 2) 0V (1, 2, 3)
s.c
(6) +6VA (14)
Shielding (4)
re
Connector : Connector used at the cable end:
MR–20LFH (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α Series
pa
Descriptions B–65142E.
cs
NOTE
Cables used in common for (a) and (b) : +5V, 0V...0.5 mm2 or larger2
.cn
(for length of 14 m or less)
: +6VA, 0VA...0.5 mm2 or larger
: SD, *SD, REQ, *REQ...twisted pair 0.18 mm2
or larger
w
If the cable is 14 m or longer, keep the electrical resistance across each of the 0V and +5V lines
to within 0.5Ω .
w
w
://
tp
ht
242
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(b) Models α3/3000 to α40/2000, α65/2000 to α150/2000, αC3/3000 to αC22/1500, αM6/3000 to αM40/3000,
and αL6/3000 to αL50/2000
/
om
(17) *SD (D)
s.c
(4, 5, 6) +5V (J, K)
(1, 2) 0V (N, T)
re
(Note) (Note)
(7) +6VA (R)
pa
Shielding (H)
|
NOTE
For the incremental pulse coder, it is not necessary to connect pins 3 and 7 of the connector
w
on the CNC side to pins R and S of the connector on the motor side. No problem will result if
they are connected, however. So, a cable for the absolute pulse coder can also be used for
the incremental pulse coder.
w
w
://
tp
ht
243
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
(15) *REQ (G)
om
(4, 5) +5V (J, K)
(1, 2) 0V (N, T)
s.c
(6) +6VA (R)
Shielding (H)
re
Connector : Connector used at the cable end:
MR–20LFH (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α Series
pa
Descriptions B–65142E.
cs
NOTE
Cables used in common for (a) and (b) : +5V, 0V...0.5 mm2 or larger2
.cn
(for length of 14 m or less)
: +6VA, 0VA...0.5 mm2 or larger
: SD, *SD, REQ, *REQ...twisted pair 0.18 mm2
or larger
w
If the cable is 14 m or longer, keep the electrical resistance across each of the 0V and +5V lines
to within 0.5Ω .
w
w
://
tp
ht
244
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
TYPE A interface
CNC Motor
(1) SD (12)
/
om
(2) *SD (13)
s.c
(9, 18, 20) +5V (8, 15)
re
(16) 0VA (10)
(Note) (Note)
(7) +6VA (14)
pa
Shielding (4)
Connector : FI40–2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) Connector used at the cable end:
Case : FI–20–CV (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
cs Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α Series
Descriptions B–65142E.
.cn
NOTE
For the incremental pulse coder, it is not necessary to connect pins 7 and 16 of the connector
on the CNC side to pins 10 and 14 of the connector on the motor side. No problem will result
w
if they are connected, however. So, a cable for the absolute pulse coder can also be used for
the incremental pulse coder.
w
w
://
tp
ht
245
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(b) Models α3/3000 to α40/2000, α65/2000 to α150/2000, α300/1200 to α400/1200, αC3/3000 to αC22/1500,
αM6/3000 to αM40/3000, and αL6/3000 to αL50/2000
CNC Motor
(1) SD (A)
/
(2) *SD (D)
om
(5) REQ (F)
s.c
(9, 18, 20) +5V (J, K)
re
(Note) (Note)
(7) +6VA (R)
Shielding (H)
NOTE
For the incremental pulse coder, it is not necessary to connect pins 7 and 16 of the connector
on the CNC side to pins R and S of the connector on the motor side. No problem will result if
w
they are connected, however. So, a cable for the absolute pulse coder can also be used for
the incremental pulse coder.
w
w
NOTE
Cables used in common for (a) and (b) : +5V, 0V...0.5 mm2 or larger2
://
or larger
If the cable is 14 m or longer, keep the electrical resistance across each of the 0V and +5V lines
ht
to within 0.5Ω .
246
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
SVM Motor
(1) SD (12)
/
om
(2) *SD (13)
s.c
(9, 18, 20) +5V (8, 15)
re
(16) 0VA (10)
(Note) (Note)
(7) +6VA (14)
pa
Shielding (4)
Connector : FI40–2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) Connector used at the cable end:
Case : FI–20–CV (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
cs Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α Series
Descriptions B–65142E.
.cn
NOTE
For the incremental pulse coder, it is not necessary to connect pins 7 and 16 of the connector
on the CNC side to pins 10 and 14 of the connector on the motor side. No problem will result
w
if they are connected, however. So, a cable for the absolute pulse coder can also be used for
the incremental pulse coder.
w
w
://
tp
ht
247
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(b) Models α3/3000 to α40/2000, α65/2000 to α150/2000, α300/1200 to α400/1200, αC3/2000 to αC22/1500,
αM6/3000 to αM40/3000, and αL6/3000 to αL50/2000
SVM Motor
(1) SD (A)
/
(2) *SD (D)
om
(5) REQ (F)
s.c
(9, 18, 20) +5V (J, K)
re
(Note) (Note)
(7) +6VA (R)
Shielding (H)
NOTE
For the incremental pulse coder, it is not necessary to connect pins 7 and 16 of the connector
on the CNC side to pins R and S of the connector on the motor side. No problem will result if
w
they are connected, however. So, a cable for the absolute pulse coder can also be used for
the incremental pulse coder.
w
w
NOTE
Cables used in common for (a) and (b) : +5V, 0V...0.5 mm2 or larger2
://
or larger
If the cable is 14 m or longer, keep the electrical resistance across each of the 0V and +5V lines
ht
to within 0.5Ω.
248
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
CNC SVM
s.c
(4) COMA (4)
re
(6) COMB (6)
pa
(8) COMC (8)
(1) IR (1)
w
(11) IS (11)
w
NOTE
Use inner conductors as pairs (1–2 and 11–12) for current feedback signals (IR and IS) to avoid
any external influence. Connector pins 9 and 19 are not used on either the CNC or SVM.
249
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
CNC SVM
/
om
(1) *PWMA (*ALM1) (3)
s.c
(3) *PWMB (*ALM2) (5)
re
(6) COMC (8)
pa
(15) COMD (14)
*PWMF (17)
.cn
(18)
(19) COMF (18)
(8) IR (1)
w
(10) IS (11)
w
Connector name
JV1B : L axis (first axis)
JV2B : M axis (second axis)
JV3B : N axis (third axis)
NOTE
The wire (GND) connected to pin 13 of the connector on the CNC is paired with the *MCON
signal wire. This wire is not grounded on the SVM side.
Use inner conductors as pairs (1–2 and 11–12) for current feedback signals (IR and IS) to avoid
any external influence.
250
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
CNC SVM
/
om
(3) *PWMA (*ALM1) (3)
(4) 0V (4)
s.c
(6) 0V (6)
re
(8) 0V (8)
pa
(14) 0V (14)
(1) IR (1)
cs
(2) GDR (2)
(11) IS (11)
.cn
(19) 0V (19)
w
(20) 0V (20)
(15) PD (15)
w
NOTE
Use inner conductors as pairs (1–2 and 11–12) for current feedback signals (IR and IS) to avoid
any external influence.
251
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
a–contact
s.c
Cable: Two–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312),
1.25 mm2 (50/0.18), PVC sheath 9.6 mm in diameter
Connector: AMP connector with receptacle housing 1–178128–3 and
re
receptacle contact 1–178128–2
Crimp terminal: 2–4
pa
(10) Detailed description of the connection of cable K25
cs
Dynamic brake module
.cn
w
Coil
w
252
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
Cable: Fire–retardant polyflex wire (maximum conductor temperature 105°C) or
equivalent to LMFC manufactured by The Furukawa Electric Co.,
Ltd., 5.5 mm2 or larger
pa
Crimp terminal: 5.5–5
Crimp terminal: 5.5–6 cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
253
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
Refer to the applicable CNC connection manual for detailed
specifications of the optical fiber cable.
s.c
CNC unit
re
pa
cs
.cn
Protective cap
(1) Connection between two SVM units or between the SVM and pulse
w
A66L–6001–0023#L150R0 15cm
A66L–6001–0023#L300R0 30cm
w
(2) Connection between the CNC and SVM or between the CNC and
://
A66L–6001–0026#L1R003 1m
A66L–6001–0026#L5R003 5m
ht
A66L–6001–0026#L7R003 7m
A66L–6001–0026#L10R003 10m
A66L–6001–0026#L20R003 20m
A66L–6001–0026#L30R003 30m
A66L–6001–0026#L50R003 50m
254
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
Manufacturer’s Product
Drawing number Manufacturer Quantity
om
model code name
Japan Aviation IL–L2S–S3L–B(N) Housing 1
A06B–6093–K303 Electronics
Industry, Ltd. IL–C2–1–00001 Contact 2
s.c
A special crimping tool is necessary to attach contacts to a cable. It should
be ordered from the manufacturer (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry,
Ltd.) separately.
re
(1) Connection between the battery unit and SVM
pa
Two 0.3 mm2 shielded wires Connector
Terminal 1, white, crimp terminal 1.25–4 White 1 1 White
Terminal 2, black, crimp terminal 1.25–4 Black 2
cs 2 Black
Housing IL–L2S–S3L–B(N)
.cn
Contact IL–C2–1–00001
255
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
9.2.3
Spindle Amplifier
Module Connection
Diagram
/
Spindle amplifier module (SPM)
om
s.c
re
(Note1)
pa
cs
To external equipment that
uses position coder signal
.cn
SVM, SPM
(terminating connector)
Load meter, speedometer,
analog override
w
(Note 2)
w
w
://
fan
M sensor (pulse generator)
Spindle
ht
motor
Circuit breaker 2
Fan motor
(Note 1)
(Note 2) Optical IO link adapter
Opti
cal cable
The connector to be used varies according to the type of the detector being
used. The interfaces for individual detectors are explained separately
later.
See Section 5.2.3 for information about the cable used for the connection
to a frame ground.
256
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
(Note1)
re
pa
cs (terminating connector)
(Note 2)
.cn
Cooling
w
fan
For the
SPMC11 only
://
Thermostat
tp
Circuit Spindle
breaker 2 motor
ht
Fan motor
NOTE
1 SPMC15–26
2 Note that the SPMC is not provided with the JA7A (the second spindle connection function).
The connector to be used varies according to the type of the detector being
used. The interfaces for individual detectors are explained separately
later.
257
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
(3) Detailed description of the connection of cable K5
om
See 9.2.1 (5).
(4) Detailed description of the connection of cable K8
See 9.2.1 (8).
s.c
(5) Detailed description of the connection of cable K9
See 9.2.2 (4).
re
(6) Detailed description of the connection of cable K10 (power line)
pa
SPM TB2
U
(U)
cs (U)
V
(V) (V)
.cn
Spindle
W motor
(W) (W)
G
( ) (G)
w
( )
w
w
://
tp
ht
258
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
Cables should be connected to the SPM and spindle motor using crimp
terminals that match the motor, as listed in the following table.
Cable K10 (power line) specification
Motor model Applicable cable Terminal screw
/
series er cable (Note 1) cable (Note 2) er side side
om
α0.5 ––– ––– 0.75mm2 or larger ––– M4 (Note 3)
–––
s.c
α1.5, α2 ––– ––– αC1.5, αC2 3.5mm2 or larger 3.5mm2 or larger M4 M5
re
––– ––– 3.5mm2 or larger M4 M5
pa
α12 αP18 ––– αC12 14mm2 or larger 8mm2 or larger M6 M5
αP40, αP50,
α22 ––– αC22 ––– 22mm2 or larger M6 M8
αP60
.cn
α6HV, α8HV,
––– ––– ––– ––– 3.5mm2 or larger M6 M5
α12HV
w
α15HV,
––– ––– ––– ––– 5.5mm2 or larger M6 M5
α18HV
w
NOTE
ht
259
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
200S
om
S S0 Fan motor
200T
T T0
s.c
Cable specification: Use a three–conductor polyvinyl heavy–duty power cable (JIS C3312)
having a conductor size of 2 mm2 or larger.
re
Power for cooling fan (for the SPMC11 only)
pa
200V, single–phase
200R
R R0
cs
200S
S S0 Fan motor
.cn
Power for cooling fan (for the SPM45 and SPM–75HV only)
200V, single–phase
w
200R
R R0
://
200S
S S0 Fan motor
tp
ht
260
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
*SOUT *SIN1
(4) (2) *SIN1
om
SIN SOUT1
(1) (3) SOUT1
*SIN *SOUT1
(2) (4) *SOUT1
(11), (12), (13) 0V 0V
s.c
(11), (12), (13)
(14), (15), (16) (14), (15), (16)
F F
Required connector Required connector
(HONDA) Ground plate Ground plate (HONDA)
re
Connector PCR–E20FA (Note 1) (Note 1) Connector PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA Housing PCR–V20LA
pa
Cable specification: 0.09 mm2 twisted pair with common shielded
Recommended cable (wire only): A66L–0001–0284#10P
See Appendix C for details.
cs
NOTE
.cn
1 If cable K12 is installed near the likes of a power cable, its shielding wire must be connected
to a grounding plate. If an SPM is installed near the CNC or another SPM, however, it is not
necessary to connect the shielding wire to a grounding plate.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
261
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
10 20 (+5V) Note 2
9 (+5V) Note 2 19
8 18 (+5V) Note 2
7 17
6 16 0V
/
5 15 0V
om
4 *SOUT1 14 0V
3 SOUT1 13 0V
2 *SIN1 12 0V
1 SIN1 11 0V
s.c
Pin arrangement of the connector on the CNC unit and connector JA7A
re
10 20 (+5V) Note 2
9 (+5V) Note 2 19
pa
8 18 (+5V) Note 2
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
cs
4 *SOUT 14 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V
.cn
1 SIN 11 0V
w
NOTE
w
2 The +5V pin is intended for optical link transmission based on the optical I/O link adapter. Do
not use it when a metal cable is being used; otherwise, the +5 V line of the CNC will be
short–circuited with that of the SPM.
w
S When the cable must be extended across multiple cabinets, and the cabinets cannot be
connected with a grounding wire 5.5 mm2 or larger.
ht
S The cable may be affected by noise, for example, if the cable is laid near a strong magnetic
noise source like a welding machine or in parallel with a power line over a long distance.
262
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
SPM SPM
JA7B JA7A JA7B JA7A
CNC
/
JA7A
K12 K12
om
JA7B
s.c
Cable K12 cannot be used to make a reverse connection (from the SPMC to the SPM).
re
SPM SPM
JA7B JA7A JA7B
CNC
pa
JA7A
JA7B K12 K12
cs
– Electrical interface connection between four SPM units in i series
.cn
Refer to the applicable CNC connection manual or technical report A–73123–014JA for a detailed description
of the serial spindle connector panel.
w
SPM SPM
w
JA41
K12 K12
JA7A–1
://
JA48 Serial
spindle con-
nector panel SPM SPM
JA7A–2
tp
K12 K12
ht
263
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
(4) (1) *SIN
om
SIN SOUT
(1) (4) SOUT
*SIN *SOUT
(2) (3) *SOUT
+5V +5V
(9), (18), (20) (9), (18), (20)
s.c
(11), (12), (13) 0V 0V (11), (12), (13)
(14), (15), (16) (14), (15), (16)
F
Required connector Grounding plate Required connector
re
(HONDA) (HONDA)
Connector PCR–E20FA Connector PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA Housing PCR–V20LA
pa
Cable specification: 0.09 mm2 twisted pair with common shielded
Recommended cable (wire only): A66L–0001–0284#10P
See Appendix C for details.
cs
Pin assignment for connector JA7A
.cn
10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 18 +5V
w
7 17
6 16 0V
w
5 15 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V
w
2 *SIN 12 0V
1 SIN 11 0V
://
Pin arrangement of the connector on the optical I/O link adapter side
tp
10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
ht
8 18 +5V
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
4 SOUT 14 0V
3 *SOUT 13 0V
2 SIN 12 0V
1 *SIN 11 0V
264
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
COP5
om
Optical K13
cable
s.c
– Connection in which the required cable length is 20 m or more and in which an optical fiber cable is used
re
I/O link adapter I/O link adapter SPM
JD1 COP1 COP1 JD1 JA7B JA7A
CNC A13B–0154–B001 A13B–0154–B001
pa
JA7A
K13 Optical K13
JA7B cable
cs
The specification drawing number of the optical fiber cable shown
above is as follows:
.cn
A66L–6001–0009#LjjR003
(jj represents a cable length, such as 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50,
60, 80, 90, or 100 m.)
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
265
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
(6) (B2)
om
PB PB
(7) (A3)
RB RB
(8) (B3)
s.c
+5V +5V
* (9), (18), (20) (A1)
0V 0V
* (12), (14), (16) (B5)
re
OH1 OH1
(13) (A6)
OH2 OH2
pa
(15) (B6)
SS SS
(10) F F (A5)
cs
Required connector Required connector (AMP)
Connector FI40B–20S Connector housing 178289–6
FI40B–20S–CV5
.cn
Housing FI–20–CV5 Contact 1–175217–2
NOTE
Connect pin 16 to a 0 V potential; otherwise, a sensor may be damaged if the cable is attached
://
266
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
10 SS 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 RB 18 +5V
7 PB 17
6 RA 16 0V
5 PA 15 OH2
/
4 14 0V
om
3 13 OH1
2 12 0V
1 11
s.c
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
RB
re
RA 0V OH2
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
pa
+5V PA PB SS OH1
cs
(11) Detailed description of connection of cable K14 (for spindle motor α0.5)
.cn
SPM JY2 M sensor Motor
(pulse generator)
PA PA
(5) (05)
RA RA
w
(6) (20)
PB PB
(09)
w
(7)
RB RB
(8) (08)
w
+5V +5V
* (9), (18), (20) (23)
0V 0V
://
OH2 OH2
(15) (03)
ht
SS
(10) F F
Required connector (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) Required connector (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Connector FI40B–20S Connector HDBB–25S
FI40B–20S–CV5 Contactor cover GDBW–25–CV
Housing FI–20–CV5
267
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
NOTE
Connect pin 16 to a 0 V potential; otherwise, a sensor may be damaged if the cable is attached
to connector JY3 and power is supplied.
/
10 20 +5V
om
SS
9 +5V 19
8 RB 18 +5V
7 PB 17
6 RA 16 0V
5 15
s.c
PA OH2
4 14 0V
3 13 OH1
2 12 0V
1 11
re
Pin arrangement of the connector on the motor side
pa
01
14
02
cs
15
03 OH2
16 0V
.cn
04
17
05 PA
18
06
w
19
07
20 RA
w
08 RB
21
w
09 PB
22
10
://
23 +5V
11
24
tp
12
25
13 OH1
ht
268
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
OVR1
om
Can be overridden in 1 %
(1)
steps, using the variable
OVR2 VR resistor (Note 1).
(2)
0V R1
(20)
s.c
LM
(16)
0M Load meter
re
(18)
SM
(17)
pa
Speedometer
0M
(19) cs
Required connector (HONDA) Required connector (HONDA)
Connector PCR–E20FS Connector PCR–E20FA
.cn
Housing PCR–V20LA Housing PCR–V20LA
(solder type)
Cable specification: 0.09mm2 common shielded cable
Recommended cable (wire only): A66L–0001–0284#10P
w
10 20 0V
9 *(Note 2) 19 0M
://
8 18 0M
7 * 17 SM
6 16 LM
tp
5 * 15 *
4 14 *
3 13
2 OVR2 *
ht
12
1 OVR1 11 *
NOTE
1 Select such an external resistance such that VR + R1 falls within the range between 2 kΩ and
10 kΩ .
2 Pins indicated * are intended to input or output signals used on a spindle check board. Do not
connect any other signal line to them.
269
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(a) Use for position coder signals (equivalent to the output of line
driver 75113)
/
magnetics cabinet
om
PA
(5)
*PA
(6)
PB
s.c
(7)
*PB
(8)
SC
re
(1)
*SC
(2)
pa
0V
(12), (14), (16)
cs F
Required connector (HONDA)
Grounding plate
Connector PCR–E20FA
.cn
Housing PCR–V20LA
10 20
w
9 19
8 *PB 18
7 PB 17
://
6 *PA 16 0V
5 PA 15
4 14 0V
3
tp
13
2 *SC 12 0V
1 SC 11
ht
270
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
SPM–2.2 to 11 (TYPE 2) ––– ––– A06B–6078–H3**#H500 JX4
om
SPM–15 to 30 (TYPE 2) A06B–6078–H3**#H500 JY9 A06B–6088–H3**#H500 JX4
s.c
Usually, position coder signals are sent serially. So, K36 need not be
connected.
K36 is used for position coder signals in a unit (for example, PMC or
speed difference control unit) other than the CNC.
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
271
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
OVR2 VR steps, using the variable
om
(2) resistor (Note 1)
0V R1
(20)
SM
s.c
(17)
0M
(19)
re
Cable specification: 0.09 mm2 Required connector (HONDA)
pa
common shielded cabl Connector PCR–E20FA
Recommended cable Housing PCR–V20LA
specification :
A66L–0001–0284#10P
cs
OH1 A6
(6)
Motor
.cn
TH
OH2 B6 thermostat
(8)
w
Grounding plate
Required connector Cable specification: 0.18 mm2 Required connector (AMP):
(HIROSE) common shielded cable Supplied with the module
w
10 20 0V
9 * (Note 2) 19 0M
tp
8 OH2 18 0M
7 * 17 SM
6 OH1 16
ht
5 * 15 *
4 14 *
3 13
2 OVR2 12 *
1 OVR1 11 *
NOTE
1 Select an external resistance such that VR + R1 falls within the range between 2kΩ and 10kΩ.
2 Pins indicated * are intended to input or output signals used on a spindle check board. Do not
connect any other signal line to them.
272
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
OH2
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
/
OH1
om
(15) Combined use of the M sensor (pulse generator) and magnetic sensor
s.c
SPM M sensor (pulse generator)
TYPE I
K14
JY2
re
Spindle motor
JY3
pa
Spindle
K15 Magnetic sensor amplifier
cs
Magnetic sensor
.cn
amplifier
(5) MSA (A)
MSB
w
(14) (D)
LSA
(1) (F)
w
LSB
(3) (E)
+15V
(C)
://
(12)
0V
* (7), (16) (B)
SS
(10)
tp
Housing FI–20–CV
NOTE
Use the supplied rubber sleeve to eliminate any gap between the cable and connector.
273
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
10 SS 20
9 19
8 18 (EXTSC)
7 0V 17
6 16 0V
5 MSA 15
/
4 14 MSB
om
3 LSB 13 (PU/PD)
2 12 +15V
1 LSA 11 (+24V)
s.c
NOTE
Pin 11 of connector JY3 outputs +24 V. If a sensor is connected to it, the sensor may be
damaged. Before supplying power, make sure that the sensor is not connected to +24 V.
re
pa
Pin arrangement of the metal receptacle
A MSA B 0V C +15V
cs
D MSB E LSB F LSA
G
.cn
(16) Combined use of the M sensor (pulse generator) and position coder
w
TYPE I
K14
w
JY2
Spindle motor
://
JY4
K16
Spindle
tp
Position coder
ht
274
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
PAE PA
(5) (A)
*PAE *PA
/
(6) (N)
om
PBE PB
(7) (C)
*PBE *PB
(8) (R)
s.c
PSE PZ
(1) (B)
*PSE *PZ
(2) (P)
re
5V +5V
* (9), (18), (20) (H)
0V 0V
pa
* (12), (14), (16) (K)
10 20 5V
w
9 5V 19
8 *PBE 18 5V
7 17
://
PBE
6 *PAE 16 0V
5 PAE 15
4 14 0V
tp
3 13
2 *PSE 12 0V
1 PSE 11
ht
A PA B PZ C PB
D E F
G H +5V J
K 0V L M
S T
275
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Example 1)
SPM MZ sensor (built–in sensor)
TYPE 1
K17
JY2
/
Spindle
om
motor
Spindle
Example 2)
s.c
SPM BZ sensor (built–in sensor)
TYPE 1
K17 Built–in
JY2
Spindle
re
spindle
motor
pa
cs
Detailed descriptions of the connection of cable K17 (for motor incorporating an MZ sensor)
PB VB
(7) (A3)
*PB *VB
(8) (B3)
w
MZ VZ
(1) (A4)
*MZ *VZ
w
(2) (B4)
+5V +5V
* (9), (18), (20) (A1)
://
0V 0V
* (12), (14), (16) (B5)
OH1 OH1
(13) (A6)
tp
OH2 OH2
(15) (B6)
SS SS
F F
ht
(10) (A5)
Cable: +5V, 0V...0.5 mm2 (if any pin indicated * is to be used, use pin 16 so that the
sensor can be protected against burn–out resulting from incorrect connection.)
PA, *PA, PB, *PB, MZ, *MZ, OH1, OH2...0.18 mm2 twisted pair
276
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
10 SS 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 *PB 18 +5V
7 PB 17
6 *PA 16 0V
/
5 PA 15 OH2
om
4 14 0V
3 13 OH1
2 *MZ 12 0V
1 MZ 11
s.c
Pin arrangement of the AMP connector on the MZ sensor (built–in sensor) side
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
re
*VA *VB *VZ 0V OH2
pa
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
+5V VA VB VZ SS OH1
cs
NOTE
If the sensor is connected to other connector, it may be damaged when the power is supplied.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
277
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Detailed description of the connection of cable K17 (connection of a built–in motor) without using an
AMP connector
SPM JY2 Motor
If no AMP connector
PA VA
(5) (5) is used
*PA *VA
(6) (2)
/
PB VB
(7) (6) CN1
om
*PB *VB
(8) (3)
*MZ *VZ
(2) (1)
MZ VZ
s.c
(1) (2)
+5V +5V
* (9), (18), (20) (4), (1)
0V 0V CN2
* (12), (14), (16) (6), (3)
re
SS
F F (5)
F
OH1 OH1
pa
(13)
OH2 OH2 Thermostat
(15)
SS
cs
(10)
F F
Required connector (HIROSE) Cable specification: (HONDA)
.cn
Connector FI40B–20S Connector Z–374
FI40B–20S–CV5
Housing FI–20–CV5 Contact HKP–F413
Cable specification : Four 0.18mm2 twisted pairs Common shielded cable
Two 0.5mm2 wires (Note)
w
Cables used : +5V, 0V…0.18mm2 (for any one of the three pins indicated with *)
PA, *PA, PB, *PB, MZ, *MZ, OH1, OH2…0.18mm2 twisted pair
w
278
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
10 SS 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 *PB 18 +5V
7 PB 17
6 *PA 16 0V
/
5 PA 15 OH2
om
4 14 0V
3 13 OH1
2 *MZ 12 0V
1 MZ 11
s.c
Connector CN1 Connector CN2
1 *MZ 4 1 (5V) 4 5V
re
2 *VA 5 VA 2 VZ 5 SS
3 6 3 (0V) 6 0V
pa
*VB VB
cs
NOTE
If the sensor is connected to other connector, it may be damaged when the power is supplied.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
279
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Detailed description of the connection of cable K17 (connection of spindle motor α0.5)
/
(6) (08)
om
PB VB
(7) (07)
*PB *VB
(8) (06)
s.c
MZ VZ
(1) (05)
*MZ *VZ
(2) (20)
re
+5V +5V
* (9), (18), (20) (12), (25) *
0V 0V
pa
* (12), (14), (16) (03), (16) *
OH1 OH1
(13) (01)
OH2
cs OH2
(15) (11)
SS
F F
.cn
(10)
Cable: +5V, 0V...0.5 mm2 (if pins indicated by * are to be used, use pins 16, 14, and 12 in the
stated order so that the sensor is protected against burn–out resulting from incorrect connection.
://
10 SS 20 +5V
ht
9 +5V 19
8 *PB 18 +5V
7 PB 17
6 *PA 16 0V
5 PA 15 OH2
4 14 0V
3 13 OH1
2 *MZ 12 0V
1 MZ 11
280
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
01 OH1
14
02
15
03 0V
/
16 0V
om
04
17
05 VZ
18
06 *VB
19
s.c
07 VB
20 *VZ
08 *VA
21
re
09 VA
22
10
pa
23
11 OH2
24
cs 12 +5V
25 +5V
13
.cn
NOTE
If the sensor is connected to other connector, it may be damaged when the power is supplied.
w
w
(18) Combined use of the M sensor (pulse generator) and BZ sensor (separate built–in sensor)
w
SPM
M sensor (pulse generator)
://
TYPE 2
JY2
tp
Spindle motor
K14
JY5
ht
K17
(Note)
BZ sensor Spindle
(built–in sensor)
If the BZ sensor is to be wired as shown above, such that it uses only the position coder signal, a different connec-
tor is required. No change is made to the specification of cables K14 or K17.
NOTE
If the BZ sensor is to be wired as shown above, such that it uses only the position coder signal,
neither OH1 or OH2 of cable K17 need be connected.
281
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
Built–in spindle
Spindle
motor
JY5
s.c
Preamplifier
K18
re
Example 2) Motor incorporating magnetic pulse coder
pa
SPM High–resolution magnetic pulse coder Motor–to–spindle gear ratio = 1:1
TYPE 2 cs Rigid linkage shall be maintained.
Spindle motor
.cn
JY5
Preamplifier Spindle
K18
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
282
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
(4)
om
B1 B1
(17) (18)
RB1 RB1
(19) (19)
MZ Z
(1) (14)
s.c
*MZ *Z
(2) (15)
A3 A3
(5) (10)
re
RA3 RA3
(6) (11)
B3 B3
pa
(7) (12)
RB3 RB3
(8) (13)
+5V
cs +5V
(9), (18), (20) (4), (5), (6)
0V 0V
(12), (14), (16) (1), (2), (3)
.cn
OH1 OH1
(13) (8)
OH2 OH2
(15) (9)
w
SS SS
(10) F F (7)
w
PA, *PA, PB, *PB, MZ, *MZ, VA2, *VA2, VB2, *VB2, OH1, OH2...0.18 mm2 twisted pair
283
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
10 SS 20 +5V
9 +5V 19 RB1
8 RB3 18 +5V
7 B3 17 B1
6 RA3 16 0V
5 A3 15 OH2
/
4 RA1 14 0V
om
3 A1 13 OH1
2 *Z 12 0V
1 Z 11
s.c
Pin arrangement of connector for the high–resolution magnetic pulse coder preamplifier
1 0V 2 0V 3 0V 4 +5V
re
5 +5V 6 +5V 7 G 8 OH1
9 OH2 10 A3 11 RA3 12 B3
pa
13 RB3 14 cs Z 15 *Z 16 A1
17 RA1 18 B1 19 RB1 20
(20) Use of high–resolution magnetic pulse coders (for the spindle and motor separately)
.cn
SPM
High–resolution magnetic pulse coder
w
TYPE 2
w
JY2
Spindle motor
Preamplifier
w
K18
JY5
K19
://
Preamplifier Spindle
tp
NOTE
If one high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is used for the spindle and another for the motor,
cable K18 must be attached to connector JY2.
284
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
(4)
om
VB2 B1
(17) (18)
*VB2 RB1
(19) (19)
MZ Z
(1) (14)
s.c
*MZ *Z
(2) (15)
PA A3
(5) (10)
re
*PA RA3
(6) (11)
PB B3
pa
(7) (12)
*PB RB3
(8) (13)
+5V
cs +5V
(9), (18), (20) (4), (5), (6)
0V 0V
(12), (14), (16) (1), (2), (3)
.cn
OH1 OH1
(13) (8)
OH2 OH2
(15) (9)
w
SS SS
(10) F F (7)
w
PA, *PA, PB, *PB, MZ, *MZ, VA2, *VA2, VB2, *VB2, OH1, OH2...0.18 mm2 twisted pair
285
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
B1 B1
(17) (18)
om
RB1 RB1
(19) (19)
Z Z
(1) (14)
*Z *Z
s.c
(2) (15)
A3 A3
(5) (10)
RA3 RA3
(6) (11)
re
B3 B3
(7) (12)
RB3 RB3
(8)
pa
(13)
+5V +5V
(9), (18), (20) (4), (5), (6)
0V 0V
(1), (2), (3)
(12), (14), (16)
cs
SS SS
(10) F F (7)
.cn
(NOTE) In addition to the soldering type, a crimping type can also be selected.
Crimping type Crimp pin : HR22–SC–122
(20 pins are required for each connector.)
tp
Crimping type connectors require the use of the following crimping tool:
Crimping tool specification: HR22–TA–2428HC (HIROSE)
286
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
10 SS 20 +5V
9 +5V 19 *VB2
8 *PB 18 +5V
7 PB 17 VB2
6 *PA 16 0V
5 PA 15 OH2
/
4 *VA2 14 0V
om
3 VA2 13 OH1
2 *MZ 12 0V
1 MZ 11
s.c
Pin arrangement of the connector for the high–resolution magnetic pulse coder preamplifier (on the motor side)
1 0V 2 0V 3 0V 4 +5V
re
5 +5V 6 +5V 7 G 8 OH1
pa
9 OH2 10 A3 11 RA3 12 B3
13 RB3 14 Z 15 *Z 16 A1
cs
17 RA1 18 B1 19 RB1 20
.cn
10 SS 20 +5V
w
9 +5V 19 RB1
8 RB3 18 +5V
7 B3 17 B1
w
6 RA3 16 0V
5 A3 15
4 RA1 14 0V
w
3 A1 13
2 *Z 12 0V
1 Z 11
://
tp
Pin arrangement of the connector for the high–resolution magnetic pulse coder preamplifier (on the spindle side)
ht
1 0V 2 0V 3 0V 4 +5V
5 +5V 6 +5V 7 G 8
9 10 A3 11 RA3 12 B3
13 RB3 14 Z 15 *Z 16 A1
17 RA1 18 B1 19 RB1 20
287
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(21) Combined use of the high–resolution magnetic pulse coder incorporated into the motor and the
high–resolution position coder
/
JY2
om
Spindle motor
Preamplifier
K18
JY4
K31 Spindle
s.c
High–resolution position coder
re
Detailed description of the connection of cable K31
pa
SPM JY4
cs
High–resolution
PAE PAE position coder
(5) (M)
.cn
*PAE *PAE
(6) (L)
PBE PBE
(7) (P)
*PBE *PBE
(8) (C)
w
PSE PSE
(1) (F)
*PSE *PSE
w
(2) (G)
AP AP
(3) (A)
w
XAP XAP
(4) (D)
BP BP
(17) (B)
://
XBP XBP
(19) (E)
+5V +5V
tp
SS SS
(10) F F (H)
288
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
10 SS 20 +5V
9 5V 19 XBP
8 *PBE 18 +5V
7 PBE 17 BP
6 *PAE 16 0V
5 PAE 15
/
4 XAP 14 0V
om
3 AP 13
2 *PSE 12 0V
1 PSE 11
s.c
Pin arrangement of the connector for the high–resolution pulse coder
A AP B BP C *PBE
re
D XAP E XBP F PSE
pa
G *PSE H SS J +5V
S T 0V
.cn
(22) Combined use of the MZ sensor (built–in sensor) and external one–turn signal switch
w
TYPE I
JY2
w
Spindle motor
K17
://
JY3
Spindle
tp
289
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Proximity switch
SPM
JY3
/
(11) 24V 24V
om
OUT-
(18) EXTSC PUT
(16) 0V 0V
s.c
(13) PU/PD
(10) SS
re
Required connector (HIROSE)
pa
Connector FI40A–2015S
Housing FI–20–CV
cs
Three–wire proximity switch/NPN type
.cn
Proximity switch
SPM
JY3
(11) 24V 24V
OUT-
w
(16) 0V 0V
w
(13) PU/PD
w
(10) SS
://
Housing FI–20–CV
ht
290
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
SPM
JY3
Proximity switch
(11) 24V
OUT-
/
(18) EXTSC PUT
om
(16) 0V 0V
(13) PU/PD
s.c
(10) SS
re
Required connector (HIROSE)
Connector FI40A–2015S
Housing FI–20–CV
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
291
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
SPM
/
TYPE 3 M sensor (pulse generator) Main spindle
om
JY2
Spindle motor
s.c
K14
JY6
K14 Sub spindle
re
Spindle motor
pa
cs M sensor (pulse generator)
See 9.2.3 (10) and (11) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K14.
.cn
SPM
TYPE 3
K17 Spindle motor
JY2
w
://
Main spindle
MZ sensor (built–in sensor)
K17
JY6
tp
Spindle motor
ht
Sub spindle
See 9.2.3 (17) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K17.
292
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
Spindle motor
/
JY2
om
K14
Main spindle
JY3
Magnetic sensor amplifier
K15
s.c
JY6
Magnetic sensor
JY7 K14
re
M sensor
Spindle motor
(pulse generator)
pa
Sub spindle
Magnetic sensor amplifier
K15
cs
See 9.2.3 (10) and (11) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K14.
.cn
See 9.2.3 (15) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K15.
w
Example 2–3) Using a position coder for the position feedback signal
w
w
JY2 Spindle
://
motor
K14
JY4
tp
JY8
M sensor Spindle
(pulse generator) motor
Position coder
See 9.2.3 (10) and (11) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K14.
See 9.2.3 (16) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K16.
293
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
Example 2–4) Using a motor incorporating an MZ sensor (built–in sensor) for the main spindle and a
position coder for the subspindle
/
JY2
om
Spindle
motor
K17
Main spindle
s.c
JY6 K14
re
(pulse generator)
Sub spindle
pa
K16
cs Position coder
See 9.2.3 (10) and (11) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K14.
See 9.2.3 (16) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K16.
.cn
See 9.2.3 (17) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K17.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
294
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
Example 2–5) Using a position coder for the main spindle, the MZ sensor incorporated into the motor,
and an external one–turn signal switch for the subspindle
SPM
TYPE 3 M sensor (pulse generator)
/
om
JY2 Spindle
motor
K14
JY4
K16 Main spindle
s.c
JY6 Position coder
K14
JY7
re
MZ sensor Spindle
(built–in sensor) motor
pa
K32
cs Sub spindle
External one–turn
signal switch
(proximity switch)
.cn
See 9.2.3 (10) and (11) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K14.
See 9.2.3 (16) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K16.
See 9.2.3 (22) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K32.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
295
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
SPM Spindle motor
TYPE 3
K16
s.c
First spindle
Position coder
JY2
re
MZ sensor (built–in sensor)
JY8
pa
Spindle motor
K17
cs
See 9.2.3 (16) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K16.
See 9.2.3 (17) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K17.
.cn
w
TYPE 3
K16
://
JY2
First spindle
JY4
tp
M sensor
(pulse generator) Position coder
ht
JY8
Spindle motor
K17
Position coder
See 9.2.3 (16) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K16.
See 9.2.3 (10) and (11) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K14.
296
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
CNC control unit
OH line Spindle+
built–in motor
s.c
BZ sensor (built–in sensor)
re
CN1
SPM K17
TYPE4
pa
CN2
JY5 cs
JY5
10 SS 20 5V
19
.cn
9 +5V
8 *PB 18 5V
7 PB 17
6 *PA 16 0V
5 PA 15 OH2
w
4 14 0V
3 13 OH1
2 *MZ 12 0V
w
1 MZ 11
w
CN1
1 *VZ 4
://
CN1,2
2 *VA 5 VA HONDA: Connector Z–374
Contact HKP–F413
tp
3 *VB 6 VB
ht
CN2
1 5V 4 5V
JY5
2 VZ 5 SS HIROSE: Connector FI40A–20S
Housing FI–20–CV5
3 0V 6 0V
297
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(2) There is a reduction gear ratio between the spindle and motor
(AC spindle motor incorporating MZ sensor + BZ sensor)
/
CNC control unit
om
K17
s.c
JY2
Spindle
re
SPM
CN1
TYPE4
K17
BZ sensor (built–in sensor)
pa
CN2
JY5
cs
JY2, JY5
10 SS 20 5V
9 +5V 19
.cn
8 *PB 18 5V
7 PB 17
6 *PA 16 0V
5 PA 15 OH2
w
4 14 0V
3 13 OH1
2 *MZ 12 0V
w
1 MZ 11
w
CN1
1 *VZ 4
://
CN1,2
2 *VA 5 VA HONDA: Connector Z–374
Contact HKP–F413
tp
3 *VB 6 VB
ht
CN2
1 5V 4 5V
JY2, JY5
2 VZ 5 SS HIROSE: Connector FI40A–20S
Housing FI–20–CV5
3 0V 6 0V
298
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
SPMC
/
om
Spindle motor
K16
s.c
JY4
Spindle
Position coder
re
See 9.2.3 (16) for a detailed description of the connection of cable K16.
long and routed close to a power line in the motor terminal box
or transit box, switching of the power transistor may induce noise
w
299
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
[Wiring liable to cause errors]
re
portion (hatched)
AMP
pa
connector
Feed back cable cs
Shielded portion
.cn
Fig.1
w
w
w
[Recommended example]
://
tp
AMP
connector
Unshielded portion
Fig.2
300
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
Unshielded
portion
(hatched)
Transit box
s.c
Transit
connector
re
Feed back
cable
pa
Motor power line
cs
To motor To sensor
Fig.3
.cn
[Recommended example]
w
Shielded portion
To amplifier To amplifier
w
Transit box
w
Unshielded portion
://
Motor
power lines
Feed back cable
To motor To sensor
Fig.4
301
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
9.3
CONNECTOR
LOCATION
9.3.1
/
Power Supply Module
om
(a) PSM–5.5, PSM–11
Table.9.3.1 (a) Names of connectors and terminal blocks
s.c
Names Display Remarks
1 DC link terminal block TB1 Display the terminal
block TB1
2 Status LED STATUS
re
3 200VAC input connector CX1A
4 200VAC output connector CX1B
pa
5 24VDC output connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
6 DC link charge LED (Warning)
cs
7 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
.cn
8 Connector for main power CX3
MCC control signal
9 Connector for ESP signal CX4
10 Regeneration phase S1/S2 Factory–set to S1
w
switch
11 Check pin See (Note) for
w
details
12 Terminal names for termi-
nal block for motor power
w
line
13 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
://
WARNING
ht
NOTE
Detailed functions of check pin
IR : Waveform of R–phase input current
IS : Waveform of S–phase input current
+24V : +24V power supply
+5V : +5V power supply
0V : 0V
302
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 DC link charge LED (Warning)
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 200VAC input connector CX1A
5 200VAC output connector CX1B
6 24VDC output connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
s.c
have same function.
7 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
re
8 Connector for main power CX3
MCC control signal
9 Connector for ESP signal CX4
pa
10 Regeneration phase S1/S2 Factory–set to S1
switch
11 Check pin See (Note) for
cs
details
12 Terminal names for termi-
nal block for motor power
.cn
line
13 Terminal block for motor TB2 Display the terminal
power line block TB2
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
w
NOTE
tp
303
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
2 Status LED STATUS
om
3 200VAC input connector CX1A
4 24VDC output connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
5 DC link charge LED (Warning)
s.c
6 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
7 Connector for main power CX3
MCC control signal
re
8 Connector for ESP signal CX4
9 Terminal block, Terminal
pa
names
10 Terminal for separate type Display the terminal
regenerative resistor con- block TB2
cs
nection
11 Terminal for main power Display the terminal
supply connection block TB2
.cn
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
w
w
://
tp
ht
304
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 DC link charge LED (Warning)
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 200VAC input connector CX1A
5 200VAC output connector CX1B
6 24VDC output connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
s.c
have same function.
7 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
re
8 Connector for main power CX3
MCC control signal
9 Connector for ESP signal CX4
pa
10 Regeneration phase S1/S2 Factory–set to S1
switch
11 Check pin See (Note) for
cs
details
12 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
power line block TB2
.cn
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
w
NOTE
://
0V : 0V
305
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(e) PSMV–11HV
/
2 DC link charge LED (Warning)
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 200VAC input connector CX1A
5 200VAC output connector CX1B
6 24VDC output connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
s.c
have same function.
7 Check pin See (Note) for
details
re
8 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
9 Connector for test by FA- JY1
pa
NUC
10 Connector for main power CX3
MCC control signal
cs
11 Connector for ESP signal CX4
12 Connector for phase detec- CX10
tion signal
.cn
the flange
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
://
NOTE
Detailed functions of check pin
ht
306
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
9.3.2
Servo Amplifier Module
/
(a) SVM1–12, SVM1–20, SVM1–40S,
om
SVM1–40L,SVM1–80
s.c
1 DC link terminal block M6
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
er
3 Status LED STATUS
re
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X
pulse coder battery
pa
5 Interface switching con- S1/S2 Type–A interface:
nector S1
Type–B interface:
S2
cs
6 Fuse for 24V power F2
7 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
.cn
have same function.
8 DC link charge LED (Warning)
9 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
w
type–B interface
14 Pulse coder connector ENC1/JF1 Only for type–B in-
terface
tp
line
16 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
power line block TB2
17 Earth plate Attatched to amplifi-
er
18 Tapped hole for grounding
the flange
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
307
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(b) SVM1–130
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X
pulse coder battery
s.c
5 Interface switching con- S1/S2 Type–A interface:
nector S1
Type–B interface:
S2
re
6 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
7 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
pa
have same function.
8 DC link charge LED (Warning)
9 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
cs board.
10 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
.cn
11 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
12 NC interface connector for PWM11/JV1B FS16, FS18, FS15,
type–A interface FS0, etc.
w
the flange
ht
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
308
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X
pulse coder battery
s.c
5 Interface switching con- S1/S2 Type–A interface:
nector S1
Type–B interface:
S2
re
6 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
7 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
pa
have same function.
8 DC link charge LED (Warning)
9 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
cs board.
10 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
.cn
11 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
12 NC interface connector for PWM11/JV1B FS16, FS18, FS15,
type–A interface FS0, etc.
w
the flange
ht
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
309
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse coder BATTERY A60B–6073–K001
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X
pulse coder battery
s.c
5 Interface switching con- S1/S2 Type–A interface:
nector S1
Type–B interface:
S2
re
6 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
7 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B
pa
8 DC link charge LED (Warning)
9 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
10
cs
Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
11 Output connector for inter- JX1B
.cn
face between modules
12 NC interface connector : L PWM11/JV1B FS16,FS18,FS15,F
axis for type–A interface S0,etc
13 NC interface connector : M PWM12/JV2B FS16, FS18, FS15,
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
310
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X
pulse coder battery
s.c
5 Interface switching con- S1/S2 Type–A interface:
nector S1
Type–B interface:
S2
re
6 Fuse for 24V power F2 32A, 48VDC
7 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
pa
have same function.
8 DC link charge LED (Warning)
9 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
cs
board.
10 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
.cn
axis terface
17 Pulse coder connector : M ENC2/JF2 Only for type–B in-
tp
axis terface
18 Terminal names for termi-
nal block for motor power
ht
line
19 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
power line : M axis block TB2
20 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
power line : L axis block TB2
21 Tapped hole for grounding
the flange
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
311
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(f) SVM3–12/12/12,SVM3–12/12/20,
SVM3–12/20/20, SVM3–20/20/20,
SVM3–12/12/40 SVM3–12/20/40,
SVM3–20/20/40 Table.9.3.2 (f) Names of connectors and terminal blocks
(f)–1 TYPE A Names Display Remarks
1 DC link terminal block Display the terminal
block TB1
/
2 Status LED STATUS
om
3 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
4 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
5 DC link charge LED (Warning)
s.c
6 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
7 Input connector for inter- JX1A
re
face between modules
8 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
pa
9 NC interface connector : L PWM1/JV1B
axis for type–A interface
10 NC interface connector : M PWM2/JV2B
cs
axis for type–A interface
11 NC interface connector : N PWM3/JV3B
axis for type–A interface
.cn
line
14 Earth plate Attatched tp amplifi-
w
er
15 Tapped hole for grounding
w
the flange
://
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
tp
ht
312
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(g)–2 TYPE B
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X Both connectors
pulse coder battery have same function.
s.c
5 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
6 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
re
7 DC link charge LED (Warning)
8 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
pa
9 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
10 Output connector for inter- JX1B
cs
face between modules
11 NC interface connector : L PWM1/JS1B
axis for type–B interface
.cn
er
20 Tapped hole for grounding
the flange
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
313
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
2 DC link charge LED (Warning)
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 24VDC power I/O connec- CX1A/CX1B
tor
5 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors have
s.c
same function.
6 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
re
7 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
8 Output connector for inter- JX1B
pa
face between modules
9 CNC interface connector PWM11/JV1B
TYPE A interface
cs
10 CNC interface connector PWM11/JS1B
TYPE B interface
11 Pulse coder connector JF1 For TYPE B interface
.cn
only
12 Interface changeover con- S1 TYPE A Interface : S1
nector S2 TYPE B Interface : S2
13 Power connector for ABS CX5X
w
power line
19 Terminal names for termi- Display the terminal
nal block for motor power block TB2
ht
line
20 Tapped hole for grounding
the flange
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
314
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
2. FSSB Interface
(a) SVM1–12, SVM1–20, SVM1–40S,
SVM1–40L, SVM1–80
Table.9.3.2 (i) Names of connectors and terminal blocks
Names Display Remarks
1 DC link terminal block Display the terminal
/
block TB1
om
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X Both connectors
s.c
pulse coder battery CX5Y have same function.
5 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
6 24V power I/O connector CX2A Both connectors
re
CX2B have same function.
7 DC link charge LED (Warning)
pa
8 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
9 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
cs
10 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
.cn
11 Pulse coder connector ENC1/JF1
12 FSSB optical input connec- COP10B
tor
13 FSSB optical output con- COP10A
w
nector
14 Terminal block for motor
w
power line
15 Terminal names for termi- Display the terminal
nal block for motor power block TB2
w
line
16 Earth plate Attatched to amplifi-
://
er
17 Tapped hole for grounding
the flange
tp
WARNING
ht
315
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(b) SVM1–130
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X Both connectors
pulse coder battery CX5Y have same function.
s.c
5 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
6 24V power I/O connector CX2A Both connectors
CX2B have same function.
re
7 DC link charge LED (Warning)
8 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
pa
9 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
10 Output connector for inter- JX1B
cs
face between modules
11 Pulse coder connector ENC1/JF1
.cn
12 FSSB optical input connec- COP10B
tor
13 FSSB optical output con- COP10A
nector
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
tp
316
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X Both connectors
pulse coder battery CX5Y have same function.
s.c
5 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
6 24V power I/O connector CX2A Both connectors
CX2B have same function.
re
7 DC link charge LED (Warning)
8 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
pa
9 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
10 Output connector for inter- JX1B
cs
face between modules
11 Pulse coder connector ENC1/JF1
.cn
12 FSSB optical input connec- COP10B
tor
13 FSSB optical output con- COP10A
nector
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
tp
317
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X Both connectors
pulse coder battery CX5Y have same function.
s.c
5 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
6 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
re
7 DC link charge LED (Warning)
8 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
pa
9 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
10 Output connector for inter- JX1B
cs
face between modules
11 Pulse coder connector for ENC1/JF1
the L–axis
.cn
er
19 Tapped hole for grounding
the flange
ht
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
318
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X/CX5Y Both connectors
pulse coder battery have same function.
s.c
5 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
6 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
re
7 DC link charge LED (Warning)
8 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
pa
9 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
10 Output connector for inter- JX1B
cs
face between modules
11 Pulse coder connector for ENC1/JF1
the L–axis
.cn
the flange
ht
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
319
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
2 Battery for ABS pulse cod- BATTERY A06B–6073–K001
om
er
3 Status LED STATUS
4 Power connector for ABS CX5X Both connectors
pulse coder battery CX5Y have same function.
s.c
5 Fuse for 24V power F2 3.2A, 48VDC
6 24V power I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
re
7 DC link charge LED (Warning)
8 Signal check connector JX5 Use an SVM check
board.
pa
9 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
10 Output connector for inter- JX1B
cs
face between modules
11 Pulse coder connector for ENC1/JF1
the L–axis
.cn
the flange
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
320
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 DC link charge LED (Warning)
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 200 VAC power input/out- CX1A/CX1B
put connector
5 24 VDC power input/output CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
s.c
connector have same function.
6 Signal check connector JX5
7 Input connector for inter- JX1A
re
face between modules
8 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
pa
9 Pulse coder connector JF1
10 FSSB optical input connec- COP10B
tor
cs
11 FSSB optical output con- COP10A
nector
.cn
12 Power connector for ABS CX5X
pulse coder battery CX5Y
13 Dynamic brake interface CX8
connector
w
er
ht
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
321
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
9.3.3
Spindle Amplifier
Module Table.9.3.3 (a) Names of connectors and terminal blocks
Names Display Remarks
(a) SPM–2.2
1 DC link terminal block Display the terminal
/
block TB1
om
2 Status LED STATUS
3 200VAC I/O connector CX1A/CX1B Both connectors
have same function.
function
4 24 VDC connector CX2A/CX2B
s.c
5 DC link charge LED (Warning)
6 Connector for signal check, JX4 Use an SPM check
pulse generator signal out- board.
put, and position coder sig-
re
nal output
7 Output connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
pa
8 Input connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
9
cs
Connector for load meter JY1
and speedometer
10 Input connector for electric JA7B
.cn
serial interface
11 Output connector for elec- JA7A
tric serial interface
12 Connector for pulse gener- JY2
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
322
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 Status LED STATUS
om
3 200VAC I/O connector CX1A/CX1B Both connectors
have same function.
function
4 24 VDC connector CX2A/CX2B
5 DC link charge LED (Warning)
s.c
6 Connector for signal check, JX4 Use an SPM check
pulse generator signal out- board.
put, and position coder sig-
nal output
re
7 Output connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
8 Input connector for inter- JX1B
pa
face between modules
9 Connector for load meter JY1
and speedometer
cs
10 Input connector for electric JA7B
serial interface
11 Output connector for elec- JA7A
.cn
tric serial interface
12 Connector for pulse gener- JY2
ator, built–in sensor, and
Cs axis sensor for motor
w
position coder
15 Connector for Cs–axis sen- JY5 Only for TYPE II
://
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
323
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
3 Status LED STATUS
om
4 200VAC I/O connector CX1A/CX1B Both connectors
5 24 VDC I/O connector CX2A/CX2B h
have same ffunction.
i
6 Signal check connector JX4 Use an SPM check
board.
s.c
7 Output connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
8 Input connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
re
9 Connector for load meter JY1
and speedometer
10 Input connector for electric JA7B
pa
serial interface
11 Output connector for elec- JA7A
tric serial interface
12
cs
Connector for pulse gener- JY2
ator, built–in sensor
13 Connector for magnetic JY3
sensor and external single
.cn
rotation signal
14 Connector for position cod- JY4
er and high–resolution
position coder
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
ht
324
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
3 200VAC I/O connector CX1A/CX1B Both connectors
om
have same function.
4 24 VDC I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function.
5 DC link charge LED (Warning)
s.c
6 Signal check connector JX4 Use an SPM check
board.
7 Output connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
re
8 Input connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
9 Connector for load meter JY1
pa
and speedometer
10 Input connector for electric JA7B
serial interface
11 Output connector for elec- JA7A
cs
tric serial interface
12 Connector for pulse gener- JY2
ator, built–in sensor
.cn
er and high–resolution
position coder
15 Connector for Cs–axis sen- JY5 Only for TYPE 2, 4
w
the flange
WARNING
ht
325
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
2 DC link charge LED (Warning)
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 200VAC I/O connector CX1A/CX1B Both connectors
have same function.
function
5 24 VDC I/O connector CX2A/CX2B
s.c
6 Signal check connector JX4 Use an SPM check
board.
7 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
re
8 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
pa
9 Connector for load meter JY1
and speedometer
10 Input connector for electric JA7B
serial interface
cs
11 Output connector for elec- JA7A
tric serial interface
.cn
12 Connector for pulse gener- JY2
ator, built–in sensor
13 Connector for magnetic JY3
sensor and external single
rotation signal
w
position coder
15 Connector for Cs–axis sen- JY5
w
ing differential
17 Same as JY3 JY7
sspeed tapping.
eed ta ing.
18 Same as JY4 JY8
tp
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
326
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
2 Status LED STATUS
om
3 200VAC I/O connector CX1A/CX1B Both connectors
have same function.
function
4 24 VDC I/O connector CX2A/CX2B
5 DC link charge LED (Warning)
s.c
6 Signal check connector JX4 Use an SPM check
board.
7 Input connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
re
8 Output connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
pa
9 Connector for load meter JY1
and speedometer
10 Input connector for electric JA7B
cs
serial interface
11 Output connector for elec- JA7A
tric serial interface
.cn
12 Connector for pulse gener- JY2
ator, built–in sensor
13 Connector for magnetic JY3
sensor and external single
w
rotation signal
14 Connector for position cod- JY4
w
er and high–resolution
position coder
15 Connector for Cs–axis sen- JY5
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
327
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(g) SPMC–2.2
/
2 Status LED STATUS
om
3 24VDC I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function
4 DC link charge LED (Warning)
5 Output connector for inter- JX1A
s.c
face between modules
6 Input connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
re
7 Frequency meter analog JY1
override connector for mo-
tor thermostat connection
pa
8 Input connector for electric JA7B
serial interface
9 Connector for position cod- JY4
cs
er
10 Terminal names for termi-
nal block for motor power
.cn
line
11 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
power line block TB2
12 Earth plate Attatched to amplifi-
w
er
13 Tapped hole for grounding
w
the flange
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
://
tp
ht
328
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(h) SPMC–5.5, 11
/
2 Status LED STATUS
om
3 24VDC I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
have same function
4 DC link charge LED (Warning)
5 Output connector for inter- JX1A
s.c
face between modules
6 Input connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
re
7 Frequency meter analog JY1
override connector for mo-
tor thermostat connection
pa
8 Input connector for electric JA7B
serial interface
9 Connector for position cod- JY4
cs
er
10 Terminal names for termi-
nal block for motor power
.cn
line
11 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
power line block TB2
12 Tapped hole for grounding
w
the flange
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
w
329
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
2 DC link charge LED (Warning)
om
3 Status LED STATUS
4 200VAC I/O connector CX1A/CX1B Both connectors
have same function.
5 24VDC I/O connector CX2A/CX2B Both connectors
s.c
have same function
6 Output connector for inter- JX1A
face between modules
re
7 Input connector for inter- JX1B
face between modules
8 Frequency meter analog JY1
pa
override connector for mo-
tor thermostat connection
9 Input connector for electric JA7B
cs
serial interface
10 Connector for position cod- JY4
er
.cn
11 Terminal names for termi-
nal block for motor power
line
12 Terminal block for motor Display the terminal
w
the flange
w
WARNING
Do not touch module components or connected cables
while this LED is lit. There is a danger of electric shock.
://
tp
ht
330
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
9.4
CABLE LEAD–IN
DIAGRAMS
9.4.1
/
Power Supply Modules
om
(a) PSM–5.5, PSM–11
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
331
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
332
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
333
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
334
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(e) PSMV–11HV
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
335
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
Group Interface Name
om
– Module without fins
GROUP 1 TYPE A/TYPE B SVM1–12, SVM1–20
(SVM1:60mm) FSSB – Module with fins
SVM1–40S, SVM1–40L, SVM1–80
s.c
GROUP 2 TYPE A/TYPE B SVM1–130
(SVM1:90mm) FSSB SVM1–jHV
GROUP 3 TYPE A/TYPE B
SVM1–240, SVM1–360
(SVM1:150mm) FSSB
re
Dynamic brake module (DBM) for the
GROUP 4 –––
SVM1–240 and SVM1–360
pa
– Module without fins
SVM2–12/12, SVM2–12/20
GROUP 5 TYPE A/TYPE B
SVM2–20/20
(SVM2:60mm) FSSB
– Module with fins
cs SVM2–40/40
SVM2–40/80, SVM2–80/80
GROUP 6 TYPE A/TYPE B
SVM2–40L/40L
(SVM2:90mm) FSSB
.cn
SVM2–j/jHV
– Module without fins
SVM3–12/12/12, SVM3–12/12/20
TYPE A
GROUP 7 SVM3–12/20/20, SVM3–20/20/20
TYPE B
w
NOTE
w
336
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
337
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
338
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
339
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
340
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
341
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
342
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
343
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
9.4.3
Spindle Amplifier
Modules
(1) SPM–2.2 (TYPE 1, 2, 4)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
Grounding plate
supplied with the
module
ht
NOTE
Type 1 is not equipped with connector JY5.
344
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
NOTE
Type 1 is not equipped with connector JY5.
345
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
NOTE
Type 1 is not equipped with connector JY5.
346
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
347
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
348
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
349
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
(7) SPMC–2.2
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
Grounding plate
supplied with the
module
tp
ht
350
B–65162E/03 9.CONNECTION
(8) SPMC–5.5, 11
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
351
9. CONNECTION B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
352
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10 INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
353
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.1 The α series servo amplifier has a terminal for the emergency stop signal
on the power supply module (connector: CX4). Always use the
EMERGENCY STOP emergency stop signal.
SIGNAL (*ESP) D When the contact is closed (on), the spindle motors and servo motors
– CONTACT INPUT can operate. When the contact is open (off), the external magnetic
SIGNAL – contactor is turned off, preventing operation of the spindle motors and
/
servo motors.
om
D When the contact is opened (turned off) while a motor is rotating, a
spindle motor will decelerate naturally and stop, while a servo motor
will stop by the application of its dynamic brake.
D The contact input signal has the following specifications:
s.c
- External contact capacity: 30 VDC or higher, 100 mA or higher
- Significant levels for contactless input (voltage between input
terminals)
re
Low (logical 0) : 2 V or lower
High (logical 1) : 20 V or higher
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
354
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.1.1
Emergency Stop Signal
(*ESP) Block Diagram
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
355
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.1.2
Sequence for
Emergency Stop
Without SPM
/
Emergency stop
om
contact signal (*ESP)
s.c
(PSM/JX1B–7)
re
ON
MCC contact
OFF
pa
cs 100ms max.
NOTE
The emergency stop signal triggers the DB stop sequence of the servo motor. At the same time,
.cn
each SVM outputs the MCCOFF signal to shut down the external MCC.
With SPM
w
Emergency stop
w
Decelerating spindle
motor (SSTA, B)
://
ON
MCC contact
OFF
100ms max.
Decelerating
spindle motor
NOTE
The emergency stop signal brings the servo motor to a DB stop. It also decelerates the spindle
motor until it stops. Once the spindle motor has stopped, and the spindle zero–speed detected
signal has been output, the external MCC is shut down.
356
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.1.3
Sequence for
Releasing Emergency
Stop
/
Without SPM
om
Emergency stop
contact signal (*ESP)
s.c
(PSM/JX1B–7)
2s
ON
Relay signal for controlling OFF
external MCC (CX3)
re
ON
OFF
pa
MCC contact
100ms max.
PSM ready signal
(CRDY/JX1B–9)
cs
1.5 s max.
Charging DC link
.cn
NOTE
When the PSM ready (*CRDY) signal = 0, the servo motor is ready to operate.
w
w
With SPM
w
Emergency stop
contact signal (*ESP)
MCC OFF signal
://
(PSM/JX1B–7)
16 ms
tp
OFF
MCC contact
100ms max.
PSM ready signal
(*CRDY/JX1B–9)
1.5 s max
Charging DC link
NOTE
When the PSM ready (*CRDY) signal = 0, the servo motor and spindle motor are ready to
operate. Even if there is an SPM, a no–SPM sequence is used, if the spindle emergency stop
signals (*ESPA and *ESPB) are not reset.
357
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.2
SPINDLE CONTROL
SIGNALS (α series
spindle)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
358
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.2.1
Spindle Control DI
Signal (PMC to CNC)
/
om
FS0 FS0–TT FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
HEAD2 (Note 1) Path 1 Path 2
G229 G1429 G227 G070 G1070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
G230 G1430 G226 G071 G1071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
s.c
G231 G1431 G229 G072 G1072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
G232 G1432 G228 G073 G1073 DSCNA SORSLA MPOFA SLVA MORCMA
G124 G1324 G032 G1032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
G125 G1325 G033 G1033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
re
G024 RISGN RI12 RI11 RI10 RI09 RI08
G025 RI07 RI06 RI05 RI04 RI03 RI02 RI01 RI00
pa
G110 G1310 G231 G078 G1078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G111 G1311 G230 G079 G1079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G103 G1303 SPC SPB SPA
G029
cs SPC SPB SPA
G030 G1030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0
G120 G1320 *SSTP SOR SAR FIN
.cn
G005 FIN
G029 G1029 *SSTP SOR SAR
G004 G1004 FIN
G123
w
G123 RGTP
(Note 3)
G135 G061 G1061 RGTAP
(Note 3)
tp
NOTE
1 The addresses listed under ”FS15” are for the PMC–NA. Refer to the FS15 Connection Manual
for the PMC–NB addresses.
2 Bit 5 (ADDCF) of parameter No. 31 applies here.
3 Bit 4 (SRGTP) of parameter No. 19 applies here.
359
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
om
G146 G1346 G028 G1028 PS2SLC
s.c
G233 G1433 G235 G074 G1074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
G234 G1434 G234 G075 G1075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
G235 G1435 G237 G076 G1076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDA OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
re
G236 G1436 G236 G077 G1077 SORSLB MPOFB SLVB MORCMB
G112 G1312 G239 G080 G1080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
pa
G113 G1313 G238 G081 G1081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
G034 G1034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
G035 G1035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2
G232 RISGNB
cs RIB12 RIB11 RIB10 RIB9 RIB8
G233 RIB7 RIB6 RIB5 RIB4 RIB3 RIB2 RIB1 RIB0
G106 G1306 M2R08I M2R07I M2R06I M2R05I M2R04I M2R03I M2R02I M2R01I
.cn
G107 G1307 M2SIND M2SSIN M2SGN M2R12I M2R11I M2R10I M2R09I
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
360
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
0 1 : Limits the torque to the value
om
specified with the parameter.
Torque limit 1 0 : Limits the torque to half of the
TLMHA, B command value specified with the parameter.
(high) 1 1 : Limits the torque to half of the
s.c
value specified with the parameter.
Specify one of the following conditions according to the
clutch or gear status.
Used to select a spindle control parameter.
re
Clutch or gear CTH1 CTH2
CTH1, 2A, B
signal 0 0 : High gear
0 1 : Medium high gear
pa
1 0 : Medium low gear
1 1 : Low gear
Specifies the rotation direction when the spindle motor is
cs
Reverse rota- viewed from the shaft.
SRVA, B
tion command SRV SFR
0 0 : Sto
Stop
.cn
0 1 : Normal rotation
Normal rotation (CCW: Counterclockwise)
SFRA, B
command 1 0 : Reverse rotation (CW: Clockwise)
1 1 : Stop
w
ARSTA, B
nal The alarm is reset when the level of
”1”
”0” the signal is changed from 1 to 0.
tp
361
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
Power line sta- Used for the speed range switching function.
/
RCHA, B tus check sig- 0 : High-speed range
om
nal 1 : Low-speed range
Used for the stop position external
”1” setting type orientation.
Orientation New stop position data is obtained
”0”
s.c
INDXA, B stop position when the level of the signal is
change signal changed from 1 to 0.
Then, the spindle is moved to the
new stop position, and is stopped.
re
Rotation direc- Used for the stop position external setting type orienta-
tion command tion.
ROTAA, B while changing 0 : CCW (counterclockwise)
pa
the orientation
stop position 1 : CW (clockwise)
Short-distant Used for the stop position external setting type orienta-
movement tion.
cs
command while 0 : The rotation direction depends on the setting of
NRROA, B
changing the ROTA (= bit 1)
orientation stop
1 : Short-distance movement control (within "180°)
.cn
position
Differential Used for the spindle differential control mode
DEFMDA, B mode com-
mand 1 : Differential control mode
w
Main-spindle
MCC status 0 : The MCC in the main spindle is opened.
MFNHGA, B signal while
1 : The MCC in the main spindle is closed.
://
changing
spindles
High–speed
tp
speed range
Command for
spindle orienta-
1 : Spindle orientation with the magnetic sensor is con-
MORCMA, B tion with a
trolled.
magnetic sen-
sor
Slave operation 0 : Slave operation control is disable.
SLVA, B
command 1 : Slave operation control is enable.
Motor power
MPOFA, B 1 : Motor power stop
stop signal
362
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
SGN, SSIN
Spindle speed
om
SIND Specifies a spindle speed command.
command
RI12 - RI00
RISGN
Stop position
command for
SHA11 - SHA00 The stop position is specified externally spindle orienta-
s.c
spindle orienta-
SHB11 - SHB00 tion with the position coder.
tion with a posi-
tion coder
Spindle stop 0 : Velocity command voltage = 0
re
*SSTP
signal 1 : Velocity command voltage = specified value
Spindle
1 : Outputs the velocity command specified with the
pa
SOR orientation in
parameter.
progress
Velocity 1 : The actual spindle speed reaches the specified
SAR
reached signal speed.
cs
M function
FIN completion sig- 1 : The M function is completed.
.cn
nal
Cs contour
CON, COFF
control com- Specifies the Cs contour control mode .
SCNTR1, 2 . .
mand
w
Gear select
GR1, 2 Used for velocity command calculation under constant
signal (T-se-
GS1, 2, 4 surface speed control
ries)
w
SPSTP
check signal
Spindle speed
synchroniza-
tp
Spindle phase
synchroniza-
SPPHS 1 : Spindle phase synchronization control
tion control
command
RGTP Rigid tapping
1 : Rigid tapping control
RGTAP command
363
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.2.2
Spindle Control DO
Signals (CNC to PMC)
/
(1) 1st Spindle Signal Address
om
FS0 FS0–TT FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
HEAD2 (Note 1) Path 1 Path 2
F281 F1481 F229 F045 F1045 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
F282 F1482 F228 F046 F1046 MOAR2A MOAR1A POAR2A SLVSA RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
s.c
F283 F1483 F231 F047 F1047 EXOFA SORENA MSOVRA INCSTA PC1DTA
F172 F1372 F036 F1036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
F173 F1373 F037 F1037 R12O R11O R10O R09O
re
F010 RO15 RO14 RO13 RO12 RO11 RO10 RO09 RO08
(F006)
(Note 2)
pa
F001 RO07 RO06 RO05 RO04 RO03 RO02 RO01 RO00
(F001)
F150 F1350 F007 F1007 SF MF
SF MF
cs
F149 F1349 F001 F1001 ENB
F164 F1364 F038 F1038 ENB3 ENB2 SCLP SUCLP
.cn
SPCO SPBO SPAO SPAL SSLP SUCLP
F154 F1354 F035 F1035 SPAL
F152 F1352 F034 F1034 GR30 GR20 GR10
F001 CSS
w
MCNTR1,
... 2, ...
F111 MSPPHS MSPSYC SPSYAL
w
F040 RTAP
F020 F025 F1025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F021 F024 F1024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
://
F022 F023 F1023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
F023 F022 F1022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
tp
F012 F041 F1041 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR09 AR08
F013 F040 F1040 AR07 AR06 AR05 AR04 AR03 AR02 AR01 AR00
F232 SLDM15 SLDM14 SLDM13 SLDM12 SLDM11 SLDM10 SLDM09 SLDM08
ht
NOTE
1 The addresses listed under ”FS15” are for the PMC–NA.
Refer to the FS15 Connection Manual for the PMC–NB
addresses.
2 The addresses in parentheses are used for 15–TT.
364
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
F248 SLDMB15 SLDMB14 SLDMB13 SLDMB12 SLDMB11 SLDMB10 SLDMB9 SLDMB8
om
F249 SLDMB7 SLDMB6 SLDMB5 SLDMB4 SLDMB3 SLDMB2 SLDMB1 SLDMB0
F250 SSPDB15 SSPDB14 SSPDB13 SSPDB12 SSPDB11 SSPDB10 SSPDB9 SSPDB8
F251 SSPDB7 SSPDB6 SSPDB5 SSPDB4 SSPDB3 SSPDB2 SSPDB1 SSPDB0
F252 SSPAB7 SSPAB6 SSPAB5 SSPAB4 SSPAB3 SSPAB2 AAPAB1 SSPAB0
s.c
(3) Spindle control DO signals
re
Output when a spindle alarm occurs.
ALMA, B Alarm signal 0 : Normal state
pa
1 : Alarm state
Output when the actual spindle motor speed does not ex-
Speed zero ceed the speed zero detection level.
SSTA, B
detection signal
cs 1 : Zero speed
Output when the actual spindle motor speed does not ex-
Speed detection ceed the preset speed.
SDTA, B
.cn
signal
1 : Less than preset speed
Output to the velocity command when the actual spindle mo-
Speed match tor speed reaches the preset range.
SARA, B
signal
1 : Speed match
w
Torque limiting
TLMA, B 1 : The limit is applied to the torque.
signal
Output when the spindle stops near the specified position af-
tp
365
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
tion coder
om
Signal for
completion of
MOAR1A, B spindle orienta- 1 : Completion of orientation
tion with a mag-
netic sensor
s.c
Signal for
approximate
MOAR2A, B spindle orienta- 1 : Near the orientation stop position
tion with a mag-
re
netic sensor
Signal indicating
pa
the status of the
1 : Status of the detected one-rotation position coder sig-
PC1DTA, B detected one-
nal
rotation position
coder signal
cs
Incremental
INCSTA, B method orienta- 1 : Under incremental method spindle orientation
tion signal
.cn
Spindle function
SF 1 : The S code is effective.
strobe signal
w
Spindle un-
SUCLP clamp comple- 1 : Unclamping the spindle is completed.
tion signal
://
Spindle clamp
SCLP completion sig- 1 : Clamping the spindle is completed.
nal
tp
Spindle fluctua- 1 : The actual speed of the spindle is out of the allowed
SPAL
tion alarm signal range.
ht
Spindle speed
SPAO,
override check
SPBO SPCO
signal
Gear select sig-
GR10, 20, 30
nal
Constant sur-
CSS face speed con- 1 : Under constant surface speed control
trol signal
FSCSL Cs contour con-
1 : Under Cs contour control
NCBTR1, 2 trol signal
Spindle syn-
FSPSY
chronization 1 : Under spindle synchronization control
MSPSYC
control signal
366
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
signal
om
Rigid tapping
RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping in progress
signal
Spindle function
S31 - S00 Sxxxx
code signal
s.c
Actual spindle
AR15 - AR00 min–1
speed signal
SLDM15 - Load meter
0 to 32737 (+10 V)
SLDM00 data
re
SSPD15 - Motor speed
0 to "16384 (maximum motor speed)
SSPD00 data
pa
SSPAA7 - Spindle alarm
Alarm number
SSPAA0 data cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
367
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.2.3
Emergency Stop Signal D Spindle motor and spindle amplifier module enter the operable state
(*ESPA) by *ESPA = 1. When *ESPA is set to 0, the spindle amplifier module
outputs the MCOFF signal and the spindle motor does not operate.
D If *ESPA = 0 is set during the motor rotation, the spindle motor
/
smoothly decelerates to a stop. Then, it outputs the MCOFF signal.
om
D If *ESPA = 1 then occurs again, the spindle motor enters the rotateable
state, and so will begin to rotate as soon as a rotation command is
issued. For this reason, the command signal (speed command, normal
operation command, or reverse operation command) to the spindle
s.c
amplifier module should be reset at the same time an emergency stop
signal is input.
re
10.2.4
pa
Machine Ready Signal D The table contents result from the parameter setting.
(MRDYA) Parameter setting
cs
Series15:3001-bit0
Mode
Series0:6501-bit0 Contents
.cn
Series16:4001-bit0
Machine ready signal is not used.
At this time, the spindle motor enters the oper-
A 0
able state only when emergency stop signal is
w
input.
Intercepts power by
Uses the machine
w
MRDYA = 0.
://
Mode B
ht
368
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
Timing chart
1
Orientation command 0
CRCMA 1
Orientation complete signal 0
ORARA Pulling off
Attach-
/
Tool change operation Tool ment of
om
Tool catch move new tool Detachment
s.c
Machine ready signal MRDYA 1 0 1
Excitation interception
re
10.2.5
pa
cs
D When the following four conditions hold, the spindle motor starts a
Normal Rotation
Command Signal normal rotation corresponding to the speed command (positive value).
(SFRA) - Emergency stop signal *ESPA is 1
.cn
braking. After stopping, it cuts the power supply to the spindle motor
by intercepting the transistor excitation signal.
369
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.2.6
Reverse Rotation D When the following four conditions hold, the spindle motor starts a
Command Signal reverse rotation corresponding to the speed command (positive value).
(SRVA) - Emergency stop signal *ESPA is 1
- Machine ready signal MRDYA is 1
/
- Reverse rotation command signal SRVA is 1
om
- Contact signal ESP is connected to 24 V (at CX4 of the PSM)
D While SRVA=1, the spindle motor rotats in a clockwise direction
(CW) looked at from the shaft side according to the speed command
(Positive value).
s.c
re
pa
D If SFRA = 0 occurs, the spindle motor stops by the regenerative
cs
braking. After stopping, it cuts the power supply to the spindle motor
by intercepting the transistor excitation signal.
.cn
D When the Normal rotation command signal (SFRA) and the reverse
rotation command signal (SRVA) are simultaneiusly ON, the spindle
motor stops.
w
10.2.7
w
Torque Limiting D The torque restriction (torque limit) is used in order to rotate the
Command Signal spindle motor to temporarily reduce the spindle motor output torque
w
370
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
Torque limiting signal TLMA
om
Speed zero
signal OFF ”1” SSTA
Spindle ”0”
amplifier Speed detection
signal ON within regular speed
signal
Rotates slowly in torque
s.c
restriction state
Motor rota-
tion speed (Stop)
(Stop)
re
Stopper (Storage)
Projection
Machine (Storage)
Limit switch (Stop confirmation signal)
pa
ATC
ÅÅÅÅÅ
(Tool replacement)
cs
Example of machine type orientation sequence
.cn
When the conditions desicribed on the privious page are difficult, use the
purely electric type spindle orientation (option) which does not use a
stopper.
w
10.2.8
w
Alarm Reset Signal D After removing the various alarm causes such as motor overheating,
(ARSTA) excess speed deviation, short-circuiting, excess speed, excess voltage,
w
excess current, excess load, and voltage drop, if the alarm reset signal
is input, the alarm is released and the usable state occurs.
D Even if this signal isinputted when there is no alarm, it is disabled.
://
10.2.9
Spindle Alarm Signal D If the state occurs in which the spindle motor operation cannot be
(ALMA) continuously executed, the power to the spindle motor will become
OFF and the spindle motor will be stopped.
D At the same time the alarm signal ALMA = 1 occurs. Regarding the
alarm contents, confirm by the display section of the spindle amplifier.
D Set the command signal to the spindle amplifier (speed command,
forward/reverse rotation command, torgue limit command, spindle
orientation command ) in the reset state using the alarm signal output.
If it is not in the reset state (state that signal from PMC is all clear),
when the alarm on the spindle amplifier is released there is a danger
that the spindle motor may rotate.
371
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
D Because the spindle motor enters the power OFF, coasting operates at
the same time as the alarm signal is output, it is necessary to set in an
emergency stop state and to set the feedhold state at the CNC or
magnetics cabinet side.
D When the alarm state has occurred, ALMA = 1 occurs.
While the alarm signal is 1, the spindle motor enters coasting operates
/
state regardless of any command from the outside.
om
D The relationship between the alarm signal and the alarm reset signal
is as shown in Fig. 10.2.9.
Speed command
s.c
Forward rotation/back
rotation command
SFRA (SRVA)
Spindle control
re
input signal Spindle orientatin
commandORCMA 1
0 0
ARSTA
pa
(Alarm reset) 1
0
Spindle control ALMA
output signal
cs
(Alarm)
Remove the alarm cause
.cn
(Stop)
w
10.2.10
tp
Zero-speed Detecting D If the actual rotation speed of the spindle motor is reduced to be lower
Signal (SSTA) than the zero-speed detection point for the stop command, SSTA = 1
occurs.
ht
Motor 0
speed
Zero-speed detection point
("0.75%of maximum speed
as the standard)
SSTA (1) (1)
(0)
372
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
of rotation commands (SFR, SRV).
om
D The minimum pulse width value of this signal is about 40 ms.
s.c
10.2.11
Speed Detecting Signal D SDTA = 1 occurs when the motor speed is lower than the speed which
re
(SDTA) is set by parameter.
D This signal is used to detect that the rotation speed has become lower
than a certain speed set such as clutch selectable speed or gear
pa
selectable speed.
D The speed detecting level can be set by parameter.
cs
It is usually set 3% of the maximum speed in the case of gear change
or 30% of the maximum speed in the case of clutch change.
.cn
SDTA
w
1 0 1
w
://
D For this signal, SDTA = 1 occurs when the absolute value of the motor
speed is reduced to be lower than the preset detection level,
irrespective of rotation commands (SFR, SV).
ht
Reference
D Sequence of the gear The gear shift in the CNC machine tool is one of the sequence controls.
shift The electric circuit signal in the sequence is used to move the spindle gear,
which is an important component of the machine. It is then necessary to
check that the spindle motor revolution is in low speed to switch the gear
safely.
The following is an example of sequence at gear shift, when the speed
detection signal (gear selectable signal) was used. This example can be
referred to when designing the magnetics sequencer.
373
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
mand of the spindle motor
om
Speed check
s.c
Shifter moves
(or zero-speed signal 1)
re
To change the gear safely, it must be checked that the spindle motor
pa
revolution is low enough before moving the shifter. If the zero-speed
signal is also applied, the safety can be doubly checked.
cs
Essential reason If the shifter moves when the spindle motor is rotating at high speed, the
gear will break.
.cn
Gear selectable
motor speed range
Spindle motor speed
w
0 min–1
w
Spindle motor
speed at gear shift
(Low speed)
w
Shifter moves
End of
gear shift
://
1
0 0
tp
374
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.2.12
Speed Arrival Signal D SARA = 1 occurs when the actual rotation speed of the spindle motor
(SARA) arrives within the range set by the speed command.
Detection range
/
om
Command
speed
Motor speed 0
s.c
1
SARA 0
re
Fig.10.2.12 (a) Speed Arrival Signal 1
pa Command
speed (2)
cs Command
speed (1)
Detection range
Motor
.cn
speed 0
1 0 1
SARA
w
when the speed is less than 10% of the maximum rotation speed, the
detection range becomes wider than the preset range.
D The standard setting at shipment is "15%. However, the detection
://
range of this speed arrival signal at low speed widens as shown in the
diagram below.
tp
ht
375
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
140
om
120 115%
100
80
85%
s.c
60
40
23% (at 80 min–1)
20
re
0
MAX Speed
Speed command
pa
Rotation speed (min–1)
SFRA(forward rotation
FIN
w
command)
1 0
SRVA(back rotation command)
w
0 1
40 ms
w
1
SSTA (zero-
://
γ1=40 ms
OFF Minimum value of
ht
pulse width
Forward rotation
Motor speed
Zero-speed
0 detection range
Back speed
Speed arrival
detection range
376
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
om
10.2.13
Load Detection Signal D Assume that the maximum output (10 V) of the load meter (LM) is
100%. When the output of the load meter reaches the parameter
s.c
(LDT1A, LDT2A)
settings (%), load detection signal is set to 1.
D Parameter settings for these signals are set independently.
D Using these signals, the PMC reduces the feedrate or stops the feed to
re
prevent the spindle from stopping when cutting overload is applied to
the spindle.
pa
D The following example shows the case in which the spindle is
controlled with two load-detection levels set.
cs
LDT2A threshold level
.cn
LDT1A threshold level
LDT1A
LDT2A
://
D When using only one load-detection level to stop the feed motor,
perform spindle control according to the specifications.
D After the speed command is changed, this signal is not output until 10
ht
377
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.2.14
Soft Start Stop Cancel D In the state that the soft start/stop cancel signal is 1, the soft start/stop
Signal (SOCAN) function is enabled and the gradient of the speed command changing
at acceleration/deceleration can be set in the following manner.
/
Soft start/stop cancel signal 1
om
0 0
External speed
s.c
command
Spindle amplifier
internal speed
re
command
pa
D If the emergency stop signal input is set to *ESPA=0, the soft start/stop
function is automatically disabled.
D The change in the speed to be specified is set by parameters. (For
cs
FS-16, this parameter is 4030.)
Setting parameter is 0, the soft start/stop function is disable.
.cn
10.2.15
D When the position of the spindle is being controlled in a mode such
w
(INTGA)
If the spindle is kept clamped with a small positional deviation, the
integration control for the velocity attempts to correct the deviation to
w
prevents excessive current from flowing into the motor when a small
positional deviation exists.
tp
378
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
Spindle synchronization
control signal
Two spindles hold a
workpiece.
Two spindles hold a
workpiece. (Chuck closed) Chuck
closed
/
Signal for controlling velocity
om
integration
INTGA
s.c
10.2.16
Spindle Override D In the normal speed control mode (including when the soft start/stop
re
Command (Function) function is used), this function overrides speed, with analog voltage
input from an external unit to the spindle amplifier.
With Analog Input
pa
Voltage (OVRA) D The override function with analog input voltage is enabled when this
signal is set to 1 in the normal speed control mode (including when the
soft start/stop function is used).
cs
D A limit (100% or 120%) of this function should be assigned to the
following parameters:
.cn
0 : 0 to 100%
1 : 0 to 120%
w
ǒOVR Ǔ
2
OVR
OVR OUT + OVR MAX IN
MAX
379
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
om
50 (60)
s.c
0
0 50 100 [%]
(60) (120)
re
Input Override (OVR IN)
pa
function.
Override
PMC NC
Ladder
w
The limit (Override 100 or 120%) for voltage input into the OVR2
terminal is 4.5 V.
Override can be set in increments of 1%.
tp
380
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
JY1
Reference
voltage
0VR1 1
Analog input 0VR2 2 Variable
0V 20
0V resistor VR
/
om
Resistor R1
Reference voltage
output: 4.75 "0.25 V
s.c
Shielded
(Spindle amplifier module) wire (Machine operator’s panel)
re
Machine Operator’s Panel
pa
D When the signal for enabling/disabling this override function is set, or
the parameter for an override limit is changed, the speed of the motor
may change substantially. Stop the motor first, and then set the signal
cs
or change the parameter.
.cn
10.2.17
Motor Power Off Signal D This signal is used to cut the power of the motor when a failure occurs
(MPOFA) while the spindle synchronization control or the gear cutting machine
w
D The power can be restored to the motor again after the motor stops
(zero speed signal, SSTA = 1).
w
D After the power of the motor is cut, all the operation modes(*1) must
be canceled for safety.
tp
After the motor stops (SSTA = 1), set the operation modes again.
When the power is cut during position control, an alarm such as
ht
381
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
Free run
/
Motor power
OFF
om
Zero speed detection signal, SSTA 1
0
1
Motor power off signal, MPOFA
0
s.c
ON
Operation mode such as SFRA
OFF
re
D Setting bit 2 of parameter 4069 (FS16) to 1 cuts off the power of the
motor as soon as the AL-24 spindle alarm (serially transmitted data
pa
error) occurs. The motor usually decelerates and stops when the alarm
occurs.
cs
10.2.18
.cn
signal
JY4
w
SPM Feedback
signal
JY2 Motor
://
tp
Power line
ht
(3) Before the power line is disconnected, the motor excitation off
affirmation (EXOFA) signal can be used to check that the motor is not
energized.
(4) Before disconnecting the feedback signal and power line, set all of the
SFRA, SRVA, ORCMA, MRDYA, and *ESPA commands to 0, and
check that the EXOFA signal is 1, then set this signal to 1. After
reconnection is completed, reset the signal to 0.
382
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
Motor speed
0 min–1
SFRA,SRVA,ORCMA, 1
/
MRDYA,*ESPA
om
0
1
SSTA
0
s.c
1
EXOFA
0
1
re
DSCNA
0
Disconnection
pa
Connection/ During
disconnection Connection cs disconnection
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
383
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.3
SPINDLE AMPLIFIER
OUTPUT SIGNALS
(α SERIES SPINDLES)
/
10.3.1
om
Speed Meter D The rotation speed of the AC spindle motor can be indicated by
Voltage Signal externally connecting a speedmeter.
A voltage (DC) proportional to the rotation speed is output,
(SM)
irrespective of the forward or reverse rotation of the motor. A +10V
s.c
is output at the maximum revolution.
+10V
re
Output
pa
voltage
cs (DC)
0V
0
(Forward rotation /reverse rotatiopn)
.cn
Motor rotation speed
384
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
Spindle amplifier
/
SM (17)
om
Speed meter voltage +
Speed meter
MIN]1
–
s.c
LM (16)
Load meter voltage +
Loadmeter
%
re
(19) –
0M
0V
pa
Fig.10.3.1 Connecting the Spindle Servo Unit to a
cs Speedmeter and a Load Meter
10.3.2
Load Meter Voltage D The load meter indicates the load factor, which is the ratio of the load
w
(LM) to the maximum output obtainable by the spindle motor at the input
voltage and working revolutions when the machine tool spindle is
w
385
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
Maximum torque
of motor
(]30min. rated
Spindle torque_120%)
motor
torque 30min. rated torque
/
[kg·m]
om
Continuous rated
0 Motor torque
speed
s.c
Constant Constant output Lowered output
re
torque region power region power region
Maximum output
10V power of motor
(]30min. rated output
pa
8.3V power 120%)
30min. rated output
power
cs
Continuous rated
output power
.cn
Motor speed
D The relation between each spindle motor output and the indicating
voltage of the load meter is as shown in Table 10.3.2 (a), assuming
w
approximately from Table 10.3.2 (a). For the indication of the load
meter in this case, refer to examples shown in Table 10.3.2 (b).
D Machine tool builders are requested to prepare a load meter (DC
://
Example)
DC voltmeter LM-80 made by KUWANO DENKI
D Use a 2-core shielded cable.
386
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
0.55 4.2 100 100
om
α0.5 1.1 8.3 200 E 200
1.32 10.0 240 240
1.5 5.7 100 102.2
α1
α1,
2.2 8.3 147 A 150
α1/15000
2.64 10.0 176 180
s.c
1.1 2.5 100 100
α1.5 3.7 8.4 338 D 338
4.4 10.0 400 400
2.2 5.0 100 101
re
α2
α2,
3.7 8.4 166 C 166
α2/15000
4.4 10.0 200 200
pa
3.7 5.6 100 100.8
α3
α3,
5.5 8.3 148 A 150
α3/12000
6.6 10.0 178 180
5.5 6.1 100 109.8
α6
cs
α6,
7.5 8.3 136 A 150
α6/12000
9.0 10.0 164 180
7.5 5.7 100 102.6
.cn
α8
α8,
11.0 8.3 146 A 150
α8/8000
13.2 10.0 175 180
11 6.1 100 109.8
α12
α12,
15 8.3 136 A 150
α12/8000
w
α18/8000
26.4 10.0 142 150
22.0 7.0 100 105
α22
α22,
://
NOTE
Accuracy of the load meter voltage depends upon the
speed used or the input voltage. The maximum deviation
is approximately ±15%.
387
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
Motor Models
White Band Yellow Band Red Band
ÅÅÅ
Color α1, α1/15000, α3, α3/12000, α6,
Division α6/12000, α8, α8/8000, α12,
/
Indica-
αP22/8000, αP50, α6HV, α8HV,
om
A tion 0 50 100 150 180
% α12HV
Corres-
pon-
dence
to 0V 5.55V 8.3V 10.0V
s.c
voltage
ÅÅÅ
Color White Band Band Band
re
Division α22, α22/8000, α30, α30/6000,
ÅÅÅ
α40, αP15, αP15/8000, αP18,
Indica- αP18/8000, αP30, αP30/6000,
pa
tion 0 50 100 125 150 αP40, αP40/6000, α15HV,
B % α18HV, α22HV, α30HV, α40HV,
Corres- α60HV
pon-
cs
dence
to 0V 6.66V 8.3V 10.0V
voltage
.cn
ÅÅÅ
Color White Band Yellow Band Band
Division
ÅÅÅ
w
Indica-
C tion 0 50 100 150 166 200
w
Corres- %
pon-
dence
w
ÅÅÅ
Division
tp
D
Indica-
tion 0 100 200 ÅÅÅ
300 338 400
ht
Corres- %
pon-
dence
to 0V 5.0V 8.3V 10.0V
voltage
388
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
Type Type
Indication of load meter Remarks
ÅÅÅ
Color White Band Yellow Band Band α0.5
Division
ÅÅÅ
/
Indica-
om
E tion 0 50 100 150 200 240
%
Corres-
pon-
dence
to 0V 4.2V 8.3V 10.0V
s.c
voltage
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
389
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.4 The abbreviations used in this manual stand for the following:
SPINDLE CONTROL
SIGNALS (αC SERIES FS0 : Series 0-MC or 0-TC
FS0–TT Head 2 : Head 2 of Series 0-TTC
SPINDLE) FS15 : Series 15
FS16 : Series 16, Series 18, Series 20, Series 21
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
390
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.4.1
Spindle Control DI
Signal (PMC to CNC)
/
om
FS0 FS0–TT FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
HEAD2 (Note 2)
G229 G1429 G227 G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA
G230 G1430 G226 G071 *ESPA ARSTA
s.c
G231 G1431 G229 G072 OVRA INDXA (*)
G232 G1432 G228 G073 MPOFA
G124 G1324 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
G125 G1325 G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
re
G024 RISGN RI12 RI11 RI10 RI09 RI08
G025 RI07 RI06 RI05 RI04 RI03 RI02 RI01 RI00
pa
G110 G1310 G231 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
G111 G1311 G230 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08
G120 G1320 *SSTP SOR SAR FIN
G005
cs FIN
G029 *SSTP SOR SAR
G004 FIN
.cn
G123 G1323 GR2 GR1
(Note 1)
G118 G1318 GR2 GR1
(Note 1)
G026 GS4 GS2 GS1
w
NOTE
tp
391
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
G236 G1435 G236 G077 MPOFB
om
G112 G1316 G239 G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
G113 G1312 G238 G081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
G034 R0812 R0712 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2
G035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2
s.c
G232 RISGNB RIB12 RIB11 RIB10 RIB9 RIB8
G233 RIB7 RIB6 RIB5 RIB4 RIB3 RIB2 RIB1 RIB0
G106 G1306 M2R08I M2R07I M2R06I M2R05I M2R04I M2R03I M2R02I M2R01I
re
G107 G1307 M2SIND M2SSIN M2SGN M2R12I M2R11I M2R10I M2R09I
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
392
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
opment)
1 : Limits the torque to the value
om
specified with the parameter.
Specify one of the following conditions according to the
clutch or gear status.
Used to select a spindle control parameter.
s.c
CTH1A, B Clutch or gear CTH1 CTH2
CTH2A, B signal 0 0 : High gear
0 1 : Medium high gear
1 0 : Medium low gear
re
1 1 : Low gear
Specifies the rotation direction when the spindle motor is
Reverse rota- viewed from the shaft.
pa
SRVA, B
tion command SRV SFR
0 0 Stop
: Sto
0 1 : Normal rotation
cs
Normal rotation (CCW: Counterclockwise)
SFRA, B
command 1 0 : Reverse rotation (CW: Clockwise)
1 1 : Stop
.cn
Used for spindle orientation control.
Orientation 0:–
ORCMA, B
command
1 : Spindle orientation control is performed.
Used for motor exectation ON and OFF of spindle amplifi-
w
”1”
”0” the signal is changed from 1 to 0.
Orientation stop Used for orientation in which the stop position is specified
position change externally.
ROTAA, B 0 : Counterclockwise (CCW)
rotational direc-
tion command 1 : Clockwise (CW)
393
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
Analog over- 0 : Analog override is disabled.
OVRA, B
om
ride command 1 : Analog override is enabled.
Motor power
MPOFA, B 1 : Motor power stop
stop signal
R12I - R01I
s.c
SGN, SSIN
Spindle speed
SIND Specifies a spindle speed command.
command
RI12 - RI00
RISGN
re
Stop position
command for
SHA11 - SHA00 The stop position is specified for the external setting type
spindle orienta-
SHB11 - SHB00 spindle orientation with the position coder.
pa
tion with a posi-
tion coder
Spindle stop 0 : Velocity command voltage = 0
*SSTP
cs
signal 1 : Velocity command voltage = specified value
Spindle
1 : Outputs the velocity command specified with the
SOR orientation in
parameter.
.cn
progress
Specified
1 : The spindle speed has reached the specified
SAR speed reached
speed.
signal
w
M function
FIN completion sig- 1 : The M function is completed.
nal
w
Gear select
GR1, 2 Used for velocity command calculation under constant
signal (T-sys-
GS1, 2, 4 surface speed control
w
tem)
Spindle speed
synchroniza-
://
tion control
SPSYC 1 : Spindle speed synchronization control
command (Un-
der develop-
tp
ment)
Spindle phase
synchroniza-
ht
tion control
SPPHS 1 : Spindle phase synchronization control
command (Un-
der develop-
ment)
RGTP Rigid tapping
1 : Rigid tapping control
RGTAP command
394
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.4.2
Spindle Control DO
Signals (CNC to PMC)
/
om
(1) 1st Spindle Signal Address
s.c
F282 F1482 F228 F046
F283 F1483 F231 F047
F172 F1372 F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O
F173 F1373 F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O
re
F010 RO15 RO14 RO13 RO12 RO11 RO10 RO09 RO08
(F006)
F011 RO07 RO06 RO05 RO04 RO03 RO02 RO01 RO00
pa
(F007)
F150 F1350 F007 SF MF
F008 SF MF
F149 F1349 F001
cs ENB
F164 F1364 F038 ENB3 ENB2
F042 SPCO SPBO SPAO SPAL
.cn
F154 F1354 F035 SPAL
F152 F1352 F034 GR30 GR20 GR10
F001 CSS
F002 CSS
w
F020 F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24
F021 F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16
w
F022 F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08
F023 F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00
://
F040 RTAP
F012 F041 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR09 AR08
F013 F040 AR07 AR06 AR05 AR04 AR03 AR02 AR01 AR00
tp
NOTE
The addresses in parentheses are used for 15–TT.
395
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
/
om
Symbol Signal Description
Output when a spindle alarm occurs.
ALMA, B Alarm signal 0 : Normal state
s.c
1 : Alarm state
Output when the output frequency of actual spindle amplifier
module becomes lower than the frequency stop detection
Frequency stop level.
re
SSTA, B
detection signal 0 : Rotation state
1 : Frequency stop
pa
Output when the output frequency of actual spindle amplifier
Frequency module does not exceed the preset amplifier frequency.
SDTA, B
detection signal 0 : Higher than the specified speed
cs
1 : Less than preset frequency
Output when the output frequency of actual spindle amplifier
module reaches the preset range.
.cn
Frequency
SARA, B 0 : Specified speed has yet to be reached
match signal
1 : Frequency match
Output when the detected load is greater than the specified
w
Torque limiting
TLMA, B signal (Under 1 : The limit is applied to the torque.
w
development)
Output when orientation was specified and the spindle has
Orientation stopped in the specified range.
ORARA, B
://
complete signal
1 : Orientation completed
R12O-R01O Spindle speed
Outputs the spindle speed command.
tp
RO15-RO00 command
M function
MF 1 : The M code is effective.
strobe signal
ht
Spindle func-
SF tion strobe sig- 1 : The S code is effective.
nal
Spindle enable 0 : The velocity command indicates 0.
ENB
signal 1 : The velocity command indicates other than 0.
Spindle fluctua-
1 : The actual speed of the spindle is out of the allowed
SPAL tion alarm sig-
range.
nal
Spindle speed
SPAO,
override check
SPBO SPCO
signal
Gear select
GR10, 20, 30
signal
396
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
MSPSYC
(Under devel-
om
opment)
Spindle phase
synchroniza-
FSPPH
tion control sig- 1 : Under spindle phase synchronization control
MSPPHS
nal (Under de-
s.c
velopment)
Spindle syn-
chronization
SYCAL
control alarm 1 : Spindle synchronization control alarm
re
SPSYAL
signal (Under
development)
pa
Spindle func-
S31 - S00 Sxxx
tion code signal
Actual spindle
AR15 - AR00
speed signal
cs
SLDM15 - Load meter
0 to 32767 (+10 V)
SLDM00 data
.cn
SSPD15 - Motor frequen-
0 to 16383 (maximum motor speed)
SSPD00 cy data
SSPA07 - Spindle alarm
Alarm number
SPMA00 data
w
Rigid tapping–
RTAP in–progress 1 : Rigid tapping in progress
signal
w
w
10.4.3
D Spindle motor and spindle amplifier module enter the operable state
://
397
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.4.4
Machine Ready Signal D The table contents result from the parameter setting.
(MRDYA) Parameter setting
FS0 : 6501#0
Mode
FS12 : 3001#0 Contents
/
om
FS16 : 4001#0
Machine ready signal is not used.
At this time, the spindle motor enters the op-
A 0
erable state only when emergency stop sig-
nal is input.
s.c
Intercepts power by
Uses the machine
turning off the tran-
ready signal to
B 1 sistor excitation sig-
create operable state
re
nal for the inverter
by double signal.
with MRDYA = 0.
pa
Mode A Used when minimizing the input signal.
cs
Mode B
1 During the automatic tool change (ATC) orientation operation, in a
machine where the spindle motor is restrained by the tool unclamp
.cn
signal,there are cases where the load meter indication becomes large
and a large motor current flows by a slight slip from the orientation
stop position.
In order to prevent this, set MRDYA = 0 and release the orientation
w
orientation state.
2 Regarding the purpose of the above described 1, if the orientation
w
Timing chart
tp
1
Orientation command 0
ht
CRCMA 1
Orientation complete signal 0
ORARA
Pulling off Attach-
Tool change operation Tool ment of
Tool catch
move new tool Detachment
Excitation interception
398
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.4.5
Normal Rotation D When the following four conditions hold, the spindle motor starts a
Command Signal normal rotation corresponding to the speed command (positive value).
(SFRA) During acceleration/deceleration (before a specified speed is reached),
the motor speed increases or decreases according to an
/
acceleration/deceleration constant specified in the parameters listed
om
below. The acceleration/deceleration constant can take four different
values depending on the clutch/gear signals (CTH1 and CTH2).
- Emergency stop signal *ESPA is 1
- Machine ready signal MRDYA is 1
s.c
- Normal rotation command signal SFRA is 1
- Contact signal ESP is connected to 24 V (at CX4 of the PSM)
re
Parameter DI signal
CTH CTH Contents
FS0 FS15 FS16
1A 2A
pa
An acceleration/deceleration
6569 3069
4069 0 0 constant is specified. It can
6709 3209
take four different values de-
cs pending on the CTH1 and
6570 3070 CTH2 signals.
4070 0 1 Unit : 1rpm/sec
6710 3210
(Series16: 10 rpm unit when
.cn
4006#bit2=1)
6571 3071 Data range : 0 to 32767
4071 1 0
6711 3211 (Motor does not rotate when 0 is
set)
Standard setting : Depends on
w
6572 3072
4072 1 1 motor model
6712 3212
(Initial setting=900)
w
399
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.4.6
Reverse Rotation D When the following four conditions hold, the spindle motor starts a
Command Signal reverse rotation by the positive speed command.
(SRVA) During acceleration/deceleration (before a specified speed is reached),
the motor speed increases or decreases according to an acceleration
/
/deceleration constant specified in parameters. See Section 10.4.5 for
om
detailed descriptions about acceleration/deceleration constants.
- Emergency stop signal *ESPA is 1
- Machine ready signal MRDYA is 1
- Reverse rotation command signal SRVA is 1
s.c
- Contact signal ESP is connected to 24 V (at CX4 of the PSM)
D While SRVA=1, the spindle motor rotates in a clockwise direction
(CW) looked at from the shaft side according to the speed command
re
(Positive value).
pa
cs
.cn
10.4.7
Torque Limiting D The torque restriction (torque limit) is used in order to rotate the
w
Command Signal spindle motor to temporarily reduce the spindle motor output torque.
(TLMHA) (Under D The torque limit value change with parameter (Series 16 : PRM4025)
://
and DI signal.
development)
Torque limit command
Torque limit value
tp
TLMHA
0 Without torque limit
1 Limit to the parameter value
ht
10.4.8
Alarm Reset Signal D After removing the various alarm causes such as motor overheating,
(ARSTA) excess speed deviation, short-circuiting, excess speed, excess voltage,
excess current, excess load, and voltage drop, if the alarm reset signal
is input, the alarm is released and the usable state occurs.
D Even if this signal is inputted when there is no alarm, it is disabled.
D This signal can reset only alarms related to the spindle amplifier
module. It cannot reset alarms related to the power supply module
(such as DC link overvoltage or undervoltage); such alarms are reset
by turning off the power.
400
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.4.9
Spindle Alarm Signal D If the state occurs in which the spindle motor operation cannot be
(ALMA) continuously executed, the power to the spindle motor will become
OFF and the spindle motor will be stopped.
D At the same time the alarm signal ALMA = 1 occurs. Regarding the
/
alarm contents, confirm by the display section of the spindle amplifier.
om
D Set the command signal to the spindle amplifier (speed command,
forward/reverse rotation command, torgue limit command, spindle
orientation command ) in the reset state using the alarm signal output.
If it is not in the reset state (state that signal from PMC is all clear),
s.c
when the alarm on the spindle amplifier is released there is a danger
that the spindle motor may rotate.
D Because the spindle motor enters the power OFF, coasting operates at
re
the same time as the alarm signal is output, it is necessary to set in an
emergency stop state and to set the feedhold state at the CNC or
magnetics cabinet side.
pa
D When the alarm state has occurred, ALMA = 1 occurs.
While the alarm signal is 1, the spindle motor enters coasting operates
state regardless of any command from the outside.
cs
D The relationship between the alarm signal and the alarm reset signal
is as shown in Fig. 10.4.9.
.cn
Speed command
Forward rotation/back
rotation command
w
SFRA (SRVA)
Spindle control
input signal Spindle orientatin
1
w
commandORCMA
0 0
ARSTA
w
(Alarm reset) 1
0
Spindle control ALMA
://
output signal
(Alarm)
Remove the alarm cause
tp
(Stop)
401
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.4.10
Frequency–stop D If the output frequency of the actual spindle amplifier module is
Detecting Signal reduced to be lower than the frequency stop detection point for the stop
command, SSTA = 1 occurs.
(SSTA)
/
om
Output 0
frequency
Frequency stop detection point
s.c
("0.75%of maximum
frequency as the standard)
SSTA (1) (1)
(0)
re
Fig.10.4.10 Signal Indicating that the frequency dropped to
close to zero
pa
D The frequency stop detection point is 0.75% of the maximum
frequency (standard initial setting for the parameter).
cs
In other words, the frequency stop detection signal becomes SSTA =
1 when the frequency is lower than the detection level.
D This signal is output when the above condition is satisfied, irrespective
.cn
402
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.4.11
Frequency Detecting D SDTA = 1 occurs when the frequency is lower than the one which is
Signal (SDTA) set by parameter.
D This signal is used to detect that the output frequency has become
lower than a certain frequency set such as clutch selectable speed or
/
gear selectable speed.
om
D The frequency detecting level can be set by parameter.
D For this signal, SDTA = 1 occurs when the absolute value of the output
frequency is reduced to be lower than the preset detection level,
irrespective of rotation commands (SFRA, SRVA).
s.c
Output frequency
re
0min–1
pa
SDTA
1 0 1
cs
Fig.10.4.11 (a) Speed Detection Signal
.cn
Reference
w
D Sequence of the gear The gear shift in the CNC machine tool is one of the sequence controls.
shift The electric circuit signal in the sequence is used to move the spindle gear,
w
Speed check
403
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
To change the gear safely, it must be checked that the spindle motor speed
is low enough before moving the shifter. If the frequency stop signal is
also applied, the safety can be doubly checked.
/
gear will break.
om
Gear selectable output
frequency range
Output frequency
s.c
0 rpm
Spindle motor
re
speed at gear shift
(Low speed)
Shifter End of
pa
moves gear shift
1
0
cs 0
Frequency detection 1
signal (gear selectable signal) 0
.cn
10.4.12
Frequency Arrival D SARA = 1 occurs when output frequency of the actual spindle motor
w
Signal (SARA) module arrives within the range set by the frequency command.
://
Output
frequency 0
ht
1
SARA 0
404
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
om
115%
100
85%
s.c
23% (at 80min–1)
re
Maximum frequency
pa
Fig.10.4.12 (b) Detection Range of the Speed-Arrival Signal
D The PMC can reduce the feedrate or stop the feed to prevent the spindle
from stopping when cutting overload is applied to the spindle by using
w
this signal.
D This signal is not output for 10 seconds (by PRM4082 of series 16)
w
405
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.4.14
Speed Integral Control D During spindle position control (such as spindle orientation control),
Signal (INTGA) the spindle may be clamped when a brake is applied. If the spindle is
clamped with a small displacement remaining, an excessive current
may flow through the motor in order to eliminate the displacement by
/
performing speed integral control. In this case, this signal can be used
om
to nullify speed integral control so as to prevent an excessive current
from flowing through the motor.
s.c
re
Spindle position control
pa
Spindle clamped
cs
Speed integral control signal INTGA
.cn
by two spindles
Chucks closed
Workpiece held by two spindles (chucks closed)
tp
ht
406
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.4.15
Spindle Analog D This function allows an analog voltage input to the spindle amplifier
Override Command to apply an override to the frequency command.
(OVRA) D The analog override function is valid only in the normal control mode.
D The analog override function is valid when this signal is 1.
/
om
D The following parameter sets the upper limit of the analog override.
The input voltage value that corresponds with the frequency of the
upper limit of analog override is 4.5 V across OVR2 and 0V. (An input
more than 4.5 V does not make excess of the maximum frequency).
s.c
Even if an overridden frequency command exceeds the value set with
the max. frequency parameter, the frequency is clamped to the
maximum frequency.
re
(Parameter No.) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FS0 FS15 FS16
1st Spindle : 6506 3006 4006 ALGOVR
pa
2nd Spindle: 6646 3146
Analog
Machine input Spindle
operator’s OVR1 amplifier
panel OVR2 module
w
w
Override
valid/invalid
OVRA
w
PMC CNC
://
Machine operator’s
JY1
panel
ht
407
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
10.4.16
Motor Power Off Signal D This signal is used to cut the power of the motor when a failure occurs
(MPOFA) while the spindle synchronization control or the gear cutting machine
is operating. When the power is cut, the motor runs free.
D This signal only cuts the power of the motor.
/
D Supply the motor with power after enough time has passed to
om
completely stop the motor.
If the signal is released, the power cannot be restored to the motor
while the motor is operating (SSTA = 0).
D After the power of the motor is cut, all the operation modes(*1) must
s.c
be canceled for safety.
After the motor stops (SSTA = 1), set the operation modes again.
re
When the power is cut during position control, an alarm such as
excessive deviation may occur because position control remains
effective.
pa
(*1) Example of operation modes:
- Forward rotation command (SFRA)
- Reverse rotation command (SRVA)
cs
- Spindle orientation (ORCMA)
- Spindle synchronization control (SPSYC, SPPHS)
.cn
Motor power ON
OFF
w
1
Motor power off signal, MPOFA
0
ON
tp
D Setting bit 2 of parameter 4009 (series 16) to 1 cuts off the power of
the motor as soon as the AL-24 spindle alarm (serially transmitted data
error) occurs. The motor usually decelerates and stops when the alarm
occurs.
408
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
10.5
SPINDLE AMPLIFIER
OUTPUT SIGNALS
(αC SERIES SPINDLE)
/
om
10.5.1
Output Frequency D The output frequency of the AC spindle motor can be indicated by
Display Signal (SM) externally connecting a speedmeter.
s.c
(Usable as Load Meter A voltage (DC) proportional to the rotation speed is output,
irrespective of the forward or reverse rotation of the motor. A +10V
Voltage Signal
is output at the maximum frequency.
According to
re
Parameter Setting)
+10V
paOutput
voltage
cs
(DC)
.cn
0V
0min–1 Max. output frequency
(DC voltmeter)
- One-sided deflection DC voltmeter
w
409
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
Frequency meter
Spindle amp module (or load meter)
Shield
JY1
17
/
SM
19
om
0M
20
0V
s.c
re
10.5.2
pa
Load Meter D When the SM terminal output is used for load meter by parameter the
Voltage (LM) (Either rated input voltage is applied, the frequency-to-spindle motor output
relation, frequency-to-torque relation and frequency-to-load meter
cs
Speedometer Data or
relation are as shown in Figs. 10.5.2 (a), 10.5.2 (b), and 10.5.2 (c).
Load Meter Data is
D The load meter indicates the load factor, which is the ratio of the load
Selected According to
.cn
to the maximum output of the spindle motor.
Parameter Setting)
Constant Constant output Lowered output
torque region power region power region
w
P Maximum output
power of motor
(]30min. rated
w
output power
power
[kW] Continuous rated
://
output power
0 (Base Maximum frequency (Maximum
frequency) of constant power frequency)
tp
region
Maximum torque
of motor
(]30min. rated
Spindle torque 120%)
motor
torque 30min. rated torque
[kg·m]
Continuous rated
0 torque
410
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
/
Load
meter power
om
power Continuous rated
output power
s.c
Fig.10.5.2 (c) Voltage Used for Operating a Load Meter
D The relation between each spindle motor output and the indicating
re
voltage of the load meter is as shown in Table 10.5.2 (a), assuming
that the continuous rated output of the spindle motor is 100%.
pa
D Three types of indications of the load meter may be considered
approximately from Table 10.5.2 (a). For the indication of the load
meter in this case, refer to examples shown in Table 10.5.2 (b).
cs
D The load meter (DC voltmeter) being used shall satisfy the following
requirements:
D One–side deflection DC voltmeter
.cn
D 10 VDC full–scale
D Internal resistance of 10kΩ or higher
Example)
w
411
10. INTERFACE SIGNALS B–65162E/03
Indicating
g Ratio asum- Example of load meter
Output voltage of ing that con- Type of
Model Ratio to full
(kw) load meter (V) tinuous rating applicable
(Note) is 100% (%) scale (%)
load meter
/
1.5 5.7 100 102.2
om
αC1 2.2 8.3 147 A 150
2.64 10.0 176 180
1.1 2.5 100 100
αC1.5 3.7 8.4 338 D 338
4.4 10.0 400 400
s.c
2.2 5.0 100 101
αC2 3.7 8.3 166 C 166
4.4 10.0 200 200
3.7 5.6 100 100.8
re
αC3 5.5 8.3 148 A 150
6.6 10.0 178 180
5.5 6.1 100 109.8
pa
αC6 7.5 8.3 136 A 150
9.0 10.0 164 180
7.5 5.7 100 102.6
αC8
cs11.0 8.3 146 A 150
13.2 10.0 175 180
11.0 6.1 100 109.8
.cn
αC12 15.0 8.3 136 A 150
18.0 10.0 164 180
15.0 6.7 100 100.5
αC15 18.5 8.3 124 B 125
w
NOTE
Accuracy of the load meter voltage depends upon the
frequency used or the input voltage. The maximum
tp
412
B–65162E/03 10. INTERFACE SIGNALS
ÅÅÅ
Color
Division αC6, αC8,
ÅÅÅ
αC12
/
Indica-
om
A tion 0 50 100 150 180
%
Corres-
pon-
dence
to 0V 5.55V 8.3V 10.0V
s.c
voltage
ÅÅÅ
Color Band Band
re
αC22
Division
Indica-
ÅÅÅ
pa
tion 0 50 100 125 150
B %
Corres-
pon-
dence
cs
to 0V 6.66V 8.3V 10.0V
voltage
.cn
ÅÅÅ
Color White Band Yellow Band Band
Division
ÅÅÅ
w
Indica-
C tion 0 50 100 150 166 200
w
Corres- %
pon-
dence
w
ÅÅÅ
Division
tp
D
Indica-
tion 0 100 200 300 338ÅÅÅ 400
ht
Corres- %
pon-
dence
to 0V 5.0V 8.3V 10.0V
voltage
413
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
414
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1
SPINDLE
ORIENTATION
/
om
11.1.1
Position Coder Methed
Spindle Orientation (αC
Series Spindle)
s.c
11.1.1.1 Unlike conventional mechanical spindle orientation using a stopper, etc.,
re
General the spindle orientation stops the spindle at a fixed position by directly
feeding back position signals from the position coder directly connected
pa
to the machine spindle.
cs
11.1.1.2
Features
.cn
Mechanical parts are not This orientation is accomplished simply by connecting the position coder
required. to the spindle without any need of mechanical orientation mechanism
w
Reduction of orientation Since the spindle motor connected to the spindle is utilized and the
time orientation can be performed directly from high-speed rotation,
w
Simplified power This sequence consists of the spindle orientation command, its
://
magnetic sequence completion signal, spindle clutch/gear only without any need of other
control signals. Neither orientation speed command sequence nor torque limit
command sequence is needed.
tp
High reliability Electrical system assures improved reliability without any damage to the
ht
High accuracy and The spindle orientation accuracy and rigidity are enough to execute
rigidity automatic tool exchange (ATC).
Positioning of workpiece Workpieces can be positioned to arrange their loading and unloading
directions in lathe.
Reduction of the number Since the spindle orientation can be done in the same direction as the
of processes in boring rotating direction of the spindle when boring ends, workpieces will not
be damaged by tool blades.
Since these tool blades can be mounted or dismounted in a fixed direction
with reference to the workpieces, programming is easy.
415
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.1.3
Configuration and
Order Drawing Number
/
om
s.c
Spindle Gear or belt
amplifier
(SPM)
CNC Communica- Spindle
re
tion cable motor
JA7B
Spindle
ÅÅ
JY2 Tool
pa
JY4 Speed
ÅÅ
cs feedback
Spindle
Å
Spindle Tool
://
amplifier
(SPM)
CNC Communica-
tion cable
tp
JA7B Built–in
spindle motor
JY2
Speed and
ht
position
feedback Bz sensor
Power
magnetic
sequence
control circuit
416
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Spindle
/
amplifier
om
(SPM)
CNC Communica- Spindle mo-
tion cable tor with MZ
sensor
JA7B
Spindle
ÅÅ
JY2
s.c
Tool
Speed and
ÅÅ
position
feedback
re
Connected directly, gear or
Power timing belt (1:1)
magnetic
pa
sequence
control circuit cs
(4) Orientation Using Bz Sensor on the Spindle
.cn
w
CNC Spindle
motor
w
ÅÅ
JY5 Spindle
Tool
Speed
ÅÅ
JY2
://
feedback
tp
417
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.1.4
Specifications
(1) Detector
/
Detector Description
om
Connected to a spindle on a one–to–one basis
(directly, or via a gear or timing belt)
Position coder
1024 pulses/rev (phase A signal, phase B signal)
1 pulse/rev (one–rotation signal)
s.c
MZ sensor
BZ sensor Connected to a spindle on a one–to–one basis
(Built–in sensor)
re
position coder (directly, or via a gear or timing belt)
High–resolution
pa
magnetic pulse Connected to a spindle on a one–to–one basis
coder
cs
(2) Detection Unit and Positioning Repeatability
Detector Number of feedback signals Detection unit Positioning repeatability (Note)
.cn
Position coder 1024p/rev 0.088_ "0.2_
64λ/rev 0.167_ "0.4_
128λ/rev 0.167_ "0.4_
MZ sensor
w
High–resolution
g magnetic
g pulse
coder 256λ/rev 0.088_ "0.2_
384λ/rev 0.088_ "0.2_
tp
NOTE
ht
418
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.1.5
Signal Explanation
(1) DI Signals (PMC to CNC)
/
om
First spindle control input signal
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
: G229 G227 G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
s.c
: G231 G229 G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
: G110 G231 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
re
: G111 G230 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA01 SHA00
pa
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
: G223 G235 G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
cs NRROB ROTAB INDXB
: G235 G237 G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB
: G112 G239 G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
.cn
Details of signals
(b) Orientation (fixed position stop) command (ORCMA)
w
D When this signal is specified as ”1” while the spindle is rotating, the
rotation decelerates immediately and the spindle stops at the preset
://
position.
D When the orientation command is issued, set the spindle
forward/reverse rotation command (SFRA, SRVA) to ”0” for safety.
tp
By means of this, the spindle will not start to rotate even in the unlikely
event ORCMA becomes ”0” during tool change.
ht
419
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
CTH1A CTH2A
0 0 : HIGH GEAR
/
0 1 : MEDIUM HIGH GEAR
om
1 0 : MEDIUM LOW GEAR
1 1 : LOW GEAR
(d) Command for changing the stop position in spindle orientation (INDXA)
D This command is used when the orientation position is changed again
s.c
immediately after spindle orientation was just performed.
This command is valid when the spindle orientation command
(ORCMA) is issued.
re
D Changing this signal from 1 to 0 orients the spindle within one rotation
to a new position (absolute position within one rotation) specified by
new stop position data (SHA11 to SHA00).
pa
D The direction of spindle rotation is specified by the direction
command for the shorter route (NRROA) or the command specifying
cs
the direction of rotation (ROTTA).
D This function is valid when the CNC parameter corresponding to the
spindle orientation function in which the stop position is specified
.cn
externally is set.
(e) Direction command for the shorter route when the stop position changes in spindle orientation (NRROA)
D This command is used for specifying the direction of rotation,
w
(f) Command specifying the direction of rotation when the stop position changes in spindle orientation (ROTAA)
D This command is used for specifying the direction of rotation when the
tp
420
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
(g) Spindle orientation command in which the stop position is specified externally (SHA11 to SHA00)
D This command is used for specifying a stop position with an absolute
position within one rotation in the following equation:
ȍ (2i
11
Stop position (degrees) + 360 P i)
4096
i+0
/
where
om
Pi = 0 when SHAi = 0
Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1
D When this command is used, the stop position parameters in spindle
orientation with a position coder (In case of Series 16 : No. 4031) are
s.c
invalid.
re
(a) Signal addresses
pa
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
: F281 F229 F405 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
cs
Second spindle control output signals
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.cn
: F285 F245 F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
near the preset fixed position (for example, within "1°), it becomes
”1”.
w
421
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
Zero-speed detection command
om
Spindle speed Within "1° of the stop
position
s.c
Chattering
Orientation completion
sequence ORARA
re
ATC arm operation
start signal
pa
0.1 to 0.5 sec
D This signal will become ”0” during a tool change if the spindle is
cs
pushed away from the preset position by external force.
In this case, design a power magnetic sequence so that the tool change
operation is interrupted.
.cn
422
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.1.6
Sequences
(1) Orientation Command while Stopping
/
1
Orientation command
om
ORCMA 0 0
Stop
CW direction
s.c
Motor speed Stop
CCW direction Note
15 to 20 ms
re
1
Orientation completion signal
pa
ORARA 0 0
cs
ATC operation Start Completion
ATC
operation
.cn
NOTE
The spindle motor rotation direction can be changed by setting.
w
423
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Rotation command 1
SFRA, SRVA (Configuration at
external sequence) 0
1
Orientation command
/
ORCMA 0 0
om
Deceleration
High-speed
CW direction
Motor speed
s.c
15 to 20 ms
CCW direction
1
re
Orientation completion signal 0 0
ORARA
ATC operation
pa Start Completion
cs ATC
operation
.cn
(3) When Stop Position External Setting Type Spindle Orientation Function is Used
D Sequence
w
t t t t t t
Spindle orientation stop posi-
tion command SHA00-11
w
t t
Spindle orientation stop position (Note 1)
://
Stop
D Stopping in a specified position through a normal orientation
command
424
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
D With the spindle orientation function in which a stop position is
om
externally specified, if the data of SHA11-00 (spindle orientation stop
position command) is decided in a second or later stop operation, the
motor stops at a position ([one-rotation signal position] + [data
specified by SHA11-00] + [PRM4077]) shifted by the value seized on
s.c
a rising edge of ORCMA (spindle orientation command).
Stop and
D Stopping in a specified position using the stop position external setting
re
type spindle orientation function
D The rotating direction of the spindle motor is specified by the
following command: (1) rotating direction command when spindle
pa
orientation stop position is changed (ROTA) or, (2) shortcut command
when spindle orientation stop position is changed (NRROA).
cs
NOTE
The spindle orientation stop position change command
.cn
INDXA is valid only when the spindle orientation command
ORCMA is set to 1.
w
11.1.1.7
w
The table below lists the parameters related to spindle orientation using
Parameters a position coder. Refer to the Parameter Descriptions for details.
w
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
://
0080 5609 3702 Whether to use the spindle orientation function of external stop position
#3,#2 #3,#2 #3,#2 setting type. (#2: First spindle, #3: Second spindle)
ht
425
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
Gear ratio setting
6556 to 3056 to 4056 to Gear ratio between the spindle and motor
6559 3059 4059 (selected by DI signals CTH1A and CTH2A)
/
Setting of a rotation direction at orientation time
om
6503 3003 4003
Rotational direction for spindle orientation
#3, 2 #3, 2 #3, 2
Setting of a stop position shift amount
Stop position for position coder method orientation
s.c
6531 3031 4031 (This parameter is invalid when the function for externally setting the
stop position or externally setting incremental commands is used.)
6577 3077 4077 Shift of spindle orientation stop position
re
Setting related to gain at orientation time
6560 to 3060 to 4060 to Position gain for orientation
pa
6563 3063 4063 (selected by DI signals CTH1A and CTH2A)
6542 3042 4042 Velocity loop proportional gain for orientation
6543 3043 4043 (selected by DI signal CTH1A)
cs
6550 3050 4050 Velocity loop integral gain for orientation
6551 3051 4051 (selected by DI signal CTH1A)
.cn
6564 3064 4064 Change rate for the position gain after spindle orientation
Setting related to gain at orientation time (Continued)
6584 3084 4084
w
6575 3075 4075 Detection level for the spindle orientation completion signal
Detection level for the approach signal for position coder method
://
6517#7 3017#7 4017#7 Shorter route function for orientation from stop state
ht
11.1.1.8
High–speed
Orientation
(1) Overview
426
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
NOTE
1 This function can also be used for spindle orientation of
external stop position setting type and incremental
command type.
2 This function cannot be used for orientation during spindle
synchronization.
/
om
(2) System configuration
The high–speed orientation function can be used with the following
s.c
system configurations:
1) System in which a position coder connected to a spindle on a
one–to–one basis is installed
2) Motor system built into a spindle
re
3) System in which a motor with a built–in MZ sensor is connected
to a spindle on a one–to–one basis
pa
NOTE
This function cannot be used with an orientation system of
cs
external one–rotation signal type that uses a proximity
switch.
.cn
(3) Signal
See Section 11.1.1.5.
w
Motor speed
Upper orientation speed limit
427
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
The speed is reduced according to the motor deceleration time
om
constant set with parameter No. 4320 to No. 4323 (FS16).
When the speed becomes equal to or less than a value calculated
internally by software, the position loop is controlled according to
the orientation–time position gain set with parameter No. 4060 to
s.c
No. 4063 (FS16).
When the positional deviation becomes equal to or less than the
number or pulses set with parameter No. 4075 (FS16) for
re
specifying an orientation completion signal level, the spindle
orientation completion signal (ORARA) is output.
pa
2) When orientation operation is started from a speed between the lower
orientation speed limit and higher orientation speed limit
cs
.cn
Motor speed
w
://
tp
ht
428
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
om
s.c
ORCMA (orientation command)
re
pa
Motor speed
cs
.cn
w
429
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
6518#6 3018#6 4018#6 High–speed orientation function
om
Whether to perform speed command compensa-
6518#5 3018#5 4018#5
tion at high–speed orientation
6538 3038 4038 Upper spindle orientation speed limit
6564 3064 4064 Deceleration time constant limit ratio
s.c
6284 3464 4320 Motor deceleration time constant (Parameters
to to to are selected by input signals CTH1A and
6287 3467 4323 CTH2A.)
re
6290 3470 4326 Deceleration time constant limit start speed (Pa-
6294 3474 4330 rameters are selected by input signal CTH1A.)
11.1.2
pa
cs
Spindle Orientation of
Position Coder Type
.cn
(αC Series)
w
11.1.2.1 Unlike methods that use a stopper and so forth to stop the spindle
w
430
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.2.2
Features
/
Spindle orientation is enabled simply by connecting a position coder to
om
the spindle. The mechanical stop mechanism (stopper, pin, and so forth)
is not required for orientation.
(2) Reduced orientation time
s.c
A spindle motor connected with a spindle is used. So, orientation is
possible at high speed, regardless of the gear shift. This significantly
reduces orientation time.
re
(3) Simplified power magnetics sequence
The sequence consists of an orientation command, orientation
pa
completion command, and clutch/gear signal. It does not require any
other signals. This means that sequences for orientation speed
specification and torque limit specification are not required.
cs
(4) Improved reliability
.cn
This type of spindle orientation does not depend on mechanical
components, and therefore is not subject to mechanical damage due to
external shock. Thus, a higher level of reliability is possible.
w
easily.
ht
431
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.2.3
System Configuration
/
om
Spindle Gear or belt
amplifier
CNC (SPMC)
Communica-
s.c
tion cable Spindle
JA7B motor
Spindle Tool
JY4
re
Position
pa
feedback Direct connection, or gear or
Power loop timing belt (one–to–one)
magnetics
sequence
αposition coder
circuit
cs
.cn
NOTE
When an αC series spindle is used, orientation is possible only with a system where the spindle
is connected to a position coder on a one–to–one basis. (Orientation is not possible when other
detectors and connection ratios are involved.)
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
432
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.2.4
Specifications
/
1 Position coder 1024 pulses/rev (phase A signal, phase B signal)
om
1 pulse/rev (one–rotation signal)
0.088_
One spindle rotation (360_) is divided by 1024 4 (4096) pulses, and one
2 Detection unit
pulse unit (0.088_) is used as the detection unit.
s.c
360_/ 4096 pulses = 0.088_/ pulses
re
3 Positioning repeatability lash between the spindle and position coder).
Depending on the position gain adjustment, an error of one detection unit
(0.088_) may occur after orientation.
pa
Torque maintained at orienta-
4 None
tion stop time
11.1.2.5
Signals
w
: G110 G231 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
: G112 G239 G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
433
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
rotation/reverse rotation command (SFRA/SFRA) to 0. Then, the
om
spindle does not start rotating even if ORCMA is set to 0 during tool
replacement.
D Ensure that this signal is set to 0 by the workpiece attachment /
s.c
detachment completion signal.
D Ensure that the orientation command signal is set to 0 when the power
is turned on.
D Reset the orientation command signal to 0 when an emergency stop is
re
initiated during orientation.
(c) Clutch/gear signals (CTH1A, CTH2A)
pa
D When there are two or more speed change gear stages between the
spindle and spindle motor, these signals are used to select a spindle
cs
control parameter (position gain, gear ratio, velocity loop gain).
D Depending on the clutch or gear state, make settings according to the
table below. Names such as HIGH GEAR are given only for
.cn
convenience. Arbitrary names may be assigned to the actual gears.
CTH1A CTH2A
0 0 HIGH GEAR
w
1 1 LOW GEAR
w
is set to 1.
D When this signal makes a transition from 1 to 0, the spindle is oriented
ht
within one rotation to the position specified by new stop position data
(SHA11 to SHA00) (arbitrary position within one rotation specified
by an absolute position command).
D The direction of orientation is specified by the shortcut rotation
command (NRROA) or rotation direction command (ROTAA).
D This function is enabled when the CNC parameter for an orientation
function of external stop position setting type is set.
(e) Shortcut rotation command for spindle orientation stop position modification (NRROA)
D This signal is used to specify a rotation direction when the spindle is
oriented to a different position immediately after spindle orientation.
This signal is used for shortcut rotation (within "180_) to the next
stop position.
434
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
When this signal is set to 0, the spindle rotates counterclockwise and
om
stops.
When this signal is set to 1, the spindle rotates clockwise and stops.
D This signal is valid when the shortcut rotation command for spindle
orientation stop position modification (NRROA) is set to 0.
s.c
(g) Spindle orientation external–type stop position command (SHA11 to SHA00)
D This signal is used to specify a stop position when the orientation
re
function of external stop position setting type is used. A stop position
is determined using the formula below. This command specifies an
absolute position within one rotation.
pa
ȍ (2i
11
Stop position (degrees) + 360 P i)
4096
i+0
cs
Note that Pi = 0 when SHAi =0, and Pi = 1 when SHAi = 1.
D When a spindle orientation function of external stop position setting
.cn
type is used, the parameter (parameter No. 4031 (FS16)) for setting a
stop position in spindle orientation of position coder type is disabled.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
435
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
Second spindle control output signals
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1st : F285 F245 F049 ORARB TLMB LDTB SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
s.c
(b) Orientation completion signal (ORARA)
D This signal is set to 1 when the spindle stops near a specified position
(within "1_, for example) after an orientation command is entered.
re
ORARA is set to 1 when the following conditions are satisfied:
– ORCMA = 1
– Speed zero signal = 1
pa
– The spindle stops near a specified position.
The third condition (near a specified position) is set using parameter
No. 4075 (FS16) for orientation completion signal detection level
cs
specification. When all of the three conditions above are satisfied, the
orientation completion signal is output. If the orientation completion
.cn
signal is not issued despite sufficient time having elapsed after the
input of an orientation command, an error is assumed. Ensure that
such an error is detected with the power magnetics sequence, and that
an orientation alarm is issued.
w
about "1_ of a specified position. This means that this signal does
not represent a complete stop.
w
436
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.2.6
Sequence
(1) Orientation from Stop State
/
1
Orientation command
om
ORCMA 0 0
Stop
CW direction
s.c
Motor speed Stop
CCW direction
15 to 20 ms
re
1
Orientation completion signal
pa
ORARA 0 0
cs
NOTE
.cn
The rotation direction of the spindle motor can be selected
by parameter setting. The standard setting stops the
spindle at a specified position after rotating the spindle in
the same direction as that before the command signal for
stopping the spindle at a specified position is issued.
w
w
Rotation command 1
SFRA, SRVA
0
://
1
Orientation command
ORCMA 0 0
tp
Deceleration
High-speed
CW direction
ht
15 to 20 ms
CCW direction
1
437
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
tion command SHA00-11
om
t t
Spindle orientation stop position
changing command INDXA
Rotating direction command
s.c
when spindle orientation stop
position is changed ROTAA
re
spindle orientation stop posi-
tion is changed NRROA
CW direction Stop Stop Stop
pa
Motor speed
CCW direction
Stop
D Spindle stop at a specified position by a normal orientation command
D The rotation direction of the spindle motor is specified by parameter
w
setting.
D After power–on, the spindle first stops at a specified position after
w
NOTE
The spindle orientation stop position change command
(INDXA) is enabled only when the spindle orientation
command (ORCMA) is set to 1.
438
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.2.7 The table below lists the parameters used with an orientation function of
Parameter List position coder type. For details of the parameters, see the parameter
manual.
Parameter No.
FS0 FS15 FS16
/
Description
First Second First Second
om
spindle spindle spindle spindle
Orientation function setting
Whether to use the spindle orientation function. (To be set to 1). (The
6515#0 6655#0 3015#0 3155#0 4015#0
CNC software option is required.)
s.c
0080 0080 5609 5609 3702 Whether to use the spindle orientation function of external stop position
#2 #3 #2 #3 #3,#2 setting type. (#2: First spindle, #3: Second spindle)
Setting related to the position coder signal
re
6501#2 6641#2 3001#2 3141#2 4001#2 Whether to use the position coder signal. (To be set to 1)
6500#2 6640#2 3000#2 3140#2 4000#2 Position coder mounting direction
pa
6500#0 6640#0 3000#0 3140#0 4000#0 Spindle and motor rotation direction
6598 6738 3098 3238 4098 Position coder signal detection maximum speed
cs
Gear ratio setting
6556 to 6696 to 3056 to 3196 to 4056 to Gear ratio between the spindle and motor (to be selected with CTH1A
.cn
6559 6699 3059 3199 4059 and CTH2A)
Setting of a rotation direction at orientation time
6503 6643 3003 3143 4003
Rotation direction at spindle orientation time
#3,#2 #3,#2 #3,#2 #3,#2 #3,#2
w
6560 to 6700 to 3060 to 3200 to 4060 to Position gain at orientation time (to be selected with CTH1A and
6563 6703 3063 3203 4063 CTH2A)
6542 6682 3042 3182 4042 Velocity loop proportional gain at orientation time (to be selected with
tp
439
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Parameter No.
FS0 FS15 FS16
Description
First Second First Second
spindle spindle spindle spindle
Setting related to the orientation completion signal
6575 6715 3075 3215 4075 Spindle orientation completion signal detection level
/
om
Others
6517#7 6657#7 3017#7 3157#7 4017#7 Shortcut rotation function for orientation from stop state
s.c
11.1.3
Spindle Orientation of
re
Incremental Command
Type (Spindle Speed
Control)
11.1.3.1
pa
The spindle orientation function of incremental command type is an
cs
Overview extended function of the spindle orientation function of external stop
position setting type based on a position coder.
.cn
This function moves the spindle to a position specified by an incremental
command from the position where the spindle is placed when a spindle
orientation command is entered. That is, from the position where the
spindle is placed when a spindle orientation command is entered, the
w
NOTE
tp
440
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.3.2 The spindle orientation function with the incremental command set
System Configurations externally can be executed in the following system configurations:
/
om
Spindle Spindle Gear or
CNC
amplifier motor belt
(SPM)
Spindle
Velocity feedback
s.c
Power Directly connected,
magnetics Position feedback gear or timing belt
sequence Position coder (1:1)
circuit
re
D Motor system built into the spindle
pa
D System in which the spindle and the motor having a MZ sensor are
linked by a gear or timing belt
cs
Spindle Spindle motor
CNC
.cn
amplifier with MZ sen-
sor
(SPM)
Gear or Spindle
timing belt
Velocity and position
feedback
w
Power
magnetics
sequence
w
circuit
D System in which the turret and the motor having a MZ sensor are
w
Gear Spindle
Spindle Spindle motor
CNC amplifier with MZ sen-
sor
tp
(SPM)
Linked
by a Turret
Velocity and position clutch
ht
Power feedback
magnetics
sequence
circuit
441
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.3.3
Signals
(1) Input Signals (PMC to CNC)
(a) Signal address
/
First spindle control input signal
om
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
: G229 G227 G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
: G231 G229 G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
s.c
: G110 G231 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
re
Second spindle control input signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
pa
FS0 FS15 FS16
: G223 G235 G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
: G235 G237 G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
cs
: G112 G239 G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
.cn
: G113 G238 G081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
gear ratio, velocity loop gain) that matches a selected clutch/gear. Names
such as High Gear are assigned only for convenience.
://
442
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
om
(g) Stop position change command signal (INDXA)
This signal is used to change the stop position. On the rising edge of this
signal, INCMDA, ROTAA, and stop position (incremental command)
data are read.
s.c
1 → 0: Stop position change command
(h) Incremental command data (stop position data) (SHA11 to SHA00)
These signals (12 bits) are used to specify incremental command data or
re
stop position data. INCMDA determines which data to use. A command
of 0 to +4095 pulses can be entered.
pa
(2) Output Signals (CNC to PMC)
: F281 F229 F405 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDTA SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
: F285 F245 F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
EXOFB
443
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.3.4
Control Sequence
(1) Incremental Action
ORCMA
/
(Spindle orientation command)
om
t t t t t t
SHA00 to SHA11 (Command for
specifying the stop position in spindle
orientation) t t
INDXA
s.c
(Command for changing the stop posi-
tion in spindle orientation)
t t t t t t
INCMDA
re
(Command for selecting stop position
data or incremental command data)
t t
ROTAA t t t t
pa
(Command for specifying the direction of
rotation when changing the stop position)
(Note)To confirm the signal, t should be 50 msec or more.
cs
Spindle position
CCW CCW
.cn
Motor speed
CW
ORARA
(Orientation completion signal)
w
Notes
Set t to 50 ms or more. The signals require this time period to stabilize.
w
If the rising edge of ORCM is detected when the spindle stops (zero
w
speed detection signal SSTA is set to 1) and INCMDA is set to 1, the data
of SHA00 to SHA11 is read as incremental command data. The spindle
://
444
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
(2) When Spindle Orientation and Incremental Motion are both Executed
ORCMA
(Spindle orientation command)
t t t t t t
SHA00 to SHA11 (Command for specifying
the stop position in spindle orientation)
/
t t
om
INDXA
(Command for changing the stop position
in spindle orientation)
t t
INCMDA t t t t
s.c
(Command for selecting stop position data
or incremental command data) t t
t t
ROTAA
(Command for specifying the direction of
re
rotation when changing the stop position)
t t
NRROA
pa
(Command for taking a shorter route when
changing the stop position) cs
Spindle position
CCW
Motor speed
.cn
ORARA
(Orientation completion signal)
w
445
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
11.1.3.5 The following parameters are added when the function for externally
Parameters setting incremental commands is used for position coder method spindle
orientation Refer to the Parameter Manual and each CNC manual for
details.
s.c
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
0080 5609 3702 Whether the function for externally setting incremental commands is
re
#3, 2 #3, 2 #3, 2 used (#2: First spindle, #3: Second spindle)
Command multiplication for data for externally setting incremental com-
6292 3472 4328
pa
mands
cs
11.1.4
Spindle Orientation by
.cn
External One Rotation
Signal
w
NOTE
1 See Section 11.1.1 for descriptions about anything other
than external one–rotation signal handling (position coder
– based spindle orientation).
2 The αC series does not support this function.
446
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.4.2
System Configuration
/
om
Spindle Gear or timing belt
amplifier
CNC (SPM)
Communica- MZ Spindle
s.c
tion cable sensor motor
JA7B
Spindle
ÅÅ
JY2 Tool
JY3 Speed and position
ÅÅ
re
feedback
pa
External one–rotation Proximity switch (1:1)
PMC signal
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
447
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
(spindle–to–motor rotation ratio = m:n)
om
χ= 1024 m
(number of feedback pulses per motor rotation n
(where χ is rounded up to the nearest integer.)
Positioning repeatability = "( χ 0.2) [°]
s.c
(Reference)
The table below lists the relationships between the number of
detected gear teeth per rotation and the number of feedback pulses
re
per motor rotation.
Number of detected gear Number of feedback pulses per motor
pa
teeth per rotation rotation
512 teeth
1024
256 teeth
cs
128 teeth
512
64 teeth
.cn
NOTE
These values exclude influence by the machine and the
w
(Reference)
w
Positioning
repeatability [°]
://
"0.8
tp
"0.4
ht
"0.2
NOTE
number of feedback pulses number of feedback n
= pulses per motor m
per spindle rotation
rotation
448
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Example of calculation
(1) Number of feedback pulses per motor rotation = 1024
Spindle–to–motor speed ratio (m/n) = 1:3 (speed reduction)
χ= 1024 1 + 0.3
1024 3
Thus, χ is rounded up to 1.
/
Hence, positioning repeatability = "(1 x 0.2) = "0.2°
om
(2) Number of feedback pulses per motor rotation = 512
Spindle–to–motor speed ratio (m/n) = 2:1 (speed up)
χ= 1024 2+4
512 1
s.c
Thus, χ = 4
Hence, positioning repeatability = "(4 x 0.2) = "0.8°
(3) Number of feedback pulses per motor rotation = 512
re
Spindle–to–motor speed ratio (m/n) = 1:2 (speed reduction)
χ= 1024 1+1
pa
512 2
Thus, χ = 1
Hence, positioning repeatability = "(1 x 0.2) = "0.2°
cs
(4) Number of feedback pulses per motor rotation = 512
Spindle–to–motor speed ratio (m/n) = 1:1
χ= 1024 1+2
.cn
512 1
Thus, χ = 2
Hence, positioning repeatability = "(2 x 0.2) = "0.4°
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
449
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.4.4
Signals
(1) Input Signals (PMC to CNC)
/
om
First spindle control input signal
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
: G229 G227 G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
s.c
: G110 G231 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00
re
Second spindle control input signals
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
pa
: G223 G235 G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB
: G112 G239 G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00
cs SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08
: G113 G238 G081
velocity loop gain, and so forth). Names such as High gear are assigned
only for convenience.
w
450
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
om
Second spindle control output signals
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
: F285 F245 F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
s.c
(b) Spindle orientation completion signal (ORARA)
This signal is used to indicate the spindle orientation completion state.
This signal is set to 1 when the following three conditions are satisfied:
re
a. The spindle is being oriented (ORCMA = 1).
b.The spindle is in the speed zero state (SSTA = 1).
pa
c. The spindle is near a specified stop position (in–position).
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
451
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.4.5
Control Sequence
ORCMA
/
(Spindle orientation
om
command) t t
SHA00–11
(Stop position
command for spindle
s.c
orientation)
EXTSC
(External one–
re
rotation signal)
pa
Start of 1–rotation signal detection
After arrival of orientation speed
cs
One–rotation signal detection
Orientation speed
.cn
Motor speed
w
ORARA
(Spindle orientation
w
completion signal)
w
NOTE
://
452
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.4.6 The table blow lists the parameters used with the spindle orientation
Parameters List function based on the external one–rotation signal. For details of the
parameters, see the parameter manual.
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
/
om
Orientation function setting
Whether spindle orientation is used (Set to 1.)
6515#0 3015#0 4015#0
(CNC software option is necessary.)
0080 5609 3702 Whether to use the spindle orientation function of external stop position
s.c
#3,#2 #3,#2 #3,#2 setting type. (#2: First spindle, #3: Second spindle)
Setting related to the position coder signal
6501#2 3001#2 4001#2 Whether a position coder signal is used (Set to 1.)
re
6500#2 3000#2 4000#2 Mounting orientation for the position coder
6500#0 3000#0 4000#0 Rotational direction of the spindle and motor
pa
Selection of position coder method or magnetic sensor method spindle
6503#0 3003#0 4003#0
orientation (0 for a position coder method)
6503 3003 4003#
cs
Setting of the position coder signal
#7, 6, 4 #7, 6, 4 7, 6, 4
Setting of a position coder one–rotation signal detection edge. (To be
6513#0 3013#0 4013#0
.cn
set to 1)
Position coder one–rotation signal detection function in normal rotation.
6517#2 3017#2 4017#2
(To be set to 0)
6598 3098 4098 Position coder signal detection maximum speed
w
6935 3315 4171 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side. (A parameter is selected with
6937 3317 4173 input signal CTH1A).
6936 3316 4172 Number of gear teeth on the position detector side. (A parameter is se-
6938 3318 4174 lected with input signal CTH1A.)
Setting of a rotation direction at orientation time
6503 3003 4003
Rotation direction at orientation time
#3, #2 #3, #2 #3, #2
Setting of a stop position shift amount
453
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.4.7 The external one–rotation signal switch (proximity switch) should satisfy
Specification of the the following conditions.
External One–rotation (1) Two–wire DC proximity switch
Signal Switch
NOTE
/
The proximity switch depends on the temperature. So,
om
when selecting an proximity switch, consider the ambient
temperature.
s.c
Item Specification
Supply voltage 24 VDC "1.5 V (24 VDC is supplied from the spindle
amplifier module.)
re
Response frequency 400 Hz or higher
Load current 16 mA or higher
pa
Residual voltage 4 V or lower
Drain (leakage) current 1.5 mA or lower
cs
(2) Three–wire DC proximity switch
Item Specification
.cn
Supply voltage 24 VDC "1.5 V (24 VDC is supplied from the spindle
amplifier module.)
Response frequency 400 Hz or higher
Load current 16 mA or higher
w
3.4k
24V
PU/PD
91k
39k
tp
2k
Level
EXTSC converter
75k 330pF
ht
Level L:
0V EXTSC<4V
0V Level H :
EXTSC>17V
454
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Parameters
Detection PU/PD pin of Bit 3 of parameter No. 4004 (FS16)
Proximity switch Proximity switch type
method connector JY3 Bit 3 of parameter No. 3004 (FS15)
Bit 3 of parameter No. 6504 (FS0)
/
Normally open
om
Concave
detection Normally closed
Normally
y NPN Connected to 24V 0
open PNP Connected to 0V 1
Convex
s.c
detection NPN Connected to 24V 1
Normallyy
closed PNP Connected to 0V 0
Three–wire type
ty e
re
y
Normally NPN Connected to 24V 0
open PNP Connected to 0V 1
Concave
detection
pa
Normallyy NPN Connected to 24V 1
closed cs PNP Connected to 0V 0
Convex detection:
Proximity switch
ÅÅ
Object detected
.cn
w
Spindle
w
Spindle
tp
ht
455
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.4.8
Notes (1) Ensure that the spindle orientation command (ORCMA) is set to 0
when the power is turned on.
(2) For safety, set the forward/reverse rotation command (SFRA/SRVA)
and speed command to 0 when performing spindle orientation.
/
om
(3) When an emergency stop is initiated during spindle orientation, reset
the spindle orientation command (ORCMA) to 0.
(4) The precision of the edge of the signal output from the external
one–rotation signal switch (proximity switch) affects the positional
s.c
accuracy. So, use an external one–rotation signal switch (proximity
switch) that has a stable edge.
(5) The position at which the signal is output from the external
re
one–rotation signal switch (proximity switch) depends on the
temperature. So, when selecting an external one–rotation signal
pa
switch (proximity switch), consider the ambient temperature.
cs
11.1.5
Magnetic Sensor
.cn
Method Spindle
Orientation
General the spindle orientation stops the spindle at a fixed position by directly
feeding back position signals from the magnetic sensor directly connected
w
NOTE
This function is not available for αC sereis.
://
tp
11.1.5.2
Features
ht
Mechanical parts are not This orientation is accomplished simply by connecting the magnetic
required. sensor to the spindle without any need of mechanical orientation
mechanism (stopper, pin, etc.) for spindle orientation.
Reduction of orientation Since the spindle motor connected to the spindle is utilized and the
time orientation can be performed directly from high-speed rotation,
irrespective of gear shift, the orientation time is largely reduced.
Simplified power This sequence consists of the spindle orientation command, its
magnetic sequence completion signal, clutch/gear speed signal only without any need of
control other signals. Neither orientation speed command sequence nor torque
limit command sequence is needed.
456
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
High reliability Electrical system assures improved reliability without any damage to the
mechanical section against an external impact.
High accuracy and The spindle orientation accuracy and rigidity are enough to execute
rigidity automatic tool change (ATC).
/
om
Positioning of workpiece Workpieces can be positioned to arrange their loading and unloading
directions in lathe.
Reduction of the number Since the spindle orientation can be done in the same direction as the
s.c
of processes in boring rotating direction of the spindle when boring ends, workpieces will not
be damaged by tool blades.
Since these tool blades can be mounted or dismounted in a fixed direction
re
with reference to the workpieces, programming is easy.
pa
11.1.5.3
Configuration and
cs
Order Drawing Number
Configuration
.cn
Spindle
w
amplifier
(SPM)
Gear or belt
w
CNC CN11A
Communica-
tion cable Spindle motor
w
JY2 Spindle
JY3
ÅÅ
Speed feedback Tool
://
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
Position feedback
tp
Magnetizing element
Power magnetic (Directly connected)
sequence control Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor head
ht
circuit
Amplifier
457
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.1.5.4
Specifications
No. Item Description
1 Magnetic Refer to item 12.3.2.
sensor
/
2 Stop Stops when the center of the sensor head faces the cen-
om
position ter of the magnetizing element or the stop position check
scale of the magnetizing element.
The stop position can be adjusted to within "1° by the cir-
cuit.
"0.2° or less.
s.c
3 Repeatability
Excluding factors such as errors from the machine side,
for example, setting errors.
4 Max. hold Continuous rated torque of the AC spindle motor.
re
torque at
orientation
5 Range where Orientation stop position "240°
pa
spindle can
be orientated
cs
11.1.5.5
.cn
Signal Explanation
(1) DI SIGNALS (PMC to CNC)
w
458
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
D When there are two or more speed change gear stages between the
om
spindle and spindle motor, these signals are used to select a spindle
control parameter (position gain, gear ratio, velocity loop gain).
D Depending on the clutch or gear state, make settings according to the
table below. Names such as HIGH GEAR are assigned only for
s.c
convenience. Arbitrary names may be assigned to the actual gears.
CTH1A CTH2A
re
0 0 : HIGH GEAR
0 1 : MEDIUM HIGH GEAR
1 0 : MEDIUM LOW GEAR
pa
1 1 : LOW GEAR
: F281 F229 F405 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
w
: F285 F245 F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
://
D When the orientation command is input and the spindle has stopped
tp
near the preset fixed position (for example, within "1°), it becomes
”1”.
Condition for ORARA to become ”1”
ht
459
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
Zero-speed detection level
om
Spindle Within "1° of the stop
speed position
s.c
Chattering
Orientation
completion
sequence
ORARA
re
ATC arm
operation
pa
start signal
0.1 to 0.5 sec
D This signal will become ”0” during a tool change if the spindle is
cs
pushed away from the preset position by external force.
In this case, design a power magnetic sequence so that the tool change
.cn
operation is interrupted.
However, do not release the orientation command, and if the
orientation completion signal is issued again, perform a tool change.
D If the automatic tool change (ATC) structure is such that it may cause
w
460
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.5.6
Sequences
(1) Orientation Command while Stopping
/
1
Orientation command
om
ORCMA 0 0
Stop
CW direction
s.c
Motor speed Stop
CCW direction Note
15 to 20 ms
re
1
Orientation completion signal
pa
ORARA 0 0
cs
ATC operation Start Completion
ATC operation
.cn
NOTE
The spindle motor rotation direction can be changed by
setting. In standard setting, the spindle motor will stop at
w
generated.
w
://
tp
ht
461
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Rotation command 1
SFRA, SRVA (Configuration at
external sequence) 0
1
/
Orientation command
ORCMA 0 0
om
Deceleration
High-speed
CW direction
Motor speed
s.c
15 to 20 ms
CCW direction
re
1
ATC operation
pa Start Completion
cs
ATC operation
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
462
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.1.5.7 The table below lists the parameters related to spindle orientation using
Parameters a magnetic sensor. Refer to the Parameter Manual for details.
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
Orientation function setting
/
om
Whether spindle orientation is used (Set to 1.)
6515#0 3015#0 4015#0
(CNC software option is necessary.)
Setting related to the magnetic sensor signal
6501#3 3001#3 4001#3 Mounting orientation for the magnetic sensor
s.c
6500#0 3000#0 4000#0 Rotational direction of the spindle and motor
Selection of a position coder method magnetic sensor method spindle
6503#0 3003#0 4003#0
orientation (1 for a magnetic sensor method)
re
6578 3078 4078 MS signal constant
6579 3079 4079 MS signal gain adjustment
pa
Gear ratio setting
6556 to 3056 to 4056 to Gear ratio between the spindle and motor
6559 3059 4059
cs
(selected by DI signals CTH1A and CTH2A)
Setting of a rotation direction at orientation time
.cn
6503 3003 4003
Rotational direction for spindle orientation
#3, 2 #3, 2 #3, 2
Setting of a stop position shift amount
6577 3077 4077 Shift of spindle orientation stop position
w
6576 3076 4076 Motor speed regulation rate for spindle orientation
Setting related to the orientation completion signal
6575 3075 4075 Detection level for the spindle orientation completion signal
463
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.2
RIGID TAPPING
11.2.1 Rigid tapping is a function for tapping based on synchronous control over
Overview spindle and tapping axis operation.
/
This section describes the rigid tapping function associated with the
om
spindle.
s.c
11.2.2
System Configuration
re
(1) αC Series Spindle
pa
Gear ratio
Commu- Spindle m:n
CNC
nication
cs amplifier
cable Spindle Belt or gear
module motor
(SPM) connection
.cn
Verocity
JY4 JY2 feedback Spindle
feedback 1:1
1:2
1:4
w
1:8
w
(b) System where a spindle motor with a built–in MZ sensor is used (including that case where a built–in motor
is used)
://
Gear ratio
Commu- Spindle Built–in sensor m:n
CNC
tp
nication amplifier
cable Spindle Gear or
module motor
(SPM) timing belt
ht
JY2 Spindle
Position and
velocity
feedback
464
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Gear ratio
Commu- Spindle m:n
CNC
nication amplifier
cable Spindle Belt or gear
module motor
(SPMC) connection
/
om
Verocity
JY4 feedback Spindle
s.c
NOTE
re
Only 1:1 is allowed between the spindle and position coder.
A motor used with the αC series spindle has no speed
pa
sensor, so that the acceleration/deceleration capability and
synchronization control precision are degraded relative to
the α series.
cs
.cn
(3) CNC–based Classification of System Configurations
amplifier
FS15–T/M (SPM or
FS0–M SPMC)
w
://
Spindle First
Spindle motor spindle
FS16–T amplifier
FS0–T (SPM)
Spindle Second
Spindle motor spindle
amplifier
(SPM or
SPMC)
465
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
FS0–TT
om
Spindle Spindle Tool post 1 –
amplifier motor Second
(SPM or spindle
s.c
SPMC)
re
Spindle Tool post 2 –
Spindle motor
amplifier First spindle
pa
(SPM)
cs
Spindle Spindle Tool post 2 –
amplifier motor Second
(SPM or spindle
.cn
SPMC)
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
466
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.2.3
Signals
(1) Signal Addresses
/
om
[When FS16 is used]
TT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
HEAD2
G028 G1028 GR2 GR1
s.c
G061 G1061 RGTAP
SWS2 SWS1
G027 G1027 (Note 1) (Note 1)
re
GR21
G029 G1029 (Note 2)
pa
G070 G1070 SFRA CTH1A CTH2A
cs
NOTE
1 The multi–spindle control function allows rigid tapping to be
performed using the second spindle.
.cn
G026 SPSTP
tp
RGTAP
G135 G1335 (Note 4)
467
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
NOTE
1 The signals at these addresses are valid when the T series
is used, and bit 5 of parameter No. 0031 is set to 0.
2 The signals at these addresses are valid when the T series
is used and bit 5 of parameter No. 0031 is set to 1. The
signals at these addresses are also valid when the M series
/
is used, and the constant surface speed option is selected.
om
3 The signal at this address is valid when bit 4 of parameter
No. 0019 is set to 0. (With the T and TT series, only this
signal is valid at all times.)
4 The signal at this address is valid when bit 4 of parameter
s.c
No. 0019 is set to 1. (With the T and TT series, this signal
is invalid.)
5 The multi–spindle control function allows rigid tapping to be
re
performed using the second spindle.
When SWS1 = 1, rigid tapping is performed using the first
spindle (regardless of the setting of SWS2).
pa
When SWS1 = 0, and SWS2 = 1, rigid tapping is performed
using the second spindle.
6 The signal is used as the gear signal when rigid tapping is
cs
performed using the second spindle. Depending on the
GR21 signal, the first and second rows of the gear–by–gear
.cn
parameters common to those of the first spindle are used.
NOTE
Valid only with the M series.
://
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F040 RTAP
ht
NOTE
Valid only with the M series.
468
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
(b) Gear selection signals indicating the gear state that allows
gear–dependent parameter selection (GR1, GR2, GR21, GR10,
GR20, GR30)
(c) Signal for activating a spindle motor (Forward spindle rotation
signal: SFR)
/
om
NOTE
1 With the analog interface spindle, the TLML signal is
entered for rigid tapping. With the α series and αC series
spindles, however, set the TLML signal to 0.
s.c
2 For details of the signals, refer to the CNC connection
manual.
re
(3) Gear Switch Signals for FS16 and FS0
pa
With FS16 and FS0, two methods of gear switching are supported.
(a) T–type gear switching (T/TT series, or M series with the constant
cs
surface speed option)
With this method, parameters used internally by the CNC are
switched according to the GR1 and GR2 signals (GR21 when the
.cn
from the CNC parameter setting and specified S value, and the
parameters used internally by the CNC are switched. Moreover,
w
The table below lists the parameters related to the gear switch
tp
signals.
Item FS0–M FS16–M
ht
469
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
(4) Rigid Tapping Using the Second Spindle with the T/TT Series of FS16 and FS0
The multi–spindle control function option is required.
(a) The following selection is made according to the SWS1 and
SWS2 signals of the multi–spindle control function:
When SWS = 1 (regardless of the setting of SWS2)
→ Rigid tapping using the first spindle
/
om
When SWS = 1 and SWS2 = 1
→ Rigid tapping using the second spindle
(b) The GR21 signal (two gear stages only) is used as the gear switch
signal for rigid tapping using the second spindle.
s.c
For the second spindle, the first and second rows of the
parameters common to the first spindle are used, depending on
the state of the GR21 signal.
re
pa
11.2.4 For details of the sequence, refer to the CNC connection manual.
Sequence (1) For the Series 16i/18i/21i, refer to the following manual:
Section 9.11 of the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i Connection Manual
cs
(Function) (B–63003EN–1)
(2) For the Series 16/18, refer to the following manual:
.cn
Section 9.11 of the FANUC Series 16/18 Connection Manual
(Mechanical) (B–62753EN–1)
(3) For the Series 15, refer to the following manual:
w
Manual (B–61393E)
://
tp
ht
470
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.2.5 The table lists the parameters related to rigid tapping using the α series
Parameter List and αC series spindles. For details of these parameters, refer to the
parameter manual and the manual for each CNC.
Parameter No.
FS0
/
M/T/TT FS15 FS16 Description
om
First Second M/T M/T
spindle spindle
M code setting for rigid tapping
s.c
(M series) (T series) 5210
––– M code for specifying rigid tapping mode
0256 0253 5212
re
6501#2 6641#2 3001#2 4001#2 Whether to use the position coder signal. (To be set to 1)
pa
6500#2 6640#2 3000#2 4000#2 Position coder mounting direction
0063#3 (M series) Whether to use the arbitrary gear ratio (CMR) function on the
5604#2,1 5200#1
0063#6 (T series) command side
w
0664 0430 5771 to 5223 ratio (CMR) is used on the command side
0665 5774 5224
0666 0431 to 5232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side when an arbi-
0667 0434 5781 to 5233 trary gear ratio (CMR) is used on the command side
0668 5784 5234
ht
6556 to 6696 to 3056 to 4056 to Gear ratio data between the spindle and motor (to be selected
6559 6699 3059 4059 by CTH1A and CTH2A)
471
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Parameter No.
FS0
M/T/TT FS15 FS16 Description
First Second M/T M/T
spindle spindle
Position gain
/
om
(M series) (T series) 3065 to 5280
0615 0406 3068
0669 0407 to 5281 to Tapping axis position gain at rigid tapping time
0670 0410 5284
0671
s.c
6565 to 6705 to 3065 to 4065 to Spindle position gain at rigid tapping time (to be selected by
6568 6708 3068 4068 CTH1A and CTH2A)
re
Selection of acceleration/deceleration time constant non–
0037#6 (M series) ––– –––
stage switching. (To be set to 1)
pa
Acceleration/deceleration type setting
0254 (M series) 5605#1 –––
(When set to 1: Linear acceleration/deceleration)
0258 (M series)
w
6544 6684 3044 4044 Velocity loop proportional gain at rigid tapping time (to be se-
6545 6685 3045 4045 lected by CTH1A)
6552 6692 3052 4052 Velocity loop integral gain at rigid tapping time (to be selected
6553 6693 3053 4053 by CTH1A)
6585 6725 3085 4085 Setting of motor voltage at rigid tapping time
(M series) (T series)
1827 5300 Tapping axis in–position width
0618 0400
472
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Parameter No.
FS0
M/T/TT FS15 FS16 Description
First Second M/T M/T
spindle spindle
In–position width, positional deviation limit (Continued)
/
om
(M series) (T series)
5755 5301 Spindle in–position width
0619 0401
s.c
(M series) (T series)
5754 5311 Positional deviation limit during spindle movement
0621 0403
(M series) (T series)
re
1829 5312 Positional deviation limit when the tapping axis is stopped
0622 0404
(M series) (T series)
––– 5313 Positional deviation limit when the spindle is stopped
pa
0623 0405
Setting related to orientation operation (reference position return) at the start of rigid tapping
Based on
cs
(M series) machin- (M series) Whether to perform spindle orientation at the start of rigid tap-
0388#3 ing pro- 5202#0 ping
grams
.cn
6574 3074 4074 Reference position return feedrate at rigid tapping time
6500#4 3000#4 4000#4 Reference position return direction at rigid tapping time
w
Others
w
6597 6937 3097 4097 Delay for motor activation (αC series)
––– ––– ––– 5214 Setting of a synchronization error at rigid tapping time
473
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.3
Cs CONTOURING
CONTROL
11.3.1 Cs contouring control is a function enabling servo control of the spindle
Outline using a high–resolution magnetic pulse coder or high–resolution position
/
coder.
om
This function can be used for positioning the spindle and the interpolation
between the spindle and another servo axis. Linear interpolation and
circular interpolation are supported.
s.c
NOTE
This function is not supported for the αC series spindle.
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
474
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.3.2
System Configuration
(1) For the α Spindle Sensor
/
om
CNC
Spindle +
OH line
s.c
built–in motor
re
CN1 BZ sensor (built–in sensor)
SPM
pa
TYPE4
CN2
JY5
cs
(b) When a motor is connected to the spindle via a belt
.cn
CNC
w
w
JY2
w
Spindle
://
SPM
TYPE4 CN1
tp
CN2
ht
JY5
475
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
CN0
Main detector unit
/
CN2
om
Built-in
Preamplifier Spindle spindle
motor
CN1
s.c
K18
OH signal line
re
Position and velocity feedback
pa
JY5 Power line
Spindle
amplifier
cs (SPM)
Type 2
.cn
CN0 Main
w
detector unit
w
CN2
Preamplifier Spindle
w
CN1
://
K19
tp
Detection AC spindle
CN2 section motor
ht
Preamplifier
JY5 JY2
Spindle
amplifier
(SPM) Type 2
476
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Spindle
High-resolution position coder CN1
K31
/
om
CN2 Detection AC spindle
section motor
Preamplifier
s.c
(OH signal line included)
K18
re
Velocity feed back
pa
Position feedback
JY4 JY2 Power line
Spindle amplifier
cs
(SPM)
Type 2
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
477
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.3.3
Specifications
(1) For the α Spindle Sensor
/
om
BZ sensor
No
No. Item
128/128H 256/256H 384 512
s.c
2 Precision [Typ.] (Note) 0.04° 0.03° 0.04° 0.04°
NOTE
re
It is assumed that the fluctuation of the shrink–fit section of
the spindle is within 5µm, and errors on the machine are
excluded. (The precision depends on the mounting
pa
accuracy of the detector.)
cs
(Tip)
The precision is determined by the sum of previsions 1 through 3.
.cn
BZ sensor
No
No. Item
128/128H 256/256H 384 512
1 0.015°
and gear pitch preci-
sion [Typ.]
w
BZ sensor
No. Item α0.5 motor α1 to α3 mo- α6 motor or
(64 teeth) tor (128 teeth) up (256 teeth)
(2) For a High–resolution Magnetic Pulse Coder and High–resolution Position Coder
No. Item
478
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.3.4
DI and DO Signals
/
(a) Signal Addresses
om
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
s.c
CON(T/M)
G027
G229 G227 G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA
re
G230 G226 G071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
pa
This signal switches between the spindle rotation control mode and Cs
contouring control mode.
Before switching from the Cs contouring control mode to the spindle
cs
rotation control mode, check that the spindle move command has
terminated. Switching from the spindle rotation control mode to the Cs
.cn
contouring control mode is enabled even when the spindle is rotating.
In this case, spindle rotation is decelerated then stopped, and the modes
are changed. For safe operation, be sure to reset the spindle speed
command (S command).
w
479
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.3.5
Sample Sequence
/
om
Spindle forward rotation command
(PMC³CNC)
ON=1
(SFRA)
s.c
Spindle speed command S0
(Sxxxx) (Note 2)
re
(CNC³PMC) (Note 3) ON=1
Being clamped
Spindle clamp
pa
(Note 4)
NOTE
1 For Series 16 :
w
2 When specifying the Cs contouring control mode, reset the spindle speed command (S0
command) for safe operation.
3 For Series 16 :
tp
480
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.3.6 The tables below list the parameters relating to Cs contouring control.
Parameters Refer to the Parameter Manual and each CNC manual for details.
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
/
om
Setting of axis allocation and so forth
3rd axis 4th axis 1804#7 1023 Setting of the axis for which Cs contouring control is performed
s.c
0037#3, 2 1815#1 1815#1 Select ”Separate pulse coder not used”.
re
0102 0103 1820 1820 Set the command multiplication to 2 (that is, x1)
pa
0502 0503 1827 1826 In–position width
0332 0333 1832 1832 Limit on position error for feed stop
0524 0525 1620 1620 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid feed
tion)
0603 0604 1624 1624 Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed
tp
3001#5 4001#5
0)
3001#6 4001#6 Setting for using a position detection signal for speed detection
3003 4003
Position detector type setting
#7,6,4 #7,6,4
481
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
Use of the α spindle sensor Cs contour control function. (To be set to
3018#4 4018#4
1)
/
3720 4356 Phase difference compensation (motor side)
om
3721 4357 Amplitude ratio compensation (spindle side)
s.c
Setting related to the high–resolution magnetic pulse coder and high–resolution position coder
6501#5 3001#5 4001#5 Whether a high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is used (Set to 1.)
re
6501#6 3001#6 4001#6
pulse coder for speed detection
6501#7 3001#7 4001#7 Mounting orientation for the high–resolution magnetic pulse coder
pa
6504#0 3004#0 4004#0 Whether a high–resolution position coder is used
3069 to 4069 to Position gain for the axis for which Cs contouring control is performed
6569 to 6572
3072 4072 (selected by DI signals CTH1A and CTH2A)
tp
5609 Whether position gain is automatically set for axes for which Cs contour-
#1, 0 ing control is not performed
ht
5609 3900 to Position gain for axes for which Cs contouring control is not performed
6780 to 6799
#0, 1 3944 (selected by DI signals CTH1A and CTH2A)
Position gain change rate for zero position return in Cs contouring con-
6592 3092 4092
trol
Direction of zero point return at the first Cs contouring control after power
6500#3 3000#3 4000#3
on
Whether the zero point return function is used for the first G00 command
0065#1 1005#0 3700#1
after switching to Cs contouring control mode
482
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
Grid shift setting
/
om
Rotational direction of the spindle for + motion commands in Cs contour-
6500#1 3000#1 4000#1
ing control
6502#4 3002#4 4002#4 Rotational direction signal function for Cs contouring control
s.c
Setting of a velocity loop gain and motor voltage
6546 3046 4046 Velocity loop proportional gain for Cs contouring control
6547 3047 4047 (selected by DI signal CTH1A)
re
6554 3054 4054 Velocity loop integral gain for Cs contouring control
6555 3055 4055 (selected by DI signal CTH1A)
pa
Compensation constant for external disturbance torque (acceleration
6594 3094 4094
feedback gain)
6586 3086 4086 Motor voltage for Cs contouring control (Normally, set to 100.)
cs
Setting for control characteristics for Cs contouring control (Normally,
6516#4 3016#4 4016#4
set 0.)
.cn
6519#0 3019#0 4019#0 Whether dead zone compensation is performed in Cs contouring control
Others
483
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.4
SPINDLE
SYNCHRONIZATION
CONTROL
/
11.4.1 On a machine having two spindles (such as a lathe), the rotational spindle
om
Outline speed of both spindles must be the same in the following cases:
– When a workpiece on the 1st spindle is passed to the 2nd spindle while
the spindles are rotating
s.c
– When a workpiece is held by both the 1st and 2nd spindles and the
spindles are accelerated or decelerated
The rotation phase (angle) of the spindles must also be the same when a
re
workpiece of a special shape is passed between the spindles.
The spindle synchronization control function is used to synchronize the
two spindles in the above cases.
11.4.2
pa
cs
System Configuration
(a) When the spindle and spindle motor are connected by a belt or gears
w
Position Position
coder Gears or timing belt Gears or timing belt coder
w
1:1 1:1
w
1st 2nd
spindle spindle
://
with gears
belt or
gears Velocity Velocity
Power Power
feedback feedback
ht
line line
Position Position
feedback Spindle Spindle feedback
amplifier amplifier
module module
(SPM) (SPM)
Communication
cable
Communication cable
(Note)
CNC
484
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
om
Feedback Power Power Feedback
signal line line signal
s.c
Spindle Spindle
amplifier amplifier
module module
(SPM) (SPM)
re
Communication
cable Communication cable
pa
(Note)
CNC
cs
.cn
NOTE
For the Series 16–TT and Series 0–TT, the CNC and
spindle amplifier modules are connected as follows:
w
Spindle Spindle
amplifier amplifier
w
module module
(SPM) (SPM)
w
Communication
cable Communication cable
://
CNC
tp
ht
485
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Position Position
coder Gears or timing belt Gears or timing belt coder
1:1 1:1
/
First Second
om
spindle spindle
αC series αC series
Belt or Belt or
s.c
spindle spindle
gear motor motor gear
connection connection
Power Power
line line
re
Position Position
feedback Spindle Spindle feedback
amplifier amplifier
pa
module module
(SPMC) (SPMC)
Communication
cs
cable
Communication cable
.cn
CNC
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
486
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.4.3
Explanation of Spindle D When the command for spindle synchronization control is issued
Synchronization while the two spindles are rotating at different speeds or stopped, each
spindle increases or decreases its speed to the specified speed. The two
Control
spindles are then controlled in synchronization.
/
D If the synchronization speed is changed after the synchronization
om
control of the two spindles is started, the spindles increase or decrease
their speed to the new speed. The spindles are synchronized during the
acceleration or deceleration as the speed is increased or decreased
according to the time constant specified in the parameter. When the
s.c
specified synchronization speed is 0 min–1, the two spindles stop at the
same time.
D When the command for spindle synchronization control is issued with
re
the synchronization speed specified as 0 min–1 when both spindles are
stopped, the spindles rotate two or three times. After detecting the one
rotation signal of the position coder (required for synchronization
pa
control of spindle phase), the spindles stop and enter the
synchronization control state. If the synchronization speed is changed
after the synchronous control state is established, the spindles increase
cs
or decrease their speed to the new speed. The spindles are
synchronized during acceleration or deceleration as the speed is
increased or decreased according to the time constant specified in the
.cn
parameter.
D To handle a workpiece with a unique shape, the spindles need to rotate
to keep the phases (angles) of rotation synchronous. When the
w
the speed changes for a moment. Then the two spindles return to the
synchronization control state. Rotation phase synchronization can be
w
stops. It is similar to when the spindles are positioned in the stop state
(spindle orientation). This causes the reference points of the spindles
ht
487
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
NOTE
Refer to the following CNC manuals as well:
Section 9.12 of FS 16/18/21i Connection Manual
(Function) (B–63003EN–1)
Section 9.12 of FS 16/18 Connection Manual (Function)
(B–62753EN–1)
/
om
11.4.4
s.c
DI/DO Signals
(1) DI Signals (PMC to CNC)
(a) Signal address
re
FS0–T FS0–TT FS15 FS16 FS16–TT
Head2 Head2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
pa
G146 G146 G038 SPPHS SPSYC
G124 G124 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I
cs SSGN R12I R11I R10I R09I
G125 G125 G033
1st : G229 G1429 G227 G070 G1070 SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A
selected.
When the signal is set to 0, spindle synchronization control mode is
ht
released.
(c) Signal for spindle phase synchronization control (SPPHS)
[Function] Selects the spindle phase synchronization mode. It becomes effective
when the signal for spindles synchronization control (SPSYC) is set to 1.
Enter this signal after the signal that indicates that synchronization
control of spindle speed is completed has been set to 1. Synchronization
control of spindle phase is started at the rising edge of this signal. Even
when this signal is set to 0, the synchronized phase does not change.
When the signal is changed again from 0 to 1, phase synchronization is
executed again.
[Operation] At the rising edge of the signal changing from 0 to 1, synchronization
control of the spindle phase begins.
488
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
When the two spindles are mechanically connected with each other, this
om
signal is set to 1 for both spindles so that integral speed control is
disabled.
D When a cylindrical workpiece is held with the two spindles after they
are synchronized in speed
s.c
D When a workpiece with a unique shape is held with the two spindles
after they are synchronized in phase
re
(a) Signal address
pa
FS0–T FS0–TT FS15 FS16 FS16–TT
Head2 Head2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F178 F044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY
cs
MSPPHS MSPSYC SPSYAL
F111
RCFNA
2nd : F285 F245 F049
(b) Signal indicating that synchronization control of spindle speed is completed (FSPSY)
w
reached the speed specified by the signal for specifying spindle speed
in synchronization.
ht
NOTE
The signal changes from 1 to 0 when the difference in
spindle speed exceeds the value specified in parameter
4033(FS16) due to changes in the cutting load, etc.
489
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
(c) Signal indicating that synchronization control of spindle phase is completed (FSPPH)
/
speed specified by the signal for specifying the spindle speed in
om
synchronization, and the spindles are synchronized in phase by the
signal for spindle phase synchronization. (The difference between the
error pulses of the two spindles is not greater than the value set in
parameter 4810(FS16).)
s.c
This signal is set to 0 when any of the following conditions is satisfied:
D In spindle synchronization control mode, the two spindles have not yet
been synchronized in phase.
re
D In spindle synchronization control mode, the difference between the
error pulses of the two spindles is larger than the value specified in
pa
parameter 4810 (FS16).
D The spindles are not in spindle phase synchronization control mode.
cs
NOTE
The signal changes from 1 to 0 when the difference in the
error pulses exceeds the value specified in parameter
.cn
(d) Signal for issuing an alarm detected in spindle synchronization control (SYCAL)
[Function] Reports that the difference between the error pulses of the two spindles
w
synchronization control.
[Output conditions] The signal is set to 1 when the following conditions are satisfied:
://
put in effect.
The signal is set to 0 when any of the following conditions is satisfied:
ht
490
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.4.5
Sample Sequence D While spindle 1 is rotating, spindle 2 is accelerated to reach the speed
of spindle 1. The phase of spindle 2 is synchronized with that of
spindle 1. Then the synchronization speed is changed, and the two
spindles increase or decrease their speed in synchronization.
/
om
Spindle speed
Acceleration/deceleration
Phase synchronization in synchronization
Spindle 1
s.c
Synchronization
speed A
re
Synchronization
speed B
pa
Spindle 2
cs Time
Signal indicating that synchronization
control of spindle phase is completed FSPPH
://
tp
Enter the signal for specifying spindle synchronization speed and set
the signal for spindle synchronization control to 1.
Wait until the signal indicating that synchronization control of spindle
ht
NOTE
The signal indicating that synchronization control of spindle
speed is completed is set to 0 when the signal for spindle
phase synchronization control is entered. It is changed to
1 when phase synchronization is completed.
491
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
D While spindles 1 and 2 are stopped, their phases are synchronized and
their speeds are increased in synchronization.
Spindle speed
/
om
Spindles 1 and 2
Synchronization speed
Phase synchronization
s.c
Acceleration/deceleration
in synchronization
(Note 1)
re
Time
pa
SPSYC
(Note 2)
Set the signal for specifying the spindle synchronization speed to 0 and
the signal for spindle synchronization control to 1.
://
NOTE
1 When the spindle synchronization mode is switched (after power is supplied), each spindle
automatically rotates several turns to detect one–rotation signals even if the program does not
request so. If this operation causes a problem (for example, because two spindles are
connected mechanically), or spindle phase synchronization is not to be performed, the
operation can be disabled using parameters (No.4006#3 (FS16)).
2 The signal indicating that synchronization control of spindle speed is completed is set to 0 when
the signal for spindle phase synchronization control is entered. It is changed to 1 when phase
synchronization is completed.
492
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
om
Spindle 2
s.c
Signal for spindle synchronization
control SPSYC
re
Signal for specifying spindle
synchronization speed
pa
Signal indicating that synchronization control
of spindle speed is completed
FSPSY
cs
Signal for the chuck close command
.cn
(Note) (Note)
Signal for spindle phase synchronization control
SPPHS
w
FSPPH
tp
NOTE
Set the signal for integral speed control to 1 while a
ht
493
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.4.6 The tables below list the parameters related to spindle synchronization
Parameters control. Refer to the Parameter Manual and each CNC manual for details.
Parameter No.
FS0 FS15–TT Description
FS0–TT FS16
1st 2nd 1st 2nd
/
om
Rotation direction setting
s.c
Rotational direction of spindle motor for spindle
0080#7 0080#6 5820#1 4800#1
synchronization control (2nd spindle)
re
Target level for the spindle speed synchronization
6533 6673 6533 3033 3173 4033
control
pa
Difference between error pulses for the two
0303 0303 5810 4810 spindles, regarded as spindle phase synchroniza-
tion completion signal
cs Difference between error pulses for the two
0576 0576 5811 4811 spindles, regarded as an alarm during spindle syn-
chronization control
.cn
6506#1 6646#1 6506#1 3006#1 3146#1 4006#1 Increment system for gear ratios
w
6534 6674 6534 3034 3174 4034 Shift for spindle phase synchronization control
nization control
is switched
494
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
Parameter No.
FS0 FS15–TT Description
FS0–TT FS16
1st 2nd 1st 2nd
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time constants (Continued)
/
tion/deceleration time constant for spindle syn-
6300 6480 6300 3480 3700 4336
om
chronization control
(The same value must be set for both spindles.)
s.c
spindles.)
re
Velocity loop proportional gain for spindle synchro-
6544 6684 6544 3044 3184 4044
nization control
6545 6685 6545 3045 3185 4045
(selected by DI signal CTH1A from the PMC)
pa
Velocity loop integral gain for spindle synchroniza-
6552 6692 6552 3052 3192 4052
tion control
6553 6693 6553 3053 3193 4053
(selected by DI signal CTH1A from the PMC)
cs
6585 6725 6585 3085 3225 4085 Motor voltage for spindle synchronization control
495
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.5
SPEED RANGE
SWITCHING
CONTROL
/
11.5.1 Speed range control conducts switching of speed range in one motor
om
General (motor designed specifically for speed range switching control) using the
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series SPINDLE AMPLIFIER
MODULE.
s.c
NOTE
This function is not available for αC series.
re
11.5.2
pa
Configuration and
Order Drawing
Number
cs
Configuration The following items are needed in addition to the spindle amplifier
.cn
module.
D Speed range switching control software (option)
D Relay circuit (including electromagnetic contactor and drive relay)
D Switching signal from PMC
w
Feedback signal
ht
11.5.3
Specifications D On a spindle motor with the output switch function, the user can switch
between two types of windings: one for the low–speed output
characteristics and the other for the high–speed output characteristics.
Switching is possible even while the motor is rotating.
D A spindle amplifier (SPM) is usable regardless of its type.
D To check the status of the power line, check the statuses of the
magnetic contactors for both high–speed range and low–speed range.
496
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
(AL–15) is issued if the magnetic contactor signal (RCHA,
om
RCHHGA) is not applied within 1 second of the power line switch
signal (RCHPA) being output.
s.c
11.5.4 The connections of Type A and Type B, below, depend on the
Connections specification of a spindle motor with the output switch function. When
low–speed output characteristics mode is selected, MCC1 is on, and
re
MCC2 is off. When high–speed output characteristics mode is selected,
MCC1 is off, and MCC2 is on.
pa
(1) Type A cs
Relay circuit
Communica-
.cn
tion cable JA7B Electromagnetic
contactor switching Single phase
circuit 200VAC
AC
CNC Spindle amplifier Electromagnetic contactor spindle
w
U
TB2 MCC 2 V
U U W
ÂÂ
V V
w
W W
G Auxilially
ÂÂ contact
X
://
MCC1 Y
X Z
Y
Z G
tp
JY2 Auxilially
contact G
ht
NOTE
The power supply module is omitted from the figure.
Items such as units and cables other than the spindle
amplifier module and, AC spindle motor, which are
surrounded by the unbroken line, must be provided by the
machine tool builder.
497
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
(2) Type B
Relay circuit
Communica-
tion cable JA7B Electromagnetic
/
contactor switching Single phase
om
circuit 200VAC
AC
CNC Spindle amplifier Electromagnetic con- spindle
module (SPM) tactor for switching U2 motor
and
power cable V2
PMC W2
s.c
U2
TB2 MCC 2 V2
U W2
ÂÂ
V
W
Auxilially
ÂÂ
re
contact
U1
MCC 1 V1
U1 W1
pa
V1 G
W1
Auxilially
JY2 contact
cs
.cn
NOTE
The power supply module is omitted from the figure.
w
498
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
Power–line change signal
om
DV
Relay
0V +24V
s.c
0V +24V stabirized
+24V power supply
200VAC
re
Auxiliary
A contact
RV
pa
Low–speed side MCC
status signal MCC1
Auxiliary
B contact
cs
0V
Auxiliary
.cn
RV B contact
High–speed side MCC
status signal MCC2
Auxiliary
w
A contact
0V
w
w
NOTE
1 The main contact terminals and power line in contact are
://
omitted.
2 Add a surge absorber to the electromagnetic contactor
operation coil as necessary.
tp
499
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.5.5
Spindle Control
Signals
(1) Input Signals (DI Signals) PMC to CNC
/
(a) Signal addresses
om
First spindle control input signal
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G230 G226 G071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
s.c
G231 G229 G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
re
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G234 G234 G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
pa
G235 G237 G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
after the velocity command changes from a high speed to a low speed
above the switching point.
w
that clamps the maximum spindle speed at the constant surface speed
control.
D In the case that the motor speed crosses the speed detection level when
the speed is changed by a spindle override.
Since the power of motor is turned off in switching-operation when the
speed range switching control works in the following control modes,
please select either speed range beforehand, and please do not change the
switching request signal while working.
D Rigid tapping mode
D Cs contouring control mode
D Spindle synchronization control mode
500
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
[Function] The opening and closing status signal of the electromagnetic contactor for
a low-speed range of the spindle motor is input.
/
0 : The low-speed range side electromagnetic contactor is open.
om
1 : The low-speed range side electromagnetic contactor is closed.
[Usage] The status of the auxiliary contact (”A” contact) of electromagnetic
contactor for a low-speed is usually input.
s.c
The status of the low-speed range side electromagnetic contactor is input
as this signal for parameter NO. 4014 #3=1 (FS16).
[Function] The selection status signal of the electromagnetic contactor for the spped
range switching of the spindle motor is inputted.
re
0 : The high-speed range is selected.
1 : The low-speed range is selected.
pa
[Usage] When the electromagnetic contactor changes from the low-speed side to
the high-speed side, this signal is set from ”1” to ”0” after it is confirmed
cs
that the electromagnetic contactor on the low-speed side is off and that the
electromagnetic contactor on the high-speed side is on.
When the electromagnetic contactor changes from the high-speed side to
.cn
the low-speed side, this signal is set from ”0” to”1” after it is confirmed
that the electromagnetic contactor on the high-speed side is off and that
the electromagnetic contactor on the low-speed side is on.
w
[Function] The opening and closing status signal of the electromagnetic contactor for
w
501
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
F281 F229 F045 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
/
om
MOAR2A MOAR1A POAR2A SLVSA RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA
F282 F228 F046
s.c
F285 F245 F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB
re
(b) Power-line switching signal (RCHPA)
pa
speed range switching of the spindle motor.
0 : The electromagnetic contactor for a high-speed range should be
selected.
cs
1 : The electromagnetic contactor for a low-speed range should be
selected.
.cn
[Usage] When switching request signal (RSLA) changes, the power supply to the
motor is automatically turned off.
Power supply OFF status continues until the switching completion signal
(RCFNA) changes.
w
At changing from the low-speed side to the high-speed side, this signal
changes from ”1” to ”0” after the switching request signal (RSLA) is
w
changes from ”0” to ”1” after the switching request signal (RSLA) is
received. As a result, the electromagnetic contactor for a high-speed
tp
range is first turned off. After it is confirmed to have turned off the
electromagnetic contactor for a high-speed range, the electromagnetic
contactor for a low-speed range is turned on.
ht
[Function] This signal shows by which speed range the spindle motor is controlled.
0 : It is controlled by a high-speed range.
1 : It is controlled by a low-speed range.
[Usage] Switching request signal (RSLA) changes. And after it is confirmed that
this signal is corresponding to the switching request signal (RSLA), it
moves to the next movement.
Since the motor power is turned off until this signal is corresponding to
the switching request signal (RSLA) after the change of the switching
request signal (RSLA), please note not to apply the cutting load, etc. to
the spindle in the switching-operation.
502
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
[Function] It becomes ”1” while the motor speed is below the level (the switching
point is normally set.) that is set by parameter (No.4023 (FS16)).
0 : Motor speed is above the switching point.
1 : Motor speed is below the switching point.
/
[Usage] It can be used for the switching point detection.
om
However, in the case that switching-operation is done according to this
signal, please note that this signal is changed by speed’s changing when
driven near the switching point and switching-operation is occasionally
done.
s.c
In this case, please do the switching control with the velocity command
(S instruction).
Hysteresis is given to this signal.
Quantity of hysteresis is set to 20 min–1 as an initial parameter. And it
re
can be changed by the parameter (NO. 4160 (FS16)).
This width of hysteresis is set to the value with margin, which is two times
pa
value of measured speed change at switching-operation.
It is calculated by the following equation as a standard of the set data.
(Width of hysteresis) =
cs
(Switching-operation time)
(Max. speed)min–1 0.2 :min–1
(Acceleration time up to the max. speed)
.cn
503
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.5.6
Sequence
(1) When the Status of both Electromagnetic Contactors for a Low-speed Range (RCHA) and for a High-speed
Range (RCHHGA) is Confirmed and the Speed Range Switching Control Works
/
Parameter No. 4014 #3=1 (FS16)
om
(a) Switching-operation of a low-speed range ³ a high-speed range
s.c
High-speed (=0)
PMC ³ CNC Low-speed (=1)
re
CNC ³ PMC Low-speed (=1)
High-speed (=0)
pa
Clutch/gear signal
(CTH1A, 2A) PMC ³ CNC High-speed (=0)
Low-speed (=1)
cs
Low-speed side electromagnetic contactor Open
.cn
Closed
Closed (=1)
PMC ³ CNC
w
Closed (=1)
PMC ³ CNC
tp
504
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
High-speed (=0)
om
Power-line switching signal (RCHPA) Low-speed (=1)
CNC ³ PMC
s.c
High-speed (=0)
Clutch/gear signal Low-speed (=1)
(CTH1A, 2A) PMC ³ CNC
re
Open Closed
Low-speed side electromagnetic contactor
Closed Open
High-speed side electromagnetic contactor
.cn
505
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
(2) When the Speed Range Switching Control Works by Confirming Only the Power-line Status Check Signal
(RCHA)
For parameter No. 4014 #3=0 (FS16)
(a) Switching-operation of a low-speed range → a high-speed range
/
Switching request signal (RSLA)
om
Low-speed (=1) High-speed (=0)
PMC ³ CNC
s.c
CNC ³ PMC
re
Clutch/gear signal High-speed (=0)
Low-speed (=1)
(CTH1A, 2A) PMC ³ CNC
pa
Closed Open
cs
Open Closed
High-speed side electromagnetic contactor
.cn
Power line status check signal (RCHA) Low-speed (=1) High-speed (=0)
PMC ³ CNC
w
506
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
Power-line switching signal (RCHPA) High-speed (=0) Low-speed (=1)
om
CNC ³ PMC
s.c
(CTH1A, 2A) PMC ³ CNC
Open Closed
re
Low-speed side electromagnetic con-
tactor
pa
Closed Open
High-speed side electromagnetic con-
tactor
cs
High-speed (=0) Low-speed (=1)
.cn
Power-line status check signal (RCHA)
PMC ³ CNC
High-speed (=0) Low-speed (=1)
Switching completion signal (RCFNA)
w
CNC ³ PMC
w
NOTE
1 A parameter is provided to disable switching from
w
SDTA = 0).
2 Switch the clutch/gear signals (CTH1A, CTH2A) so that
data such as velocity loop gain can be set separately for
tp
507
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.5.7 The table below lists the parameters related to the speed range switching
Parameters control function. Refer to the Parameter manual for details.
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
/
om
Whether the speed range switching control function is used (Set to 1.)
6515#2 3015#2 4015#2
(CNC software option is necessary.)
Function for checking the statuses of the magnetic contactors for both high–speed
6514#3 3014#3 4014#3
range and low–speed range
s.c
Function for checking the speed detection signal when switching from high–speed
6519#4 3019#4 4019#4
range to low–speed range
re
6924 3304 4160 Hysteresis for the speed detection level
11.5.8
pa
cs
Cautions in Use D Use an electromagnetic contactor for speed range switching whose
capacity is suited for the spindle amplifier module
.cn
For the sake of reference, the table below lists the model ratings of
electromagnetic contactors made by Fuji electric and Telemechanic.
Applicable
pp 30-minute rated Electromagnetic contactor
w
SPM–5.5 30 SC–1N 50
SPM–11 48 SC–2N 60
w
SPM–15 63 SC–2SN 80
://
508
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
winding.
om
Ensure a sequence in the PMC that allows selection of 2 output power
characteristics and enables selection of a switching sequence during
rotation.
D Use gear/clutch signal CTH1A and CTH2A to be able to set different
s.c
velocity loop gains for low-speed and high-speed.
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
509
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.6
SPINDLE SWITCHING
CONTROL
11.6.1 Spindle switching control uses a spindle amplifier module TYPE III in a
/
General machine that has two spindle motors but does not move both
om
simultaneously. Furthermore, it has an electromagnetic contactor to
change power lines on the outside of the spindle amplifier. The function
works by switching between motors with the same characteristics or two
motors that have different output power characteristics.
s.c
It has the following uses.
D In turning centers etc. it uses a single spindle amplifier to switch the
power line, velocity feedback signal line and the orientation signal line
re
using the Main Spindle Motor for turning and the Sub Spindle Motor
for rotation tools.
D It uses a single spindle unit to switch the power line, velocity feedback
pa
signal line and the orientation signal line using the vertical axis motor
and horizontal axis motor of the machine tool with five- surface
machining capability.
cs
NOTE
.cn
This function is not available for αC series.
w
11.6.2 To control two spindle motors with one spindle amplifier, the following
w
Switch signal
Spindle Main
amplifier Power spindle
PMC CNC module motor
(SPM) line
ht
Type 3
Feedback signal
Sub
spindle
motor
Feedback signal
510
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.6.3
Specifications D By using a spindle amplifier module (SPM) of Type 3, two spindle
motors are driven. The two spindle motors are switched; the two
spindle motors cannot be driven at the same time.
D A combination of a main spindle motor and sub spindle motor can be
/
selected freely from those spindle motors that can be driven by the
om
spindle amplifier module. From the spindle amplifier modules that
match two spindle motors, select that spindle amplifier module that
has the larger capacity. Depending on the combination of spindle
motors and spindle amplifier module, the parameters may have to be
s.c
modified.
D The smallest Type 3 spindle amplifier module is SPM–11. Use
SPM–11 even when small spindle motors are used.
D The feedback signals of the following detectors are switched:
re
Detector built into a motor: M sensor, MZ sensor, BZ sensor (for a
built–in motor)
pa
Detector attached to the spindle: Position coder, magnetic sensor (for
orientation), proximity switch (external one–rotation signal)
D Output switch control can be applied to the main spindle motor and sub
cs
spindle motor.
D Rigid tapping can be performed with the main spindle motor and sub
.cn
spindle motor.
D Orientation of position coder type can be performed with the main
spindle motor and sub spindle motor when a stop position is specified
by a parameter.
w
D To check the power line state more precisely, the state of the magnetic
contactor of the main spindle motor and sub spindle motor can be
w
entered. The following parameter settings are used for this purpose:
FS16: Bit 2 of parameter No. 4014 = 1
FS15: Bit 2 of parameter No. 3014 = 1
://
11.6.4
Restrictions D With the spindle switch control function, the method of mounting a BZ
sensor instead of a position coder onto the spindle cannot be used.
D The stop position external setting type position coder method spindle
orientation can be used only on MAIN side. It is not available on SUB
side.
D Spindle synchronization control is only available on the MAIN side.
It is not available on the SUB side.
D The spindle index function (Cs axis control) is only available on the
MAIN side. It is not available on the SUB side.
511
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
11.6.5
Connection
(1) Connection
s.c
Relay circuit
re
Communication
cable Magnetic Single–phase
contactor 200 VAC
pa
switch circuit
CNC
Spindle amplifier Magnetic contactor
and
module (SPM) for power line Main spindle motor
PMC
Type 3 switching
cs
.cn
Auxiliary
contact
w
JY2 JY6
Auxiliary
contact
w
://
tp
NOTE
ht
In this figure, the power supply module is omitted. The machine tool builder is to provide all units
and cables other than the spindle amplifier and AC spindle motors.
512
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
Power–line switching
signal
om
DV
Relay
0V +24V
s.c
0V +24V stabirized
+24V power supply
200VAC
re
Auxiliary
A contact
RV
pa
Sub spindle side MCC
status signal MCC1
Auxiliary
B contact
cs
0V
Auxiliary
.cn
RV B contact
Main spindle side MCC
status signal MCC2
Auxiliary
w
A contact
0V
w
w
NOTE
1 The main contact terminals and power line in contact are omitted.
://
513
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.6.6
Spindle Control
Signals
(1) Input Signals (DI Signals) PMC to CNC
/
(a) Signal addresses
om
First spindle control input signal
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G230 G226 G071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA
s.c
G231 G229 G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA
re
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G234 G234 G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB
pa
G235 G237 G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB
Since it is necessary that motor power is off for spindle changing, please
set off the spindle rotation command (SFRA/SRVA) and the spindle
w
[Function] The selection status signal of the electromagnetic contactor for switching
the spindle motor power-lines is input.
://
[Usage] Usually, the state of the auxiliary contact (contact A) of the magnetic
contactor for the sub spindle motor is entered directly.
ht
[Function] When bit 2 of parameter No. 4014 (FS16) is set to 0, this signal is used
as the power line state check signal. So, the state of selection by the
magnetic contactor for spindle motor power line switching is entered.
0: The main spindle motor is selected.
1: The sub spindle motor is selected.
[Usage] In the case of changing from the main spindle to the sub spindle, this
signal is set from ”1” to ”0” after confirming that the electromagnetic
contactor on the main spindle side is off and that the electromagnetic
contactor on the sub spindle side is on.
In the case of changing from the sub spindle to the main spindle, this
signal is set from ”0” to ”1” after confirming that the electromagnetic
contactor on the sub spindle side is off and that the electromagnetic
contactor on the main spindle side is on.
514
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
1 : The electromagnetic contactor on the main spindle side is closed.
om
[Usage] The status of the auxiliary contact (”A” contact) of the electromagnetic
contactor on the main spindle side is input.
This signal is valid when bit 2 of parameter No. 4014 (FS16) is set to 1.
s.c
(2) Output Signal (DO signal) CNC to PMC
re
First spindle control output signal
FS0 FS15 FS16 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA
pa
F281 F229 F045
[Usage] This signal is output after receiving the switching request signal
(SPSLA).
://
This signal selects the electromagnetic contactor for switching the spindle
motor power-line.
tp
At changing from the sub spindle to the main spindle, this signal changes
from ”1” to ”0” after the switching request signal (SPSLA) is received.
As a result, the electromagnetic contactor for the sub spindle is first turned
ht
515
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
[Function] This signal shows by which spindle characteristic the spindle motor is
controlled.
0 : It is controlled by a main spindle characteristic.
1 : It is controlled by a sub spindle characteristic.
/
[Usage] The switching request signal (SPSLA) changes, and after it is confirmed
om
that this signal is corresponding to the switching request signal (SPSLA),
it moves to the next movement.
Since it is necessary that the motor power is off until this signal is
corresponding to the switching request signal (SPSLA) after the change
s.c
of the switching request signal (SPSLA), please set off the spindle
rotation command (SFRA/SRVA) and the spindle orientation command
(ORCM) at the switching operation.
re
(d) Speed zero signal (SSTA)
[Function] It becomes ”1” while the motor speed is below the speed zero detection
pa
level which is set by parameter.
0 : It is above the speed zero detection level.
1 : It is below the speed zero detection level.
cs
[Usage] At switching the spindle, it is necessary both that the motor power is off
and that the motor is stopping.
.cn
This signal is used for confirming whether the motor is stopping.
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
516
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.6.7
Sequence
(1) When the Status of both Electromagnetic Contactors for the Sub Spindle (MCFNA) and for the Main Spindle
(MFNHGA) is Confirmed on the Spindle Side and the Spindle Switching Control Works
/
Parameter NO.4014 #2=1 (FS16)
om
MAIN SPINDLE ³ SUB SPINDLE ³ MAIN SPINDLE
Spindle forward rotation command
(SFRA) or Spindle reverse rotation OFF (=0) OFF (=0)
ON (=1) ON (=1) ON (=1)
s.c
command (SRVA)
PMC ³ CNC
re
Stop
Speed zero signal (SSTA) OFF (=0) OFF (=0) OFF (=0)
CNC ³ PMC
pa
ON (=1) ON (=1)
besides besides
t2 t2’
t2<1sec t2’<1sec
NOTE
If the electromagnetic contactor status check signals for the main spindle (MFNHGA) and for
the sub spindle (MCFNA) do not change within 1 second after the switching request signal
(SPSLA) is changed, the alarm occurs.
517
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
(2) When the Spindle Switching Control Works by Confirming Only the Power-line Status Check Signal (MCFNA)
For parameter No. 4014#2=0 (FS16)
/
Spindle forward rotation command
om
(SFRA) or Spindle reverse rotation ON (=1) OFF (=0) ON (=1) OFF (=0) ON (=1)
command (SRVA)
PMC ³ CNC
s.c
Spindle motor speed
Stop
Speed zero signal (SSTA) OFF (=0) OFF (=0) OFF (=0)
CNC ³ PMC ON (=1) ON (=1)
re
SUB (=1)
Switching request signal (SPSLA) MAIN (=0) MAIN (=0)
PMC ³ CNC
pa
MAIN (=0) MAIN (=0)
Power-line switching signal (CHPA) SUB (=1)
CNC ³ PMC
cs
OPEN
CLOSED CLOSED
Main side electromagnetic contactor
(MCC2)
.cn
OPEN OPEN
CLOSED
Sub side electromagnetic contactor
(MCC1)
Power-line status check signal OPEN (=0)
w
G
://
NOTE
1 Because there are electromagnetic contactor operation delays etc. when checking
tp
changing the power cable condition verification signal (MCFN) with the power cable switching
signal (CHP).
2 If the power-line status signal (MCFNA) doesnot change within 1 second after the switching
request signal (SPSLA) is changed, the alarm occurs.
518
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
/
Parameter No.
om
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
6514#0 3014#0 4014#0 Whether the spindle switching control function is used (Set to 1.)
Whether the spindle switching control function is enabled during rotation of the sub
s.c
6514#1 3014#1 4014#1
spindle
Function for checking the statuses of the magnetic contactors both for the main
6514#2 3014#2 4014#2
spindle and for the sub spindle
re
6524 3024 4024 Zero speed detection level (for the main spindle)
6163 3343 4199 Zero speed detection level (for the sub spindle)
pa
D The following parameters may have to be changed depending on the
combination of the two motors and the spindle switching control.
cs
Manually change the parameters after automatic parameter setting.
Parameter No.
.cn
FS0 FS15 FS16 Description
Main Sub Main Sub Main Sub
6513 6153 3013 3333 4013 4189
Data on dead zone for current
#6 to 2 #6 to 2 #6 to 2 #6 to 2 #6 to 2 #6 to 2
w
11.6.9
://
Cautions in Use
D The magnetic contact for switching the power line must have an
adequate capacity for the spindle amplifier module.
tp
The example given below shows the model codes of Fuji Electric Co.,
Ltd.
ht
519
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
D The indicated voltages for the speed meter and load meter of the main
spindle may differ from those of the sub spindle. In this case, switch
between the speed meter or load meter for the main spindle and sub
spindle as follows.
/
Switching circuit
om
SM
or
LM For sub
For main spindle spindle
s.c
re
0M
Speed meter or
load meter
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
520
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.7
SWITCHING UNIT
11.7.1 The switching unit uses an electromagnetic contactor outside the spindle
General amplifier module to switch power lines for spindle switching control for
two motors or for speed range switching control for a motor in the
/
following cases:
om
D Switching a power line from one motor to another motor (spindle
switching control)
D Switching a power line for a motor which has two types of windings
s.c
(speed range switching control)
NOTE
This unit cannot be used for αC series.
re
11.7.2
pa
cs
Specification No. Applicable
Specification No. Application
amplifier
.cn
For spindle switching control and for speed
A06B–6078–K034
range switching control (Type B) SPM–15 or
less
A06B–6078–K035 For speed range switching control (Type A)
w
NOTE
Type A : Switching the connection for the motor winding.
://
521
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.7.3
Specifications
(1) Specifications of Electromagnetic Contactors
A58L-0001-0306 A58L-0001-0312
FANUC purchase
/
(SC-3N manufactured (SC-6N manufactured
code No.
om
by Fuji Electric) by Fuji Electric)
Rated operating
220 V 220 V
voltage
Rated operating
65 A 125 A
s.c
current
re
Frequency of
1200 times/hour or more
switching operation
pa
Life expectancy of Mechanical 5 million times or more
the switching op-
o -
eration Electrical 1 million times or more
cs
Rating of the elec-
tromagnetic opera- 200/220 V, –15%, +10%, 50/60"1 Hz
tion coil
.cn
Applicable spindle
SPM–15 or less SPM–30 or less
amplifier module
A58L-0001-0307
FANUC purchase code No.
(LY2-D manufactured by Omron)
w
522
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.7.4
External Dimensions
and Dimensions for
Mounting
(1) External Dimensions and Dimensions for Mounting the Switching Unit for the Spindle Switching Control and
/
om
Speed Range Switching Control (Type B: Connection)
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
A06B-6059-K034
Layout Drawing
tp
RELAY
MCC1 MCC2
ht
523
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
A06B-6059-K036
w
Layout Drawing
w
RELAY
MCC1 MCC2
w
://
tp
ht
524
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
(2) Outside Dimensions and Dimensions for Mounting the Switching Unit for Speed Range Switching Control
(Type A: Connection)
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
A06B-6059-K035
w
Layout Drawing
://
RELAY
MCC1 MCC2
tp
ht
525
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
A06B-6059-K037
w
Layout Drawing
w
RELAY
w
MCC1 MCC2
://
tp
ht
526
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.7.5
Connection
Complete Schematic
Drawing
/
om
(1) Schematic Drawing of the Switching Unit for Spindle Switching Control
Swiching unit
s.c
+24V
RYS (8) RELAY
CNC JA7B
SOCKET
(5) Single-phase
200VAC
re
MAIN
MCC1 SPINDLE
(42) MOTOR
pa
Electromagnetic contactor
AC spindle for switching power lines 2 U2
amplifier 4 V2 U2
PMC module 6 W2 V2
W2
(SPM)
cs
TB2 MCC2 G
U 1 2
ÂÂ
U V 3 4
.cn
TYPE 3 V W 5 6
ÂÂ
W
G
SUB
SPINDLE
w
MCC1
MOTOR
1 2 2 U1
3 U1
w
4 4 V1
5 6 6 W1 V1
W1
JY6 JY2
w
G
G
://
tp
ht
527
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
(2) Schematic Drawing of the Switching Unit for Speed Range Switching Control (Type A: Connection)
Swiching unit
+24V
CNC JA7B RYS (8) RELAY
SOCKET (5)
Single-phase
200VAC
/
MCC1 (42)
om
Electromagnetic contactor
AC spindle for switching power lines 2 U
amplifier 4 V
PMC module 6 W
(SPM) U
s.c
MCC2
TB2 V
U U 2 1 W
ÂÂ
V 4 3
V W 6 5 AC
W
ÂÂ
G
re
spindle
motor
MCC1
pa
2 1 1 X X
4 3 3 Y Y
6 5 5 Z Z
JY2
G
cs G
.cn
(3) Schematic Drawing of the Switching Unit for Speed Range Switching Control (Type B: Connection)
w
Swiching unit
+24V
RYS (8) RELAY
w
AC spindle 2 U2
amplifier Electromagnetic contactor 4 V2
://
U U 1 2 AC
V 3 4
ÂÂ
V W 5 6 spindle
W motor
G
ÂÂ
ht
MCC1
U1
1 2 U1 V1
3 4 V1
5 6 W1
W1
JY2 G
G
528
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
(4) Detailed Diagram of Connections between the PMC and the Switching Unit
/
unit control
om
signal RYS (8)
Relay
0V +24V
0V Regulated
+24V power
+24 supply 8 6 4 2 RYS
Mcc1 (14) (5)
s.c
13 14
Supplementary A1
RV contact A Mcc1 (42)
Magnetic contact Mcc1
MCC1 200VAC
re
status signal for (13) Supplementary A
the low-speed contact B 2
range or the sub Mcc 42
0V (42) 41
spindle
pa
32 31
0V Mcc Supplementary A1
RV (41)
Magnetic contact contact B
status signal for MCC2
the high-speed
cs Supplementary A
range or the main contact A
0V 42 41 2
spindle
.cn
NOTE
1 Connect the PMC to the switching unit at the screw terminals of the electromagnetic contactor
w
529
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.7.6
Caution in Use D Install the switching unit under the same conditions as for a spindle
amplifier.
Conditions for installing the switching unit
- Ambient temperature:
/
om
0 to 55°C for the unit
0 to 45°C for the cabinet
- Ambient humidity: 90%RH or less, no condensation
- Vibration : 0.5 G or less during operation
s.c
- Ambient air : Corrosive, conductive mist or water drops must not
come into direct contact with electronic circuits.
D Install the switching unit according to Fig. 11.7.6 (a). An inclination
re
of 15 degrees is permitted in the right, left, front, and back.
pa
cs
.cn
D It may be necessary to install the unit on its side as shown in Fig. 11.7.6
(b), due to wiring or space limitations. The characteristics of the
w
530
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
D Leave enough space to prevent arc from affecting other units, as shown
in Fig. 11.7.6 (c).
/
om
s.c
Fig.11.7.6 (c) Required Space
re
jump at power on or its life may be decreased. If a cable is not
connected to the contactor securely, the connected part may generate
heat or the cable may loosen and come off, resulting in a serious
pa
accident.
- Tightening torque
cs
z Electromagnetic contactor
Tightening torque (kg · cm)
Item
.cn
A58L-0001-0306 A58L-0001-0312
MCC main terminal 62.0 (M6.0) 84.0 (M8.0)
MCC supplementary terminal 14.0 (M3.5) 14.0 (M3.5)
z Relay socket
w
531
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.8
DIFFERENTIAL
SPINDLE SPEED
CONTROL
/
11.8.1 Differential spindle speed control relatively controls the rotation speed of
om
Outline spindle 2 for the rotation speed of spindle 1.
NOTE
This function is not available for αC series.
s.c
re
11.8.2 The Rigid Tap movement can be done without stopping the rotation of
Characteristic work (Spindle 1). So far, to do the Rigid Tap, it was necessary to stop
pa
spindling it temporarily. It is possible to shorten the time by using this
function.
cs
11.8.3
.cn
Configuration and
Ordering Number
w
Configuration
PMC
w
CNC
Communication cable
://
Spindle
amplifier
module
(SPM) Power line
Spindle
TYPE 3 Spindle 1
tp
motor Spindle 2
JY8 JY4 (for workpiece)
(on tool side)
JX4 JY2
Velocity feedback
ht
Position coder
feedback signal
for spindle 2 Position coder
532
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
11.8.4
Specifications of the D The position coder signal for spindle 1, input to connector JY8, is
Position Coder Signal output from connector JX4.
D High resolution magnetic pulse coder can’t be used when you use this
differential speed control function.
/
D Unite position coders by 1:1 against Spindle 1
om
D Use the position coders of the signal 1024p/rev or 512p/rev output.
(set with parameters)
D At the differential speed Rigid Tap, a rotating speed of spindle 2
s.c
(commanded speed at Rigid Tap + rotating speed of Spindle 1) must
not be over the maximum speed range.
In the range where the rotating speed is high, the output torque of the
motor becomes small generally. For that set acceleration/deceleration
re
time constant at the Rigid Tap more largely than usually.
D Refer to the item of the Rigid Tap of the operator’s manual of CNC for
pa
use concerning the Rigid Tap.
cs
11.8.5
Signal Explanation
.cn
533
11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE B–65162E/03
11.8.6
Example of Sequence
of Differential Speed
Rigid Tap
/
M29S-; G84X.. R.. ; G80;
om
M29
(³PMC)
ENB
(PMC)
s.c
SFR
re
(CNC²)
SARS
pa
(³PMC)
Speed arrival
DEFMOD
(CNC²)
cs
Differential speed mode
RGTAP
.cn
(CNC²)
FIN
(CNC²)
w
Position Loop
w
(Bold Dashed)
Not 0 min–1
Not 0 min–1
://
Rotating speed of
Spindle 2 0 min–1
tp
534
B–65162E/03 11. OPTION RELATED TO SPINDLE
NOTE
1 When applying differential speed control to rigid tapping
(differential speed rigid tapping), ensure that the sum of the
speed specified for rigid tapping and that of the first spindle
does not exceed the maximum speed of the second spindle.
2 The output torque of a motor generally decreases in high
/
speed areas. So, a larger acceleration/deceleration time
om
constant must be set for rigid tapping.
3 For the method of rigid tapping, refer to the CNC manual.
s.c
11.8.7 The table below lists the parameters related to the differential speed
re
Parameters control function. Refer to the Parameter manual for details.
pa
Parameter No.
Description
FS0 FS15 FS16
6500#5 3000#5 4000#5 Whether the differential speed control function is used (Set to 1.)
cs
6500#6 3000#6 4000#6 Setting of the differential speed direction
.cn
6500#0 3000#0 4000#0 Rotational direction of the spindle and motor
6500#7 3000#7 4000#7 Setting of the number of position coder feedback pulses for spindle 1.
w
6502#5 3002#5 4002#5 Setting of the rotation direction signal function in the servo mode
535
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
536
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
12.1
POSITION CODERS
12.1.1
/
α Position Coder
om
(1) Name and Drawing Number
s.c
Name Drawing No. Remarks
Mounted with j68 flange,
α position coder A860–0309–T302
10,000 min–1
re
(2) Absolute Maximum Ratings
pa
Item Specifications
Power supply voltage –0.5V to +7.0V
cs Operating temperature 0_C to +50_C
Humidity 95% RH or less
.cn
PSE,*PSE 1 pulse/rev
537
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
a b c d
/
a, b, c, d=T/4"T/10
om
PAE
*PAE
s.c
PBE
re
*PBE
e Txex2.3T
pa
cs PSE
*PSE
.cn
A B C D E F G H J
PAE PSE PBE +5V
w
K L M N P R S T
0V *PAE *PSE *PBE
w
://
tp
ht
538
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
s.c
re
pa MS connector:
MS3102A–20–29P
cs
.cn
12.1.2
High–resolution
Position Coder
w
539
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
Operating 10kg
om
Radial load
Allowable input axis Stopped 20kg
load Operating 5kg
Thrust load
Stopped 10kg
s.c
Maximum speed 8,000min–1
Dust–proof and drip–proof structure (equivalent to
Structure
IP55: when a waterproof connector is fitted)
re
Tolerable vibration ac-
10G (10 to 500Hz)
celeration/deceleration
pa
Weight Approx. 750kg
a b c d
a, b, c, d=T/4"T/10
w
PAE
w
*PAE
w
PBE
://
*PBE
e Txex2.3T
tp
PSE
ht
*PSE
540
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
s.c
re
pa MS connector:
cs MS3102A–20–29PW
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
541
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
12.1.3
Mounting Conditions
and Notes (a) Method of connection
There are two methods of connecting an α position coder or
high–resolution position coder with the spindle.
/
om
(1) Connecting a position coder to the back of the spindle with a flexible
joint
This method conveys the rotation of the spindle precisely to the
position coder, so that the positioning precision of the position coder
s.c
is high. However, this method imposes a restriction on the location
of the installation. So, some modifications to the mechanical section
may become necessary.
re
(2) As shown below, fit the shaft for holding the pulley onto the shaft of
the position coder, and hold the shaft with double bearings. Thus, the
pulley of the position coder is connected to the pulley mounted on the
pa
spindle via a timing belt.
Shaft
w
Mounting plate
://
below.
1) If there is any play between the shaft for holding the pulley and the
ht
shaft of the position coder, fretting can occur on the position coder
shaft, and the key can become loose, thus resulting in degraded
precision of the position coder positioning. So, fit the components
together accurately to ensure that there is no play between the position
coder shaft and shaft holding the pulley, or between the key and key
groove.
2) If the axis center of the position coder shaft is not aligned with the axis
center of the circumference of the position coder pulley, or if the axis
center of the spindle is not aligned with the axis center of the pulley
fitted onto the spindle, the positioning precision of the spindle
degrades in proportion to the magnitude of the eccentricity. So,
minimize these eccentricities.
542
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
(b) Shock
The position coders are precision detectors. So, be careful to protect
the position coders from shock.
(c) Atmosphere
The position coders conform to protection class IP55. However, this
/
class specifies short–term performance. So, ensure that the position
om
coders are not exposed to coolant or lubricant, and that oil does not
build up on the position coders. If a position coder is exposed to
coolant or lubricant, place a protection cover over the position coder.
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
543
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
12.2
BZ SENSOR
(1) Names and Drawing Numbers
/
om
Name Drawing No. Gear
N mber of teeth
Number Maxim m speed
Maximum
Inner diameter Outer diameter
BZ sensor 128 A860–0392–T012 128 20,000min–1 φ40 φ52
BZ sensor 128H A860–0392–T082 128 50,000min–1 φ40 φ52
s.c
BZ sensor 256 A860–0392–T011 256 15,000min–1 φ82 φ103.2
BZ sensor 256S A860–0392–T014 256 15,000min–1 φ88 φ103.2
re
BZ sensor 236H A860–0392–T081 256 30,000min–1 φ82 φ103.2
BZ sensor 384 A860–0392–T018 384 15,000min–1 φ125 φ154.4
pa
BZ sensor 512 A860–0392–T013 512 10,000min–1 φ160 φ205.6
256 λ/rev
256/256S/256H
O t t signals
Output i l
VB,*VB BZ sensor 384 384 λ/rev
ht
544
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
Detection ring B
Detection ring A
w
*Accessory (Honda)
Connector: Z–3742 pcs Sensor mounting ring
Contact: HKP–F41312 pcs
w
Number
Sensor drawing No. Detection ring φA* φB* C D E φF G
of teeth
A860–0392–T011 Ring 1
tp
0 040
+0.040 +0.0
00
A860–0392–T014 Ring 4 256 108 +0.020 140h6 –0.025 51 R80 46 124 30°
ht
A860–0392–T081 Ring 6
A860–0392–T012 Ring 2 +0.019 +0.0
128 56H6 –0 0
–0.0 100h6 –0.022
0 022 25 R57 20 78 10°
10
A860–0392–T082 Ring 7
For the outside dimensions of the detection rings, see Item (c).
545
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
NOTE
– Use the BZ sensor at temperatures not exceeding 80°C.
– The BZ sensor is a precision device. It must be handled with care. In particular, ensure that
no force is applied to the S section.
– The sensor is an electronic device. Provide dust and drip protection on the machine so that
the sensor is not exposed to chips, oil, water, or any other harmful substance.
/
– Those dimensions that are marked with an asterisk (*) are the dimensions of the sensor
om
mounting ring. Design a socket and spigot joint on the machine side to match the dimensions.
If a socket joint on the machine side is designed incorrectly, an incorrect signal may be output.
– The gap between the sensor and detection ring is adjusted beforehand. However, an output
signal may not satisfy the specified value due to a socket and spigot joint error. Check the
s.c
output signals when mounting a sensor. If an output signal does not satisfy a specified value,
adjust the gap. For information about the output signal level for gap adjustment, refer to Part
II of ”FANUC Built–in AC Spindle Motor α Series Descriptions (B–65202EN).”
re
– Make a shielded wire connection.
– To ensure ease of maintenance, install a sensor in a location where it can be replaced easily.
– The detection ring of a sensor can be exchanged with another sensor provided the sensors
pa
have the same drawing number.
– A sensor and detection ring cannot be combined if the detection ring is designed for a drawing
number different from that of the sensor.
cs
– A mating connector (accessory) is provided with the BZ sensor.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
546
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
Diameter of through hole
for connector
(φ15 for one each)
1200 (cable length)
s.c
(Note)
(Note)
re
(Note)
pa
cs
.cn
(Note)
4.5 mm or
less
w
w
*Accessory (Honda)
Connector: Z–3742 pcs Detection ring B
Contact: HKP–F41312 pcs
Detection ring A
://
tp
Number
Sensor drawing No. Detection ring φA B C D
of teeth
+0.0
ht
For the outside dimensions of the detection rings, see Item (c).
547
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
NOTE
– Use the BZ sensor at temperatures not exceeding 80°C.
– The BZ sensor is a precision device. It must be handled with care. In particular, ensure that
no force is applied to the S section.
– The sensor is an electronic device. Provide dust and drip protection on the machine so that
the sensor is not exposed to chips, oil, water, or any other harmful substance.
/
– When installing a BZ sensor, press it against the machine–side socket and spigot joint ( A in
om
size). (The machine–side socket and spigot joint is 4.5 mm high.) The gap between the sensor
and detection ring is adjusted beforehand. However, an output signal may not satisfy the
specified value due to a socket and spigot joint error. Check the output signals when mounting
a sensor. If an output signal does not satisfy the specified value, adjust the gap. For information
s.c
about the output signal level for gap adjustment, refer to Part II of ”FANUC Built–in AC Spindle
Motor α Series Descriptions (B–65202EN).”
– To mount the BZ sensor, use screws of M4 x 20 mm and M4 x 25 mm.
re
– Secure the cable at appropriate locations so that, when the cable is pulled, no force is directly
applied to the BZ sensor.
– Make a shielded wire connection.
pa
– To ensure ease of maintenance, install a sensor in a location where the sensor can be replaced
easily.
– The detection ring of a sensor can be exchanged with another sensor provided the sensors are
cs
of the same drawing number.
– A sensor cannot be combined with a detection ring if the detection ring is designed for a drawing
.cn
number different from that of the sensor.
– A mating connector (accessory) is provided with the BZ sensor.
w
548
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
+0.0 +0.016
Ring 2, 7 52 –0.020 40 –0.0 10"0.1 52 +0.0
–0.020 40 +0.016
–0.0 8.6"0.1 6.7
om
+0.0 +0.020
Ring 3 205.6 –0.020 160 –0.0 10"0.1 205.6 +0.0
–0.020 160 +0.020
–0.0 8.6"0.1 6.7
+0.0 +0.0
Ring 4 103.2 –0.020 88 –0.018 10"0.1 103.2 +0.0
–0.020 88 +0.0
–0.018 8.6"0.1 6.7
s.c
+0.0
Ring 5 154.4 –0.020 125 +0.025
–0.0 10"0.1 154.4 +0.0
–0.020
+0.025
125 –0.0 8.6"0.1 6.7
For the outside dimensions of the sensor, see Item (4) above.
re
NOTE
– Before mounting a ring on the spindle, press the ring into the sleeve.
pa
– A ring can be reused only once.
– The outer tooth shape is special. So, ensure that the teeth are not deformed or chipped by an
external force.
cs
– Check the output signal of the sensor. For output signal adjustment, refer to Part II of ”FANUC
Built–in AC Spindle Motor α Series Descriptions (B–65202EN).”
.cn
Sensor drawing No. T011 T012 T013 T014 T018 T081 T082
Number of teeth 256 teeth 128 teeth 512 teeth 256 teeth 384 teeth 256 teeth 128 teeth
w
Maximum speed (min–1) 15,000 20,000 10,000 15,000 15,000 30,000 50,000
w
NOTE
The allowance for shrink fitting depends on the maximum speed. For design, see Item (6).
://
tp
ht
549
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
D Ensure that the fluctuation of the rings with respect to the sensor is within
om
0.03 mm.
D The fluctuation of the mounting ring with respect to the center of the shaft
is within 0.02 mm.
s.c
Value 22 applies to other
than T013 and T018.
re
Value 16 applies to
T013 and T018.
pa
cs Sensor
Sleeve
.cn
w
Shaft
w
w
Detection ring B
://
Detection ring A
tp
Mounting ring
ht
550
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 3 Ring 4 Ring 5 Ring 6 Ring 7
om
3000 φ7 to φ35 φ6 to φ32 φ11 to φ41 φ7 to φ35 φ8 to φ43 φ7 to φ35 φ6 to φ32
3500 ↓ ↓ φ13 to φ43 ↓ φ9 to φ44 ↓ ↓
4500 ↓ ↓ φ19 to φ49 ↓ φ11 to φ46 ↓ ↓
s.c
6000 φ9 to φ37 ↓ φ29 to φ59 φ9 to φ37 φ15 to φ50 φ9 to φ37 ↓
8000 φ11 to φ39 ↓ φ47 to φ77 φ11 to φ39 φ24 to φ59 φ11 to φ39 ↓
φ71 to
10000 φ14 to φ42 ↓ φ15 to φ43 φ35 to φ70 φ14 to φ42 ↓
re
φ101
12000 φ18 to φ46 φ7 to φ33 φ19 to φ47 φ47 to φ82 φ18 to φ46 φ7 to φ33
pa
φ71 to
15000 φ26 to φ54 φ8 to φ34 φ28 to φ56 φ26 to φ54 φ8 to φ34
φ106
20000 φ10 to φ36 φ41 to φ69 φ10 to φ36
cs
25000 φ62 to φ90 φ12 to φ38
φ87 to
30000 φ15 to φ41
.cn
φ115
40000 φ23 to φ49
50000 φ33 to φ59
w
NOTE
– From the table above, select the shrink fitting allowance that matches a maximum speed and
w
type of ring being used. If an incorrect allowance is employed, idle rotation or damage can
result.
w
– The rings cannot be used at a maximum speed that does not appear in the table above. For
the maximum allowable speed of each ring, see Item (C).
://
tp
ht
551
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
12.3
OTHER DETECTORS
12.3.1
High–resolution
/
om
Magnetic Pulse Coder
(1) Names and Drawing Numbers
s.c
Remarks
Name Drawing No. Drum
Maxim m speed
Maximum
Inner diameter Outer diameter
re
65 drums A860–0382–T121 15,000min–1 φ50 φ65
97.5 drums A860–0382–T122 13,000min–1 φ70 φ97.5
pa
130 drums A860–0382–T123 10,000min–1 φ105 φ130
195 drums A860–0382–T124 6,500min–1 φ160 φ195
cs
(2) Absolute Maximum Ratings
.cn
Table.12.3.1 (b) Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item Specifications
Power supply voltage –0.5V to +7.0V
Operating temperature 0_C to +50_C
w
552
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
Sensor 4– φ5.5, equally spaced
on φE circumference
s.c
Signal line 400 mm
Reference surface
re
pa
Sensor
cs Magnetic drum
R20 or more
.cn
w
Resolu-
Sensor drawing No. Detection ring φA φB C D φE F
tion
w
+0.0 +0.0
A860–0382–T121 Drum 1 360,000 140 –0.015 70 –0.011 191 6 130 15"0.2
+0.0 +0.015
A860–0382–T122 Drum 2 360,000 170 –0.015 110 –0.0 224 10 160 19"0.2
w
+0.0 +0.015
A860–0382–T123 Drum 3 360,000 200 –0.015 140 –0.0 256 10 190 19"0.2
://
+0.0 +0.015
A860–0382–T124 Drum 4 360,000 270 –0.015 210 –0.0 321 10 260 19"0.2
553
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
NOTE
– Use this sensor at temperatures not exceeding 50°C.
– The high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is equipped with a preamplifier.
– A sensor set consisting of a magnetic drum, sensor, and preamplifier is adjusted prior to
shipment, and the same serial number is stamped onto each of the components constituting
that set. When using this sensor, check the serial numbers to ensure that the sensor set does
/
not include a component having a different serial number. Moreover, never detach the sensor
om
from its mounting plate.
– This sensor consists of electronic circuits and includes many magnetic components. Never
expose the sensor to a magnetic field of 20 gauss or more. Be careful not to place the sensor
in a magnetic field. Never place a magnet or magnetized object near this sensor.
s.c
– Check the output signals of this sensor. For output signal adjustment, refer to Part II of the
”FANUC Built–in AC Spindle Motor α Series Descriptions (B–65202EN).”
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
554
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
s.c
re
6– φD, equally spaced
on φE circumference
pa
cs
Sensor drawing No. Detection ring φA φB φC φD φE
+0.0 +0.0
.cn
A860–0382–T121 Drum 1 64.05"0.01 65 –0.015 50 –0.011 ––– –––
+0.0 +0.015
A860–0382–T122 Drum 2 96.55"0.01 97.5 –0.015 70 –0.0 5.5 80
+0.0 +0.015
A860–0382–T123 Drum 3 129.05"0.01 130 –0.015 105 –0.0 5.5 115
w
+0.0 +0.015
A860–0382–T124 Drum 4 194.05"0.01 195 –0.015 160 –0.0 6.5 175
w
555
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
(c) Preamplifier
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
NOTE
– Use this preamplifier at temperatures not exceeding 50°C.
w
– This preamplifier is required when the high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is used.
– A sensor set consisting of a magnetic drum, sensor, and preamplifier is adjusted prior to
w
shipment, and the same serial number is stamped onto each of the components constituting
a set. When using this sensor, check the serial numbers to ensure that the sensor set does
not include a component having a different serial number. Moreover, never detach the sensor
w
– The waterproofing of the preamplifier case satisfies IP55. However, if this preamplifier is
exposed to coolant, for example, at all times, or is always wet, it may fail. Be careful, therefore,
not to expose the preamplifier to coolant and so forth.
tp
– Check the output signals of this sensor. For output signal adjustment, refer to Part II of the
”FANUC Built–in AC Spindle Motor α Series Descriptions (B–65202EN).”
ht
556
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
the ingress of foreign matter.
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
A860–0382–T122
Sensor A860–0382–T121 A860–0382–T123
w
A860–0382–T124
Mount the drum by shrink fitting the drum or ex-
Secure the drum by installing screws in the 6–
w
Mount the drum so that the reference surface of the drum faces the nose of the spindle. The
Drum mounting direction
reference surface of the drum is on the opposite side to the surface on which Z is printed.
tp
NOTE
– Use a magnetic material for the motor housing to minimize magnetic leakage from the motor.
ht
– Ensure that the motor housing is at least 15 mm thick at the sensor mounting section.
– After assembling the drum with the sleeve, mount the drum onto the spindle. Use a
configuration where the sleeve holds the drum on the motor side (left side in the figure above).
If this configuration is impossible, use a non–magnetic material (such as stainless steel) for the
sleeve.
– If a magnetic substance is placed at the back of the magnetic drum (on the right side in the figure
above), allow a clearance of 30 mm.
557
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
Dial gauge
Shaft
s.c
Reference mounting surface
re
pa
Sensor drawing No. Maximum fluctuation (µm)
cs
A860–0382–T121 20
A860–0382–T122 25
.cn
A860–0382–T123 30
A860–0382–T124 40
w
558
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
Surface on which Z is printed
om
Shaft
s.c
Drum reference surface
Magnetic drum
re
pa
NOTE
When touching the cylindrical drum surface with a dial
cs
gauge, touch an area within 5 mm of the surface on which
Z is printed. The other area on the drum surface holds
magnetic information, so that information may be lost if the
.cn
other area is touched with a dial gauge.
Ensure that the fluctuation of the mounting plate socket and spigot joint
is within 20 µ m with respect to the shaft.
w
w
Reference mounting
surface
tp
ht
Shaft
Magnetic drum
559
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
6000 φ26 to φ47
8000 φ27 to φ48
10000 φ27 to φ48
φ28 to φ49
s.c
12000
15000 φ30 to φ51
re
NOTE
– From the table above, select the allowance that matches the
pa
maximum speed being used. If an incorrect allowance is
employed, idle rotation or deformation can result.
– The drum may be heated up to 100°C. Never heat the drum
cs
to temperatures in excess of 100°C.
.cn
12.3.2
Magnetic Sensor (for
w
Orientation)
(1) Names and Drawing Numbers
w
NOTE
With #*IP, the connector is waterproof.
The outer diameter of a cable usable with a waterproof connector is φ8.5 to φ9.7 (including
tolerance).
A waterproof connector, when fitted, satisfies IP64.
560
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
Humidity 30% to 90% RH (no condensation)
om
(3) Electrical Specifications
s.c
Item Specifications
Power supply voltage DC15V"5%
Current consumption 100mA or less
re
Table.12.3.2 (c) Electrical Specifications
Channel Signal
pa
CH 1 1/rev (MSA–MSB)
CH 2 1/rev (LSA–LSB)
cs
(4) Output Pin Configuration
.cn
Table.12.3.2 (d) Output Pin Configuration
Pin A B C D E F
Signal name MSA 0V +15V MSB LSB LSA
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
561
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
less
om
33" 14.8" 315" 460" 770" 1000" 1540" 1700"
Magnet weight g 100"3
1.5 0.7 10 10 15 20 25 30
Gap between magnet
mm 1.0 to 2.0
and sensor (Note 1)
s.c
Displacement between
magnet center and sen- mm 0 to "2.0
sor center (Note 2)
re
Operating temperature n 0 to 50
Applicable axis dimen- +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0
mm ––– 40 –0.025 50 –0.025 60 –0.025 70 –0.025 80 –0.025 90 –0.025
pa
sions
NOTE
cs
1
Magnet
.cn
w
1 to 2 mm
1 to 2 mm
w
w
2
://
tp
ht
3 If the distance from the center to the location where a magnet is installed is large, the maximum
speed is limited by centrifugal force.
4 The use of high–tensile screws is recommended for magnet installation.
562
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
1 Detection head
1
–L– For standard
1 specification
/
TRC–116–12A–7M
12φ
om
6φ
5
18φ 36φ 20φ
46
27 16 4.5 55
s.c
For IP specification
TRC–116–9008P7M6.3
20φ
re
52
2 Detector
pa
cs
Detection head
IN receptacle 2–φ 5.4 Output receptacle
.cn
TRC–116–21A10–7F TRC–116–21A10–7M
FANUC
MAGUNETIC SENSOR
w
A57L–0001–0037
40 50 60
MAKOME CORP.
w
95
w
25
://
tp
ht
563
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
3 Magnet
Reference
hole 50 Mounting hole
φ 1.0 4–φ 4.3
/
4–C4 30 7.5
om
SPC:2.0t
s.c
30 12 22
re
SUS:0.5t
2.5
SUS:0.5t
10
w
7.5
SPC:2.0t
w
2
w
50
://
Reference hole 50 +0 9
–0.5
φ 1.0
ht
30 2
4–C1
+0–0.5
36 30
564
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
C Cover (SUS)
Bolt (4 pcs)
Shupan ring
Spindle
φA φB
/
Detailed dimensions
om
A B C D E F
φEH7 (Axis tolerance h6)
Q 66 54 20 9 40 54
R 78 66 23 11 50 66
S 94 79 25 12 60 79
T 105 90 28 14 70 90 Case (SUS) 2
U1 118 102 34 19 80 102 Distance to the D
s.c
center of a
U2 125 112 34 19 90 112
magnet
Magnetic sensor
re
Without a cover
With a cover
45k
pa
Material for balancing
cs
Arrow (stamped)
.cn
Magnet
2– 5φ through hole
Equally spaced on
φF circumference
w
565
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
om
Tighten the bolts in order from
to repeatedly, in stages.
s.c
D The reference hole and polarity of a magnet are related to each other
re
as shown below.
pa
Reference hole φ1.0
cs
.cn
w
w
w
D The two holes (φ5.0) on the side opposite the side on which magnetic
sensor Q, R, S, or T is installed with screws should be used for a jig
://
566
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
s.c
Spindle (rotating body)
re
R
Mounting distance
pa
H [mm]
60 to 110mm
50
cs 30 Reference hole (upper)
7.5
.cn
Magnetic
Gap L=6mm
L
(Standard) 1.0mm φ18
Pin groove (upper)
w
2.0mm
Mounting plate
(not thicker than 8mm)
w
φ36
w
Metal socket
φ20.0
ht
Magnetic sensor
amplifier
567
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
Distance H: 60 to 110 mm
/
Spindle (rotating body)
om
s.c
Magnet Magnetic sensor head
Mounting plate
re
(not thicker than 8mm)
∆L=10 to 20mm
L=8mm or less (Standard: 6mm)
pa
Note) There must be a gap of 8mm
or more between the mounting plate
and magnet.
cs
Fig.12.3.2 (b) Example of Mounting a Magnetic Sensor (2) (Mounting a Magnetic Sensor on a Cylinder)
.cn
w
Mounting plate
(not thicker than 8mm)
w
A
L=1 to 2mm
w
Distance H: Center
60 to 110mm Magnet
://
tp
ht
O R A
Inner side
Be careful not to allow iron
chips or powder to adhere
to this area.
Fig.12.3.2 (c) Example of Mounting a Magnetic Sensor (3) (Mounting a Magnetic Sensor on a Disk)
568
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
om
s.c
L=10 to 20mm
re
Magnet polarity indication
pa
Stop position check scale Mounting plate
(not thicker than 8mm)
cs φ36
Magnetic sensor head
.cn
Metal socket
φ20
w
w
w
Fig.12.3.2 (d) Example of Mounting a Magnetic Sensor (4) (Mounting Magnetic Sensor Q, R, S, or T)
569
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
/
must be as shown below. Otherwise, forward and reverse rotations may
om
be repeated without stopping.
s.c
Magnet reference hole
Magnetic sensor
re
head pin groove
pa
Rotation direction
Slit for fixing cs
Slit for fixing
.cn
reference hole with the magnetic sensor pin groove so that the rotation
direction shown above is achieved when the forward rotation command
w
is on.
w
://
tp
ht
570
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
/
(b) Mount a magnetic sensor amplifier as close to the sensor as possible.
om
(c) Never allow a magnetic substance to come close to the magnetic
sensor. (Otherwise, the stop position may change.) In particular,
never place a magnetic device such as a solenoid near the magnet.
s.c
(d) Be careful not to allow iron chips or powder to adhere to the magnet.
(e) If the spindle contains a circuit such as a magnetic clutch for high/low
switching that forms a magnetic loop, mount a magnet on a
re
non–magnetic (such as aluminum) plate. The magnetic flux of the
magnet at a stop position is zero. However, if the magnetic loop of
pa
a magnetic clutch has an influence, a magnetic flux is always applied
when the magnetic clutch is on. Note that if the magnetic clutch is
turned on and off at a stop position, the stable magnetic flux changes,
cs
thus causing the stop position to change.
(f) Pay careful attention to the configuration so that the cable side of the
.cn
magnetic sensor head, magnetic sensor amplifier, and connection
cables are not exposed to lubricant or coolant.
(g) Mount the magnet of a magnetic sensor directly on the spindle. If a
magnet is mounted by means of a gear connection or spline
w
571
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
[Mounting example 1]
Forward rotation
Magnetic signal when SFR
Magnetic sensor reference hole
pin groove contact is ON
/
SPINDLE (closed)
om
MOTOR
s.c
Gear
connection
CCW
re
pa
cs
.cn
CW
w
[Mounting example 2]
w
Magnetic
reference hole
w
Magnetic sensor
pin groove
://
Belt connection
tp
ht
SPINDLE
MOTOR
CCW
CW
572
B–65162E/03 12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE
[Mounting example 3]
Magnetic
reference hole
/
om
Gear
Magnetic sensor connection
pin groove
s.c
SPINDLE
MOTOR
re
CCW
pa
cs
CCW
.cn
[Mounting example 4]
Magnetic
reference hole
w
SPINDLE
MOTOR
w
w
Magnetic sensor
pin groove
://
CCW
Belt connection
tp
ht
CCW
573
12. DETECTORS FOR THE SPINDLE B–65162E/03
[Mounting example 5]
/
MOTOR
om
Magnetic sensor
head pin groove
s.c
CCW
Belt connection
re
pa
cs
.cn
CCW
[Mounting example 6]
w
MOTOR
://
Magnetic sensor
head pin groove
tp
ht
CCW
Gear connection
CCW
574
ht
tp
://
w
w
w
.cn
cs APPENDIX
pa
re
s.c
om
/
A. FITTING A LIGHTNING SURGE
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX PROTECTION DEVICE
/
This appendix describes how to install a lightning surge protector and
om
provides notes on installation. For information about the lightning surge
protector recommended by FANUC, see Section 8.1.11.
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
577
A. FITTING A LIGHTNING SURGE
PROTECTION DEVICE APPENDIX B–65162E/03
A.1
INSTALLATION
A.1.1
200V Power Supply
/
om
Line–to–ground lightning
surge protector
s.c
(R A V–781BXZ–4)
Line–to–line lightning
re
surge protector
(R A V–781BYZ–2)
pa (a)
To other units
cs
(b)
To SPM/SVM
.cn
Control
Circuit breaker 2 power
w
578
A. FITTING A LIGHTNING SURGE
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX PROTECTION DEVICE
A.1.2
400V Power Supply
/
Control power
om
supply input
s.c
AC400V/460V
→AC200V/s30V
Main circuit
power supply
input
re
Ground fault Circuit breaker 1 Magnetic AC reactor
interrupter for contactor
pa
boards
To built–in fan motor
of spindle motor
Grounding
cs
Circuit breaker 3
Power supply plate (a)
(Y connection neu- (5A)
tral point grounding) Line–to–line lightning
.cn
AC400V/460V surge protector
(R A V–152BYZ–2A)
w
Line–to–ground lightning
(b) surge protector
(R A V–801BXZ–4)
w
w
://
tp
ht
579
A. FITTING A LIGHTNING SURGE
PROTECTION DEVICE APPENDIX B–65162E/03
A.2
NOTES D To increase the efficiency of lightning surge absorption, the wires
indicated by bold lines should be as short as possible.
Wire cross–sectional area:
2 mm2 or more
Wire length:
/
The total length of the cables used for lightning surge protection
om
device 1 (a) and that used for lightning surge protection device 2
(b) must not exceed 2 m.
D When performing a dielectric strength test by applying an overvoltage
to the power line, lightning surge protection device 2 must be removed
s.c
to enable the applied voltage to be maintained.
D The circuit protector (5 A) works for line protection when the lightning
surge absorber is short–circuited because of a surge higher than its
re
rating being applied.
D Because current does not flow through the lightning surge absorber 1
pa
nor 2 in a normal state, the circuit protector (5 A) can be used together
with the surge absorbers as well as with other equipment. It can be
connected to the power supply for power supply module control or
cs
spindle motor fans.
D Use Y connection neutral point grounding for the 400 V power
supply. It cannot be used for the ∆ connection 400/460 VAC line.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
580
B. SUMMARY OF AMPLIFIER
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX CONNECTORS
/
om
Power supply module Spindle amplifier module Servo amplifier module Servo amplifier module
s.c
(LEFT) (RIGHT) (LEFT) (RIGHT)
(3) (3) (3) (3)
PE
re
K3 200S K4 200S
(1) (1) (1) (1)
200R 200R 200R 200R
pa
350/X 350/X 350/X 350/X
CX2A CX2B CX2A CX2B CX2A CX2B CX2A CX2B
(LEFT) (RIGHT) (LEFT) (RIGHT) (LEFT) (RIGHT) (LEFT) (RIGHT)
(3) (3) (3)
cs (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
ESP ESP ESP ESP ESP ESP ESP ESP
(2) (2) Cable (2) (2) Cable (2) (2) Cable (2) (2)
0V 0V K5 0V 0V K5 0V 0V K5 0V 0V
.cn
(LEFT) (RIGHT)
(3) (3)
MCCOFF3 +24V
w
(1) (1)
MCCOFF4
350/Y 350/X
://
NOTE
Details such as connector locations may be changed without notice.
581
C. CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
C S
/
om
This appendix describes the cables used for the 20–pin interface
connectors.
The cables are basically the same as those used for the FS16/18 (except
those that have been newly developed).
s.c
The table below lists the cables we have developed for interface
connectors. Contact the manufacturers as required.
re
Configura- Manufactur- Manufacturer
Cable name Purpose FANUC specification
tion er specification
pa
2–core cable A66L–0001–0275
of αC series 2 wires Cable, Ltd 1P0.3SQ
Hitachi UL20276–SB(0)
Cable, Ltd. 10PX28AWG(7/0.127)
cs
09 mm2
0.09
0
10–pair cable For general use A66L–0001–0284#10P Oki Electric
10 pairs
Cable Co., 7/0.127 10P VX10–SV
.cn
Ltd.
Hitachi F–CO–VV(0)–SB
0.5 mm2 Cable, Ltd. 6X0.5SQ+3PX0.18SQ
Composite For pulse coder
6 cables
w
Shinko Elec-
For high–resolution 0.18 mm2
10–pair cable A66L–0001–0367 tric Industries FNC–019
w
582
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX C. CABLES
2–core cable
D Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
/
om
Manufacturer – Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Rating – 80_C, 30V
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed
copper
s.c
Insulator – Irradiation Crosslinking Poliethylene
Shield braid – Aluminum laminate poliestel tape is
binded on both sides
re
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 2
pa
Conduc- Size mm2 0.3
tor
Structure Conduc- 7/0.26
tors
cs
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.78
.cn
Insulator Standard thickness mm 0.3
Outside diameter mm About 1.38
Twisted Outside diameter mm About 2.8
w
pair
Strand Outside diameter mm –
w
perfor
perfor-
mance Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. AC1500
Insulation resistance MΩ–km More than 1000 (20°C)
ht
D Specifications
Drain wire
1 Conductor
Lay Wire No. color
2 Insulation
1 Red
Shield
2 Black
Sheath
583
C. CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
10–pair cable
D Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
/
Manufacturer Hitachi Cable,Ltd.
om
Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
Rating – 60°C 30V:UL2789
80°C 30V:UL80276
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed
copper (ASTM B–286)
s.c
Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
re
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conduc- Size AWG 28
pa
tor
Structure Conduc- 7/0.127
tors
/mm
cs
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.08 (3.1mm)
.cn
pair
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Collect the required number of twisted
w
as required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
://
584
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX C. CABLES
D Cable structure
/
wire wire
1
om
Twisted 1 Blue White
10 2 pair wire
2 Yellow White
5
Binding 3 Green White
9 3 tape
4 Red White
6 Shield
s.c
braid 5 Purple White
8 4
Sheath 6 Blue Brown
7
7 Yellow Brown
Green
re
8 Brown
9 Red Brown
10 Purple Brown
pa
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
cs
Fig.C (a) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
.cn
Insulator color
Dot mark
w
color
Dot mark
Pair No.
1
Twisted
1 Orange Red Black
–pair
w
Shield
7
braid
5 Pink Red Black
8 4
Sheath
6 Orange Red Black
tp
5
7 Gray Red Black
8 White Red Black
ht
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
585
C. CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
Manufacturer – Oki Cable, Ltd.
Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
om
Rating – 80°C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid–shielded – Strand wire of tinned annealed cop-
wire,drain wire per
(JIS C3152)
s.c
Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retar-
dant
re
vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs)
pa
(7 to 9)
Conduc- Size mm2 0.5 0.18
tor
Structure Conduc- 20/0.18 7/0.18
cs tors
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
.cn
pair
Direction of lay – Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
w
586
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX C. CABLES
/
om
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length m 100
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Resistance of conductor Ω/km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)
s.c
perfor- (at 20°C) (wire nos.)
mance
Insulation resistance MΩ–km 15
(at 20°C)
re
Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test
VW–1SC of UL standards,
NOTE
pa
cs
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other
than the drain wire.
.cn
Drain wire
Red
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
7
://
6 White 1
Red Black 0.5–mm2 insulated wire
White
587
C. CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
10–pair cable
D Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0367 (FNC–019)
Manufacturer Shinko Electric Industries Co., Ltd.
/
om
Rating – 80°C 60V
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper
(JIS C 3152)
Insulator – Heat–resistant polivinyl chioride
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
s.c
Sheath – Heat–resistant, oil–resistance,
flame–retardent polivinyl chioride (S–3)
Number of pairs Pairs 10
re
Conductor Nominal cross–sectional mm2 0.18
area
Structure Conduc- 7/0.18
pa
tors
/mm
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 0.54
cs
Thickness mm 0.25 (Average thickness : 90% or
Insulator
more)
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 1.04
.cn
Twisted Outside diameter (approx.) mm 2.08 (pitch : 25 mm or less)
pair
Lay Diameter (approx.) mm 6.5
Tape– Diameter (approx.) mm 6.6
w
wound wire
Shield Element wire diameter mm 0.12 (Braid density : 75% or more)
w
Outside diameter mm
Electrical Resistance of conductor Ω/km 110 or less (20°C JIS C 3005 6)
perfor
perfor-
Dielectric strength VAC/min. 500 (JISx C 3005 8 (2))
://
mance
Insulation resistance MΩ–km 15 or more (20°C JIS C 3005 9.1)
tp
Pair
No. Dot mark color
ht
1 Black/Orange
3
10 Conductor 2 Black/Gray
4 Insulator
1 3 White/Yellow
9 Binding 4 White/Green
5 tape
2 5 White/Brown
Shield
braid 6 White/Orange
8
6 Sheath 7 White/Gray
7
8 Black/Yellow
9 Black/Green
10 Black/Brown
588
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX C. CABLES
/
Rating – 80°C 60V
om
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper
(JIS C 3152)
Insulator – Heat–resistant polivinyl chioride
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant, oil–resistance, flame–re-
s.c
tardent polivinyl chioride (S–3)
Number of pairs Pairs 6 10 (5–pair)
Conductor Nominal cross–sectional mm2 0.5 0.18
area
re
Structure Conduc- 20/0.18 7/0.18
tors/mm
pa
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 0.9 0.54
Insulator Thickness mm 0.25 (Average thick- 0.2 (Average thick-
ness : 90% or more) ness : 90% or more)
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 1.5 0.94
cs
Twisted Outside diameter (approx.) mm – 1.88 (pitch : 20 mm
pair or less)
Lay Diameter (approx.) mm 6.5
.cn
ductor
Dielectricstrength VAC/min. 500 (JISx C 3005 8 (2))
Insulation resistance MΩ–km 15 or more (20°C JIS C 3005 9.1)
tp
Pair Size
No. Dot mark color mm2
ht
1 Red 0.5
4
Conductor 2 Red 0.5
11 3 Insulator 3 White/Yellow 0.18
1 Binding 4 Black 0.5
10 5 tape 5 White/Green 0.18
2 Shield
9 6 6 Black 0.5
braid
Sheath 7 White/Gray 0.18
8 7 8 Black/Orange 0.18
9 Black 0.5
10 Black/Brown 0.18
11 Red 0.5
589
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
Name Number of Figure
s.c
AMP Connector (3) Fig. 3
Contact for AMP Connector Fig. 4
PCR Connector (Crimp Type) Fig. 5
re
PCR Connector (Solder Type) Fig. 6
FI40 Connector (Solder type)–(1) Fig. 7
pa
FI40 Connector (Solder type)–(2) Fig. 8
Connector Case (HONDA PCR Type) Fig. 9
cs
Connector Case (HIROSE FI Type)–(1) Fig. 10
Connector Case (HIROSE FI Type)–(2) Fig. 11
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
590
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
/
om
Manufacture : AMP JAPAN, LTD.
Type : (AMP) 1–178128–3 3 PE
Usage : Control power 1 phase 200VAC (CX1A) CX1A 2 200S
s.c
Emergency stop signal input (CX4) 1 200R
For dynamic brake drive coil (CX9)
3 +24V
re
CX4 2 ESP
1
pa
Key location
Circuit No.
(25.5)
cs
3 2 1
.cn
AMP D–3
X
22.8
16.3
w
w
19.24
0.6
w
10.16
5.08
://
7.15
4.05
6.55
tp
3.1
ht
3 2 1
Circuit No.
591
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
Manufacture : AMP JAPAN, LTD.
Type : (AMP) 2–178128–3 (CX3) 3 MCCOFF3
Usage : For dynamic brake interlock signal (CX8) CX3 2
s.c
1 MCCOFF4
3 INTL
re
CX8 2
1 +24V
pa
Circuit No.
(29.7) Key location
3 2 1
AMP
cs
D–3
"0.3
Y
"0.3
22.8
.cn
16.3
w
(19.24)
"0.3
0.6
10.16
w
5.08
w
"0.3
"0.3
://
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
tp
ht
3 2 1
Cricuit No.
592
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
/
om
Manufacture : AMP JAPAN, LTD.
Type : (AMP) 1–178288–3 3 ESP
Usage : Control power +24VDC input (CX2A/B) CX2A 2 0V
s.c
CX2B
1 +24V
Key location
re
(22.96)
pa
Circuit No.
cs
3 2 1
AMP
.cn
D–3
Y
22.8
16.3
w
16.7
w
0.6
7.62
3.81
w
://
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
tp
ht
3 2 1
Circuit No.
593
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
Manufacture : AMP JAPAN, LTD.
Model : (AMP) 2–178129–6 A B
Application : Used for phase detection signal (CX10) 3 400T
s.c
CX10
2 400S
1 400R
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
Keying indication
594
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
/
om
Manufacture : AMP JAPAN, LTD.
Type : (AMP) 1–175218–2
Cable : AWG16, 18, 20
s.c
re
(21.8) A–A
"0.4
2.9
pa
"0.5
2.9
cs
1
In case of reel
"0.5
3
B–B
17.8
.cn
"0.4
4.2
(9.3) (2.5) B
"0.2
2.9 A
"0.5
"0.2
5.5
3.4
–AMP
w "0.2
(∅2.6)
2.5
PRESSER 1D–MARK
://
tp
ht
595
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
Manufacture : HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
Type : PCR–E20FA (crimp type)
Usage : Interface
s.c
Housing : PCS–V20L (plastic)
See to Fig. 10.
re
A
B 0
pa
–0.05
C "0.1
1.27
cs X
7.3
.cn
X
0 15°
D –0.1
w
7 0+0.1
w 15.2
w
1.27
C "0.1
://
tp
ht
596
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
/
om
Manufacture : HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
Type : PCR–E20FS (solder type)
Usage : Interface
s.c
Housing : PCS–V20L (plastic)
See to Fig. 10.
re
pa
A
n
2
cs
1.27 1
7.3
.cn
n n)1
2
w
Display
HONDA
7
w 15.1
w
1.27
://
B
tp
ht
Type number A B
PCR–E20FS 21.65 11.43
597
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
Manufacture : HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Type : FI40–2015S (solder type)
Usage : Pulse coder
s.c
Magnetic sensor
Position coder
Housing : FI–20–CV (plastic)
See to Fig. 11
re
16.25 15°
11.43
pa
1.27
NOTE
10 9 8
cs 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
This connector
5.5
2.2
9.2
1.7
does not contact
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
locations 11, 13,
.cn
13.35
19.2
w
Tab for
w
shield
connec-
tion
w
://
4.3
3
tp
5
8.5
1.8
ht
2.4 2.4
A A
Section AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Standard
1/10)
10 8 6 4 2
9 7 5 3 1
598
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
/
om
Manufacture : HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Type : FI40B–20S (solder type)
Usage : Pulse generator
s.c
Built–in sensor
High resolution pulse coder
High resolution position coder
Housing : FI–20–CV5 (plastic)
re
See to Fig. 12
pa
20.9"0.3
0
16.25–0.1
0
13.35–0.05
1.1"0.1
cs
9.2 "0.3
2.2 +0.15
5"0.3
5.5 –0.1
0
.cn
1.27 "0.05
11.43 "0.1
w
22.15"0.3
5
w
+0.1
70
w 3.3 "0.2
4.6 "0.3
2.6 "0.3
4.2 "0.2
://
Lot display
5 "0.5
8.5 "0.5
"0.5
tp
1
1.2"0.3
ht
(0.8)
4 5.2"0.3
599
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
Manufacture : HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
Type : PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)
9.5
s.c
re
pa
cs 21 11.4
.cn
HONDA
37
w
w
w
30
://
tp
ht
Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
600
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
/
om
Manufacture : HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Type : FI–20–CV
s.c
Case
Lock bracket
re
Lock lever
Cable clamp
Set screw for cable clamp
pa
21"0.3
11.5"0.3
9.5"0.2
cs
.cn
37 "0.5
w
17.5"0.3
w
30"0.3
://
tp
ht
601
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
Manufacture : HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Type : FI–20–CV5
s.c
R4.75"0.3
9"0.0.8
3.81 "0.0.8
5.85"0.0.8
re
pa
cs
21 "0.3 5 11.5"0.3
.cn
6 7
4
w
w
1.7 "0.15
17.5 "0.3
(25)
://
10.65"0.1
10.65"0.1 3
30"0.3 2 1
2 2
tp
ht
602
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX E. CABLE LENGTH
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
603
E. CABLE LENGTH APPENDIX B–65162E/03
E.1
SPINDLE CABLE
LENGTH (WHEN
RECOMMENDED
CABLES ARE USED)
/
om
Recommended
Detector Cable structure Maximum cable length
cable
M sensor 0.5mm2, 6 conductors (for power supply) 72m
A66L–0001–0368
(pulse generator) 0.18mm2, 5 pairs (for signals) When one power line is used
s.c
MZ sensor, BZ sensor 0.5mm2, 6 conductors (for power supply) 50m
A66L–0001–0368
(built–in sensor) 0.18mm2, 5 pairs (for signals) When one power line is used
Magnetic sensor 0.5mm2, 6 conductors (for power supply) 25m
A66L–0001–0286
re
(for orientation) 0.18mm2, 3 pairs (for signals) When one power line is used
0.5mm2, 6 conductors (for power supply) 7m
Position coder A66L–0001–0286
0.18mm2, 3 pairs (for signals) When one power line is used
pa
High–resolution mag- 0.18mm2, 10 pairs (for power supply and 18m
A66L–0001–0367
netic pulse coder signals) When one power line is used
High–resolution posi-
cs
0.18mm2, 10 pairs (for power supply and 7m
A66L–0001–0367
tion coder signals) When one power line is used
.cn
When a cable other than one of the recommended cables above is used,
the voltage drop in the cable must be within 0.2 V for a +5 V power supply.
(Tip) Maximum cable length L can be found from the following formula:
L [m]x0.2 [V] n[line]B2BI [A]BR [Ω / m]
w
Check the check board to confirm that the feedback signal waveform of
each detector satisfies the specifications.
604
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX E. CABLE LENGTH
E.2
SERVO CABLE
LENGTH (WHEN
RECOMMENDED
CABLES ARE USED)
/
om
Recommended
Cable structure Maximum cable length
cable
0.5 mm2, 6 conductors
(for power supply) 14m
A66L–0001–0286
s.c
0.18mm2, 3 pairs When two power lines are used
(for signals)
When a cable longer than 14 m is used, ensure that the sum of the
re
resistances of 0 V and 5 V is 0.5 ohms or less.
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
605
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
F SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
/
The following table lists the specifications of cables.
om
The cables without FANUC’s specification or the cables with different
cable length shall be prepared by Machine Tool Builder.
(1) Power supply module
s.c
Sym- FANUC specification
Use Specification
bol (complete cable)
re
Power supply side
pa φ14
PSMR side (TB2)
cs
T5.5–4
PSMR–3
K1
(Power line) Heat–resistive vinyle cable 3.5mm2 (45/0.32)
.cn
w
φ16.5
PSM side (TB2)
Power supply side PSMR–5.5 T5.5–4
tp
606
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
PSM–11
K1
/
(Power line)
om
Power supply side φ5.8 PSM side (TB2)
T8–4S (Note2)
s.c
re
φ24
Power supply side PSM side (TB2)
pa
T14–6
PSM–15
K1
(Power line)
Heat–resistive vinyle cable 14mm2 (88/0.45)
cs
.cn
PSM–26
PSM–30 K1
w
(Power line)
φ9.6
://
NOTE
1 Heat–resistant cable: Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. Contact:
ht
03(3286)3144
LMFC (Fire–retardant Polyflex electric cable, Maximum
allowable conductor temperature: 105°C)
2 Crimp terminal: Nichifu Contact: 03(3452)7381
8–4S
607
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
PSM–37 Power supply side φ11.7 PSM side (TB2)
K1
(Power line) T38–6S (Note 2)
s.c
Power supply side φ9.6 PSM side (TB2)
T22–6
re
Heat–resistive vinyle cable (Note 1) 50mm2 (19/16/0.45)3 each
pa
cs
PSM–45
K1 Power supply side φ13.6 PSM side (TB2)
(Power line)
T60–10
.cn
Heat–resistive vinyle cable (Note 1) 22mm2 (7/20/0.45)1 each
T22–6
w
NOTE
1 Heat–resistant cable: Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. Contact:
w
03(3286)3144
LMFC (Fire–retardant Polyflex electric cable, Maximum
allowable conductor temperature: 105°C)
://
608
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
(Note 1)
PSM
/
(For control
K3
om
power 1φ,
200VAC) φ9.6
PSM side (CX1A)
Power supply side AMP connector
Housing : 1–178128–3
Contact : 1–175218–2
s.c
Vinyle cabtyre cable JIS C 3312 2–core 1.25mm2 (50/0.18)
PSM
re
(For power
between
K4
PSM and
pa
SPM, 1φ, φ9.6
A set of
200VAC) PSM side (CX1B) SPM side (CX1A) K4, K5, K8
AMP connector AMP connector
Housing : 1–178128–3 Housing : 1–178128–3
A06B–6078–K808
cs
Contact : 1–175218–2 Contact : 1–175218–2
(Cable length : 200m)
PSM and
SPM, φ10.5
24VDC) PSM side (CX2B) SPM side (CX2A)
AMP connector AMP connector
w
PSM
(For
interface
K8
tp
between
PSM and
SPM) PSM side (JX1B) SPM side (JX1A)
HONDA connector HONDA connector
ht
NOTE
1 Vinyle cabtyre cable for protective earth JIS C 3312 1–core
1.25mm2 (50/0.18)
2 FANUC’S specification (Material only) :
A66L–0001–0284#10P
609
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
PSM
(For
/
external K6
om
MCC
control) φ9.6 PSM side (CX3)
MCC side AMP connector
Housing : 2–178128–3
Contact : 1–175218–2
s.c
Vinyle cabtyre cable JIS C 3312 2–core 1.25mm2 (50/0.18)
re
PSM
(For
Emergency K7
pa
stop signal
input) φ9.6 PSM side (CX4)
Emergency stop AMP connector
contact Housing : 1–178128–3
cs Contact : 1–175218–2
Dedicated
to PSMV–
HV (For
K7
w
phase
detection φ10.5 PSMV side (CX10)
signal input) AC reactor side AMP connector
w
Housing : 2–178129–6
Contact : 1–175218–2
w
://
tp
ht
610
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
α1, α2
/
αM2, αM2.5
om
A06B–6050–K824
K10
(Motor (Cable length : 14m)
power line) φ10 Motor side
SVM side (TB2) AMP connector
V1–43 Connector kit :
V2–M42 A06B–6050–K121
s.c
A66L–0001–0410#80.75 (FNC–074) (Note)
α1, α2
αM2, αM2.5
re
A06B–6050–K825
(Motor K10
(Cable length : 14m)
power line)
With a brake φ10 Motor side
pa
SVM side (TB2) AMP connector
V1–45 Connector kit :
V2–M42 A06B–6050–K121
cs
NOTE
Heat–resistant cable:
.cn
Shinko Electric Industries Co., Ltd.
Contact: 03(3492)0073 Tokyo Sales Office
06(363)2691 Osaka Headquarters
Cable conforming to IEC (oil–resistant PVC)
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
611
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
A06B–6079–K800
φ11.7
om
Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
SVM side (TB2) Connector:
α3, α6 , V2–43 H/MS3106A18–10S–
αM3, αM6, V3–41 D–T(10)
αM9, αC3, Cable clamp:
αC6, αL3, H/MS3057–10A(10)
s.c
αL6,
αL6 αL9,
αL9 K21
β1, β2, β3, A66L–0001–0410#42.5 (FNC–065) (Note)
and β6
(motor
power line)
re
A06B–6079–K801
φ11.7 Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
pa
SVM side (TB2) Connector:
V2–43 H/MS3108B18–10S–
V3–41 D–T(10)
Cable clamp:
cs H/MS3057–10A(10)
A06B–6079–K802
φ11.7 Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
w
Cable clamp:
α22/2000, JL04–2022CK(14)
α30/1200,
K21
αC12,
w
A06B–6079–K803
φ11.7 Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
tp
Cable clamp:
JL04–2022CK(14)
NOTE
Heat–resistant cable:
Shinko Electric Industries Co., Ltd.
Contact: 03(3492)0073 Tokyo Sales Office
06(363)2691 Osaka Headquarters
Cable conforming to IEC (oil–resistant PVC)
612
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
/
A06B–6079–K804
φ19.7
om
Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
Connector:
α22/3000, SVM side (TB2) JL04V–6A24–10SE
α30/2000, T8–4S (Note 2) (G)–EB
α30/3000, Cable clamp:
α40, αC22, JL04–2428CK–(17)
s.c
αL25,
αL25 αL50,
αL50 K21
αM22, A66L–0001–0410#410 (FNC–077) (Note 1)
αM30
(motor
power line)
re
A06B–6079–K805
φ19.7 Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
pa
Connector:
SVM side (TB2) JL04V–8A24–10SE
T8–4S (Note 2) (G)–EB
Cable clamp:
cs JL04–2428CK–(17)
power line)
SPM side (TB2) Motor side
φ5.2
T22–6 T22–8
w
For
SVM–DBM K26
(power line)
://
NOTE
1 Heat–resistant cable:
Shinko Electric Industries Co., Ltd.
Contact: 03(3492)0073 Tokyo Sales Office
06(363)2691 Osaka Headquarters
Cable conforming to IEC (oil–resistant PVC)
2 Crimp terminal: Nichifu Contact: 03(3452)7381
8–4S
3 Heat–resistant cable: Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. Contact:
03(3286)3144
LMFC (Fire–retardant Polyflex electric cable, Maximum
allowable conductor temperature: 105°C)
613
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
(for FS15B, A06B–6050–K853
K22
om
16, 18, 20, (Cable length : 14m)
SVM pulse SPM side (JY2) φ8.5
coders) Connector manufactured by Hirose Electric Motor side
Connector: FI40A–20S Connector kit:
Housing: FI–20–CV5 A06B–6050–K1
15
s.c
Composite 12–conductor group shielded cable,
6 conductors 0.5mm2 (20/0.18)
3 pairs 0.18 mm2 (7/0.18) (Note 4)
α1, α2,
re
αM2, αM2.5
(for FS0, A06B–6050–K854
K22
FS15A, (Cable length : 14m)
pa
pulse cod- CNC side (M**) φ8.5
ers) Connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin Motor side
Kogyo Connector kit:
Connector: MR–20LMH A06B–6050–K1
cs 15
.cn
NOTE
4 FANUC drawing number (wire only): A66L–0001–0286
Contact:
Hitachi Cable Trading Company 03(3255)5415
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 044(766)3171
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
614
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
/
A02B–0200–K800
α22, α30, Motor side
om
NC side(JF*) (Cable length : 14m)
α40, α65, φ8.5 Connector:
SVM side (JF*)
α100, α150, H/MS3106A20–29SW(11)
Connector manufactured by
αM3, αM6, Hirose Electric
JA06A–20–29SW–JI–EB
αM9, αM22, Cable clamp:
Connector: FI40–2015S H/MS3057–12A
αM30, αC3, Housing: FI–20–CV
s.c
αC6,
αC6 αC12,
αC12 K22
αC22, αL3, Composite 12–conductor group shielded cable,
6 conductors 0.5mm2 (20/0.18)
αL6, αL9, 3 pairs 0.18 mm2 (7/0.18) (Note 4)
αL25, αL50
re
(for FS15B,
16, 18, 20,
SVM pulse A02B–0200–K801
Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
coders) NC side(JF*)
pa
φ8.5 Connector:
SVM side (JF*)
H/MS3106A20–29SW(11)
Connector manufactured by JA06A–20–29SW–JI–EB
Hirose Electric Cable clamp:
Connector: FI40–2015S H/MS3057–12A
cs
Housing: FI–20–CV
φ8.5 Connector:
α100, α150, NC side(JF*) H/MS3106A20–29SW(11)
αM3, αM6, Connector manufactured by JA06A–20–29SW–JI–EB
w
(for FS0
and FS15A
pulse cod- A02B–0098–K861
Motor side (Cable length : 14m)
ers) φ8.5
tp
Connector:
NC side(M*) H/MS3106A20–29SW(11)
Connector manufactured by JA06A–20–29SW–JI–EB
Cable clamp:
ht
NOTE
4 FANUC drawing number (wire only): A66L–0001–0286
Contact:
Hitachi Cable Trading Company 03(3255)5415
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 044(766)3171
615
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
CNC–AMP-
/
K23
TYPE A I/F
φ6.2
om
CNC side (JV**) SVM side (JV**)
Connector manufactured by Connector manufactured
Honda Tsushin Kogyo by Honda Tsushin Kogyo
Connector: PCR–E20FA Connector: PCR–E20FA
Housing: PCR–V20LA Housing: PCR–V20LA
A02B–0120–K800
0.09mm2 (Cable length : 5m)
s.c
Twisted pair unified shield 10–pair (7/0.127) (Note 5)
CNC–AMP-
re
K23
TYPE B I/F
CNC side (JV**) φ6.2 SVM side (JV**)
Connector manufactured by Connector manufactured
pa
Honda Tsushin Kogyo by Honda Tsushin Kogyo
Connector: PCR–E20FA Connector: PCR–E20FA
Housing: PCR–V20LA Housing: PCR–V20LA
NOTE
5 FANUC drawing number (wire only): A66L–0001–0286#10P
w
Contact:
Hitachi Cable Trading Company 03(3255)5415
://
616
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
SVM–DBM
/
(for interlock K24
signal)
om
SVM side (CX8) φ9.6 Dynamic brake side
Connector manufactured by AMP Japan T2–4
Receptacle housing: 2–178128–3
Receptacle contact: 1–175218–2
s.c
Vinyle cabtyre cable JIS C 3312 2–core 1.25mm2 (50/0.18)
SVM–DBM
re
(for driving K25
coil)
SVM side (CX9) φ9.6 Dynamic brake side
pa
Connector manufactured by AMP Japan T2–4
Receptacle housing: 2–178128–3
Receptacle contact: 1–175218–2
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
617
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
om
A06B–6050–K801
α0.5 (Cable length : 14m)
(Motor K10
power line) A06B–6050–K803
φ10 Motor side (Cable length : 7m)
SPM side (TB2) AMP connector
s.c
T1.25–4 Connector kit :
A06B–6050–K121
Vinyle cabtyre cable JIS C 3312 4–core 2mm2 (37/0.26)
re
α1
(Motor K10
pa
power line)
φ12
SPM side (TB2) Motor side
T2–4 T2–5
cs
Vinyle cabtyre cable JIS C 3312 4–core 3.5mm2 (45/0.32)
.cn
φ14
w
618
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
/
om
φ20
α6 SPM side (TB2) Motor side
αP8, αP12 T8–4S T8–5
K10
(Motor
power line) Heat resistive vinyle cable 3.5mm2 (45/0.32)
s.c
re
SPM side (TB2) Motor side
T5.5–4S φ4.6 T5.5–5
pa
Heat resistive vinyle cable 5.5mm2 (35/0.45)
α8
cs
αP15
K10
(Motor
power line)
.cn
α15
αP22
K10
(Motor
power line)
619
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
α18
αP30
K10
/
(Motor
power line)
om
SPM side (TB2) Motor side
T14–6 φ7 T14–8
s.c
α22
αP40
αP50
K10
αP60
re
(Motor
power line)
SPM side (TB2) Motor side
φ9.6
pa
T22–6 T22–8
T22–6 T22–10
PSM–45
K10 φ13.6
tp
NOTE
1 Heat–resistant cable: Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.
Contact: 03(3286)3144
LMFC (Fire–retardant Polyflex electric cable, Maximum
allowable conductor temperature: 105°C)
2 Crimp terminal: Nichifu Contact: 03(3452)7381 8–4S
3 Crimp terminal: Japan Crimp Terminal Production 38–6S
620
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
SPM
(Interface
/
K12
between NC
om
and SPM) NC side (JA7A) SPM side (JA7B)
HONDA connector HONDA connector
Connector : PCR–E20FA Connector : PCR–E20FA
Housing : PCR–V20LA Housing : PCR–V20LA
s.c
shield cable 5–pair 0.18mm2 (7/0.18) (Note 2)
PSM
(For pulse
re
A06B–6078–K811
generator, K14
(Cable length : 7m)
Built–in
sensor) SPM side (JY2) Motor side
pa
HIROSE connector AMP connector
Connector : FI40B–20S Housing : 178289–6
Housing : FI–20–CV5 Connector : 1–175217–2
cs
Composite 16–core unified 6–core 0.5mm2 (20/0.18)
shield cable 5–pair 0.18mm2 (7/0.18) (Note 2)
.cn
α0.5
(For pulse
generator, K14
Built–in
sensor)
w
Housing : FI–20–CV5
SPM
(For A06B–6078–K813
K15
magnetic (Cable length : 7m)
sensor)
tp
Housing : FI–20–CV
NOTE
1 FANUC’S specification (Material only) :
A66L–0001–0284#10P
2 FANUC’S specification (Material only) : A66L–0001–0368
3 FANUC’S specification (Material only) : A66L–0001–0286
621
F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
A06B–6078–K814
om
(Cable length : 7m)
SPM side (JY3) Position coder side
HIROSE connector Connector :
Connector : FI40–2015S MS3106B 20–29S
SPM Housing : FI–20–CV Cable clamp :
(For MS3057–12A
s.c
K16
Position
coder) Composite 12–core unified 6–core 0.5mm2 (20/0.18)
shield cable 3–pair 0.18mm2 (7/0.18) (Note 5)
re
A06B–6078–K815
(Cable length : 7m)
pa
SPM side (JY3) Position coder side
HIROSE connector Connector :
Connec- MS3108B 20–29S
tor : FI40–2015S Cable clamp :
cs
Housing : FI–20–CV MS3057–12A
SPM
(For high–
A06B–6078–K816
resolution K18
(Cable length : 7m)
magnetic
w
Housing : FI–20–CV5
A06B–6078–K817
(Cable length : 7m)
SPM side (JY4) Position coder side
HIROSE connector Connector :
tp
A06B–6078–K818
(Cable length : 7m)
SPM side (JY4) Position coder side
HIROSE connector Connector :
Connector : FI40B–20S MS3108B 20–29S
Housing : FI–20–CV5 Cable clamp :
MS3057–12A
622
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX F. SPECIFICATIONS OF CABLES
NOTE
1 FANUC’S specification (Material only) :
A66L–0001–0284#10P
2 FANUC’S specification (Material only) : A66L–0001–0368
3 FANUC’S specification (Material only) : A66L–0001–0286
4 FANUC’S specification (Material only) : A66L–0001–0367
/
om
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
623
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
PROTECTION APPENDIX B–65162E/03
/
This appendix describes how noise is generated when a servo motor or
om
spindle motor is driven by a servo amplifier, and also describes
countermeasures required for devices affected by noise.
While referring to this appendix, the user should pay careful attention to
noise protection when installing the machine.
s.c
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
624
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX PROTECTION
G.1
SERVO AMPLIFIER
NOISE GENERATION
Fig. G.1 is a schematic diagram of a servo amplifier.
/
om
Converter section Inverter section
s.c
Power
supply Motor
re
pa
Control
circuit
Noise current i
cs
Control power supply
.cn
high speed. Each time a transistor is turned on or off, noise current (i)
flows to ground through stray capacitance (C) between the cable or motor
w
and ground. The value of this noise current (i) depends on stray
capacitance (C) and transistor switching speed (dV/dt), as follows:
://
i = C dV/dt
The frequency band of this noise is about 30 to 40 MHz. So, a device
using low frequencies (such as an AM radio) is affected by this noise.
tp
However, FM radios and TV sets, which use higher frequencies, are not
normally affected by this noise.
ht
625
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
PROTECTION APPENDIX B–65162E/03
G.2 Noise generated by a servo amplifier are classified into the three major
types described below.
TYPES OF NOISE
(1) Conductive Noise
Noise generated by a servo amplifier travels through a conductor such as
a run wire, and affects a device connected to the same power supply.
/
om
Power supply Servo amplifier Motor
s.c
re
Electronic
pa
device Noise can travel through a shared
cs ground wire.
Sensor
Signal line
Electronic
tp
device
ht
626
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX PROTECTION
Sensor
Signal line
/
Electronic
om
device
s.c
Fig.G.2 (c) Electrostatically Induced Noise
re
(3) Radiation Noise
Noise generated in a servo amplifier is radiated into the surroundings,
pa
with a power line acting as an antenna.
cs
Power supply Servo amplifier Motor
.cn
w
Electronic
device
Sensor
w
w
Noise travels in many different ways, and affects the system to various
://
627
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
PROTECTION APPENDIX B–65162E/03
G.3.1 If a noise problem is detected after installation, more costs may be incurred
/
Precautions to be to solve the problem. So, the following precautions must be applied:
om
Applied Prior to 1 Separate power lines and motor power lines from signal lines.
Installation 2 Contain power lines and motor power lines in a metallic conduit.
3 Perform appropriate grounding installation including grounding
s.c
wire connections. (This also serves as a measure against electric
shock due to leakage currents.)
4 Grounding wires should be as thick and short as possible.
re
The electric installation standard defines types of grounding as follows:
Type of grounding Application Ground resistance
pa
Class–3 grounding 300VAC or less 100Ω or less
Special class–3 grounding 300VAC to 600VAC 10Ω or less
cs
.cn
G.3.2 Noise–related measures including those for devices affected by noise,
Measures must be applied from the viewpoint of the entire system.
(1) Measures to be applied to a device affected by noise
w
1 Separate the power lines and motor power lines from the signal
lines to minimize the influence of noise.
w
3 Run the signal lines through ferrite core beads to maximize the
impedance against noise.
://
4 Employ line filters and shielding wires for the signal lines to
protect against noise.
tp
628
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX PROTECTION
/
om
Use of metallic conduits f f
Wiring and grounding Elimination of parallel wiring f
Employing shielded wires for power lines and motor
f
power lines
s.c
Secure grounding f
re
Insulating transformer
Noise protective device Running signal lines through ferrite core beads f f
(on devices affected by noise) Employing shielded wires for signal lines
pa
f f
Others Power system separation
cs f
G.3.3
.cn
Examples of Noise
Protection
w
(1) AM Radio
<<Symptoms>>
w
When a motor is activated, radios in the plant pick up noise, such that
the radio output becomes inaudible.
w
<<Possible causes>>
Radiation noise from the motor power line connected to a servo
://
<<Notes>>
D The measures described above may prove ineffective in some
areas, such as dense residential areas and mountain areas, where
radio signals are weak.
D When installing a noise filter, minimize the length of the wiring
between the filter and servo amplifier.
(2) FM Radio
<<Symptoms>>
When the machine is operated, radios in the neighborhood are
affected by noise. A radio in a car parked outside the plant also picks
up noise.
629
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
PROTECTION APPENDIX B–65162E/03
<<Possible causes>>
The transformer on a utility pole is shared by neighbors, and noise is
being radiated from the power supply wiring. Noise may also be
conducted through the power supply line.
<<Measures>>
1 Install a noise filter (LC filter) on the power supply.
/
om
2 Feed power to the neighbors from a separate utility pole.
<<Notes>>
D When installing a noise filter, minimize the length of the wiring
between the filter and servo amplifier.
s.c
(3) Refrigerator
<<Symptoms>>
re
When the spindle rotation is decelerated, the motor of a refrigerator
in the neighborhood makes an abnormal sound.
pa
<<Possible causes>>
The transformer on a utility pole is shared by neighbors, and voltage
distortion is caused by power regeneration at spindle deceleration.
cs
<<Measures>>
1 Feed power to the neighbors from a separate utility pole.
.cn
2 Review the power supply capacity.
<<Notes>>
D A plant located in a dense residential area often takes its power
from a utility pole that also supplies power to neighboring houses
w
(light power sharing), such that the power supply capacity of the
system may be insufficient. In such a case, a larger power
w
(4) Telephone
://
<<Symptoms>>
When the machine is operated, the telephone of a house across the
street is affected by noise.
tp
<<Possible causes>>
When a high–frequency current from the servo amplifier or motor
ht
630
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX PROTECTION
(5) FAX
<<Symptoms>>
When the machine is operated, e telephone within the plant picks up
noise, or a facsimile machine of a neighboring firm is disabled. The
telephone within the plant uses 100 V; when the 100–V supply is
removed, normal telephone communications are resumed.
/
<<Possible causes>>
om
The transformer of a utility pole is shared, so that conductive noise
is conveyed through the power line. Or, noise may be induced in the
wiring as in the case of (4) above.
<<Measures>>
s.c
1 Feed power to the neighbors from a separate utility pole.
2 Install an insulating transformer (noise cut transformer) in the
re
power supply.
<<Notes>>
D As with (4) above, a noise filter (LC filter) may have no effect on
pa
low–frequency noise.
cs
G.3.4 As mentioned above, the protective measures and devices depend on the
types of noise, noise sources, and the level of the noise. Noise–preventive
.cn
Noise–preventive
devices are outlined below. The user should apply measures that are
Devices appropriate for the situation. For details including the specifications of
these devices, contact the corresponding manufacturer. The contact for
w
Example products:
Okaya Electric : 3SUP–H/3SUP–D series
Soshin Electric : NF3000/HF3000 series
TDK : ZRCT/ZRGT series
Tokin : LH–3/LH–4 series
(2) Capacitor
A capacitor is directly connected to a servo amplifier to reduce radiation
noise from the power line. When compared with a noise filter, a capacitor
offers poorer attenuation characteristics, but is often more effective,
depending on the electromagnetic wave status. Considering the leakage
current, select a ground fault interrupter.
631
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
PROTECTION APPENDIX B–65162E/03
Example products :
Okaya Electric : 3XYB–105 104
Soshin Electric : LW3/LY3 series
(3) Zero–phase reactor
A zero–phase reactor is installed between a power supply and servo
/
amplifier to reduce the amount noise being radiated from the power line.
om
Example product:
Soshin Electric : RC series
(4) Noise Cut Transformer
s.c
A noise cut transformer is installed between a power supply and device.
This transformer is used to reduce the amount of radiation noise (low
frequency) being conveyed through a power line or ground wire.
re
Example product:
Fuji Electric : FFT series
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
632
G. SERVO AMPLIFIER NOISE
B–65162E/03 APPENDIX PROTECTION
G.4
OTHERS
/
Hz), usually, up to several kHz; a higher frequency (several kHz or higher)
om
is referred to as noise.
In many cases, noise is generated from an inverter section, while
harmonics are generated from a converter section. Accordingly, these
differ in the problems they incur and the corresponding countermeasures.
s.c
For harmonics, a harmonics suppression guideline has been established.
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
633
B–65162E/03 Index
[Numbers] [D]
200–V Input Series, 8, 14, 50, 72, 127 Decrease in Load Factor for Given Ambient Tempera-
ture, 121
200V Power Supply , 578
Detectors for the Spindle, 536
400–V Input Series, 11, 20, 53, 77, 134
DI and DO Signals, 479
400V Power Supply, 579
/
DI/DO Signals, 488
om
Differential Spindle Speed Control, 532
Disconnection Annulment Signal (DSCNA), 382
[A] Dynamic Brake Module (DBM), 161
a Position Coder, 537
s.c
AC Line Filter, 148
AC Reactor, 146
[E]
Emergency Stop Signal (*ESP) – Contact Input Signal
re
AC Reactor Unit, 145 –, 354
Alarm Reset Signal (ARSTA), 371, 400 Emergency Stop Signal (*ESP) Block Diagram, 355
pa
AM Radio , 629 Emergency Stop Signal (*ESPA), 368, 397
Environmental Conditions, 84
Example of Selecting a Power Supply Module (PSM),
cs
57
[B]
Example of Selecting a Power Supply Module (PSM–
BZ Sensor, 544 HV), 66
.cn
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 112 Example of Sequence of Differential Speed Rigid Tap,
534
Cable Connection Details, 194
w
Cautions in Use, 508, 519 External Dimensions and Maintenance Area, 139
CE Marking Requirements, 115
tp
Characteristic, 532
[F]
Circuit Breaker, 162
Fan Adaptor, 155
ht
i–1
Index B–65162E/03
[N]
Noise Prevention, 111
[H] Noise Protection, 628
Heat Dissipation, 126 Noise–preventive Devices, 631
High–resolution Magnetic Pulse Coder, 552 Normal Rotation Command Signal (SFRA), 369, 399
/
High–resolution Position Coder , 539 Notes, 456, 580
om
High–speed Orientation , 426 Notes on Amplifier Installation Related to Safety
Standards, 117
How to Select the Power Supply Module, 47, 59
Notes on the Emergency Stop Circuit Configuration,
How to Select the Power Supply Module (PSM), 55 120
s.c
How to Select the Servo Amplifier Module, 48 Number of Connected Servo Amplifier Modules and
Spindle Amplifier Modules , 56, 59, 66
re
[I] [O]
Input Power, 86
pa
Obtaining the Maximum Output Capacity of a Power
Input Power and Grounding, 86 Supply Module, 65
Installation, 83, 578 Obtaining the Rated Output Capacity of a Power Sup-
ply Module, 65
cs
Interface Signals, 353
Option Related to Spindle, 414
Ordering Information, 14
.cn
[M] [P]
tp
i–2
B–65162E/03 Index
Protecting External Electronic Devices from Noise, Specification of the External One–rotation Signal
115 Switch, 454
Protection Against Electric Shock, 119 SPECIFICATIONS, 71
Protective Installation, 120 Specifications, 418, 433, 448, 458, 478, 496, 511, 522
Specifications of Cables, 606
Specifications of the Position Coder Signal, 533
/
[R] Speed Arrival Signal (SARA), 375
om
Rated Output Capacity, 55 Speed Detecting Signal (SDTA), 373
Rated Output Capacity (PSMR), 59 Speed Integral Control Signal (INTGA), 406
Regenerative Discharge Unit, 158 Speed Meter Voltage Signal (SM), 384
s.c
Restrictions, 511 Speed Range Switching Control, 496
Reverse Rotation Command Signal (SRVA), 370, 400 Spindle Alarm Signal (ALMA), 371, 401
Rigid Tapping, 464 Spindle Amplifier Module, 5, 132
re
Spindle amplifier module, 76, 80
Spindle Amplifier Module Connection Diagram, 256
pa
[S] Spindle Amplifier Modules, 82, 137, 344
Sample Sequence, 480, 491 Spindle Amplifier Output Signals (α Series Spindles),
384
Selecting a Noise Filter, 116
cs
Spindle Amplifier Output Signals (αC Series Spindle),
Selecting a Power Supply Module (PSM–HV), 65 409
Selecting a Power Supply Module (PSMV–HV), 64 Spindle Analog Override Command (OVRA), 407
.cn
Selecting a Power Supply Module When the Machin- Spindle Cable Length (when Recommended Cables
ing Cycle Frequency is High, 56 are Used), 604
Selecting a Regenerative Discharge Unit, 61 Spindle Control DI Signal (PMC to CNC), 359, 391
w
Selecting a Spindle Amplifier Module, 54 Spindle Control DO Signals (CNC to PMC), 364, 395
Separation of Signal Lines, 111 Spindle Control Signals, 500, 514
w
Sequence, 437, 470, 504, 517 SPINDLE CONTROL SIGNALS (α series spindle),
358
Sequence for Emergency Stop, 356
Spindle Control Signals (αC Series Spindle), 390
w
i–3
Index B–65162E/03
Torque Limiting Command Signal (TLMLA,
TLMHA), 370
Summary of Amp Connectors, 581
Types of Noise, 626
SWITCHING UNIT, 521
System Configuration, 432, 447, 464, 475, 484
System Configurations, 441 [W]
/
Weight, 81
om
[T] [Z]
s.c
Torque Limiting Command Signal (TLMHA) (Under Zero–speed Detecting Signal (SSTA), 372
development), 400
re
pa
cs
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht
i–4
Revision Record
re
reproduced in any form.
·
pa
All specifications and designs
are subject to change without
cs
notice.
.cn
w
w
w
://
tp
ht